Home

Korg music workstation/sampler Musical Instrument User Manual

1. O 1 SW 1 key SW 2 key These keys are on off switches their function can be assigned in Program Combination Sequencer Song Play and Sampling modes When on the key will light p 21 2 Joystick Various program parameters and effect parameters will determine what is being controlled by the joystick Move the joystick up down and left right Y Y X X to vary the effect p 21 3 Ribbon controller Various program parameters and effect parameters will determine what is controlled by the ribbon controller Slide your finger to the left or right on this ribbon control ler to vary the effect p 21 4 VOLUME slider This adjusts the volume that is output from the AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO R jacks and the headphone jack 5 REALTIME CONTROLS VALVE Q FORCE REALTIME CONTROLS ON OFF LI O LPF CUTOFF RESONANCE HPF EG INTENSITY EG RELEASE B O ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE2 ASSIGNABLE 3 ASSIGNABLE 4 _ VALVE FORCE O INPUT TRIM ULTRA BOOST TUBE GAIN OUTPUT LEVEL 13 14 15 Use the REALTIME CONTROLS key to select either the the A mode B mode or VALVE FORCE functions for the realtime controllers and use knobs 1 4 to control the tone ef
2. PROG BANK _ SPL COMBI BANK C N K L M C MM E o PROG COMBI BANK PROG BANK A B C D E SMPL F MOSS G GM H I 0 K L M N CO MBI BANK A B C D E H I J K L M N In Program mode these keys select the program bank In Combination mode these keys select the combination bank When assigning a program to the various timbres in a combination then these keys will select the program bank In this case the key of the program bank selected for the timbre will light In Sequencer and Song Play modes when the edit cell highlighted area is located on the program name of a track these keys will select the program bank just as in Combination mode Each time you press the G key when selecting a pro gram the bank selection will step to the next GM 2 bank or GM drum bank in the following order G g 1 g 2 8 8 8 9 g d G g 1 etc The F bank can be only be selected in Program mode and only if the EXB MOSS option is installed 13 SEQUENCER SEQUENCER PAUSE key In Sequencer mode this key pauses the playback of the song or cue list In Song Play mode this key pauses SMF playback When paused the key will light Press PAUSE once again to resume playback the key will turn off lt lt REW key In Sequencer mode this key will rewind the song or cue list When you pre
3. Settings that are automatically copied from the combination The settings that will be automatically copied will be the same settings as if you had executed the page menu com mand Copy From Combi amp PG p 58 and had made the following settings in the dialog box e with Effects checked e To set to Track 1 to 8 e Auto Adjust Arp setting for Multi REC checked Settings that are automatically copied from the program The settings that will be automatically copied will be the same settings as if you had executed the page menu com mand Copy From Program 1 p 39 and had made the following settings in the dialog box e with Effects checked e with Arpeggiator checked e To set to Track 01 e Arpeggiator set to A Copy From Program Copy From Combi Sequencer mode page menu commands Here s how to use the Copy From Program Copy From Combi page menu commands in Sequencer mode note Make sure that the global MIDI channel Global P1 MIDI MIDI Channel is set to 01 1 Create a new song p 50 SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 63 001 01 000 Meter 44 J 120 Manu CiSo00 NEW SONG Reso Hi _ RPPR P Tracka TRACK 1 eer errs Blood Plows DJ aaao D Jaooo D asso Sia Sa pl BD Grand BD Grand BD Grand BD Grand BD Grand BD Grandi BD Grand BD Grand 2 Execute the page menu command Copy From Pro gram or Copy From Combi
4. of the parameter value The 10 s HOLD key is also used when you wish to hold the 10 s place while selecting programs or combina tions By holding down the ENTER key while you press a numeric key 0 9 you can select up to ten page menu commands from the current page In Program and Combi nation modes you can hold down the ENTER key and press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key to turn on the Auto Song Setup function p 58 9 LCD screen The TRITON Extreme features our exclusive TouchView graphic interface based on a touch panel LCD screen By touching on objects that are shown in the LCD screen you can select pages tabs and parameters and set values p 8 10 EXIT key When in P page 1 9 of each mode pressing the EXIT key will move to P page 0 of that mode When a dialog box is open this key will cancel the set tings made in the dialog box and close the dialog box cor responds to the Cancel button If a popup menu or page menu is open pressing EXIT will close the menu 11 MENU key Use this key to move between pages When you press the MENU key a list of the pages in the mode will appear in the LCD screen Press the desired page and you will move to that page You can also move to a page by hold ing down the MENU key and pressing the correspond ing numeric key 0 9 p 9 13 12 BANK keys These keys are used to switch the program combination bank MOSS GM
5. 3 4 Placement Insert Use Indiv 3 4 BUS 85 86 Playing SMF data Direct playback from media amp When you wish to playback SMF data that is compat ible with the GM GS XG standards set Bank Map Global PO Basic Setup System Preference page to GM 2 amp If you want to play back from media inserted in the TRITON Extreme s CF card slot you must turn off the power before inserting the media Press the S PLAY key to enter Song Play mode 2 Press the EXIT key to display the P0 Prog Mix page 3 Make sure that the media containing the SMF data can be detected If there is no SMF data in the media or if there is no SMF data in the currently selected directory no file name will be displayed as shown below SONG PLAY P Prog Mix Program 161 68 sere 01 00 eter J 120 Jukebox te pb ate Name eau Track 1 Chal GOAI Acoustic Piano To move to a directory that contains SMF data press the MENU key and then press P3 Select Direc tory to display P3 Select Directory SONG PLAY P3 Select Directory 43K 16 10 2661 12 00 00 16 16 2601 SONG_641 MID SONG_ 62 MID SONG_ 683 MID 16 16 2601 16 16 2601 SONG_864 MID SONG_645 MID Media Select CF NEW YOLUME 16 16 2661 Use Media Select to choose the drive containing the data you want to play Then use the Open button and Up button to move between directories to find the desired SMF When
6. Press the media select popup button and select the drive that contains the data that you want to play back 4 Use the scroll bar to display the SMF filename exten sion MID that will be played first and select that file 5 Press the Add button The filename you specified in step will appear in the Jukebox list 6 Select the file that will be played second and press the Add button Add files to the Jukebox list in the order that they will be played A maximum of 100 files 00 99 can be regis tered in the Jukebox list To delete a file from the Jukebox list press the Delete button D Press the EXIT key to display P0 Prog Mix Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key The files will playback in the order in which they were registered 9 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key once again to stop playback amp Only files in the same directory can be registered in a jukebox list If you perform the following operations while creat ing a jukebox list the jukebox list will be lost e Change the directory e Exchanging the media e Change drives Saving a Jukebox list Saving procedure Use the procedure described above to create a juke box list 2 If you want to save the jukebox list on the media use the P3 Jukebox drive select button to select the drive on which you want to save the data 3 In P3 Jukebox select the Save Jukebox List page menu command Save Jukebox List T M _L
7. A dialog box will appear Copy from Combination Combination D 1640 Steely Keys with Effects Tracki tos C Track9to 16 Auto adjust Arp setting for Multi REC Select the program or combination that you want to copy i e the copy source For this example press the COMBI BANK I key then press numeric keys 4 0 and finally press the ENTER key 1040 Steely Keys will be selected We will copy the effect settings of the combination as well so check the With Effects check box Since we want to copy the settings of the combination s eight timbres to tracks 1 8 select Track 1 to 8 If you have selected Track 1 to 8 you will be able to select Auto adjust Arp setting for Multi REC If you check this check box the MIDI channel etc of some of the tracks will automatically be adjusted to ensure that the same sound as was used during recording will be reproduced by the playback when you perform multi track recording with the arpeggiator turned on amp When using the Copy From Program page menu command the dialog box will be different You can specify any track as the copy destination and Auto adjust Arp setting for Multi REC will be replaced by a simple with Arpeggiator check box amp Depending on the combination settings it may be necessary to make additional changes to the track set tings WA In order to use the Auto adjust Arp setting for Multi REC function t
8. The upper and lower limits of the velocity zone of each timbre are determined by the Top Velocity and Bot tom Velocity respectively The following diagram shows an example of a velocity switched combination in velocity will switch between timbres 1 and 2 to play different programs Such combina tions are created by setting the velocity zone 127 As an example we will explain how to create a combina tion like the one shown above In the PO Play Program Select page or the P1 Edit Program Mixer Prog page use the Program Select area to select the program that will be used for each timbre 1 and 2 Select a brass program for timbre 1 Select a strings program for timbre 2 2 In the MIDI Ch page of P2 Edit Trk Param set Sta tus to INT for all the timbres that you wish to use and set MIDI Channel to either Gch or to match the global MIDI channel a G will be displayed after the channel number 3 In P4 Edit Zone Ctrl Vel Zone page set the Top Velocity and Bottom Velocity Set timbre 1 to a Top Velocity of 127 and a Bottom Velocity of 64 Set timbre 2 to a Top Velocity of 63 and a Bottom Velocity of 1 COMBINATION P4 Edit Zone Ctr Yel Zone MER ee T 1 MBBS Stereo Strings 2 pon Brass eet Keyboar Keyboard Keyboar Keyboar bat i Top Velocity i i 127 127 iw TOP Slope 686 606 i i Bottom Slope i
9. LFO 1 2 An LFO can be used to cyclically modulate the pitch a vibrato effect LFO 1 2 Intensity sets the depth to which the LFO spec ified in P5 Edit Common LFO will affect the pitch With a setting of 12 00 vibrato will produce a maximum of 1 octave of pitch change JS Y Int specifies the amount of vibrato that the LFO will produce when the joystick is pushed away from your self Intensity AMS Intensity specifies the depth of vibrato that will be applied by the LFO when an AMS Alternate Modulation Source is used For example if AMS LFO1 AMS is set to After Touch and you set an appropriate value for Intensity AMS Intensity vibrato will be applied when you apply pressure to the keyboard or when MIDI aftertouch messages are received Pitch EG page Here you can adjust the settings for the pitch EG When you wish to create sound effects etc set the pitch EG to make major changes in pitch over time To realistically simulate the slight change in pitch that occurs when a string is plucked or at the attack of a brass or vocal sound you can use the EG to create a subtle change in pitch at the attack PG p 16 EG and LFO By using an EG envelope generator to apply time vary ing change or by using an LFO Low Frequency Oscilla tor to apply cyclic change to pitch filter or amp you can create changes in the pitch tone or volume EG Envelope Generator TRITON Extreme
10. Note On When you press the SAMPLING REC key and then the SAMPLING START STOP key you will enter sampling standby mode and sampling will begin when you play the keyboard 4 Making settings for the sample to be recorded REC Sample Setup Sampling Setup Next we will specify the location into which the data will be sampled select mono or stereo sampling and specify the sampling time REC Sample Setup settings are made in Sampling mode and Sampling Setup settings are made in Combination Program or Sequencer mode These settings are main tained independently for each mode Use the following pages to set them Mode Page O Sampling Sampling P0 Recording Recording Combination PO Play Sampling Program PO Play Sampling Sequencer PO Play REC Sampling e Sampling mode SAMPLING P Recording Recording Aa Ms gt GGG NewMS___ AAA Index 01 9081 REC Sample Setup Save to PIR Bank gt RAM Sample Time A min 16 923 sec Sample Mode gt Stereo Record Input Prefe Memory ing Setup Jl rence Jl Status e Program mode PROGRAM P Play Sampling E Input Analog 9 COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY MEDIA Input Level 127_ BUS IFX Indiv Select P L R Pan LOBB Send1 MFX1 G88 Send2 MFX2 900 Input2 Level 127_ BUSCIFX Indiv Select L R Pan R127 Send1 MFX1 0 Send2 MFX2 000 Sampling Setup a i Source BUS L R P Recording Level d6 1 Use Sav
11. Save to RAM if you want to write the sample into sample memory RAM Save to MEDIA if you want to write the sample to media Sample Mode Stereo Sample Time maximum Adjust the recording level Press the SAMPLING REC key When you press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to play back the audio CD the level meter will indicate the volume that will be sampled If the display indi cates ADC OVERLOAD adjust the Volume in the P5 Audio CD Ripping page amp You can also adjust the level from the volume control of your USB drive or the LEVEL knob located on the rear panel of the TRITON Extreme If the display indicates CLIP use the VALUE con trollers to lower the Recording Level slider below 0 0 until an appropriate level is reached When you finish making adjustments press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to stop playback of the audio CD Press the LOCATE key to return the location to the beginning of the track Press the SAMPLING REC key once again 9 Execute sampling Press the SAMPLING REC key Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to start playback of the audio CD track At a point slightly earlier than where you want to sam ple press the SAMPLING START STOP key to begin sampling At the point where you want to stop sampling press the SAMPLING START STOP key to stop sampling Loop settings Using the default settings after the TRITON Extreme is
12. Start 4 To hide the grid display select the page menu com mand Grid uncheck Grid and press the OK but ton WA The grid is displayed according to the playback pitch of the base key the key shown in gray in the Key board amp Index area You can select the base key by holding down the ENTER key and playing a note on the keyboard Sampling and looping a drum phrase Here s how you can sample a drum phrase or similar phrase from an audio CD and loop the playback You will need to provide a drum rhythm loop sample Ini tially it is a good idea to begin with a rhythm loop sample that has a fairly simple beat As an example we will sample one measure of a 140 BPM drum phrase in a 4 4 time signature In this example we will use a CD player For details on how you can digitally sample or rip from the USB A connector CD ROM or CD R RW refer to p 71 es This explanation assumes that you are starting from the default state immediately after power on If necessary create a new multisample before you begin this procedure p 69 Connect the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks on the rear panel to the LINE OUT L and R jacks of your CD player Set the AUDIO INPUT MIC LINE switch to the LINE position and set the LEVEL knob near the center CD player MAX MIN t LEVEL 2 Press the SAMPLING key You will enter Sampling mode Make sure that the Sampling P0 Rec
13. Z Zero cross 62 74 ZOOM button 76 143 IMPORTANT NOTICE TO CONSUMERS This product has been manufactured according to strict specifications and voltage requirements that are applicable in the country in which it is intended that this product should be used If you have purchased this product via the internet through mail order and or via a telephone sale you must verify that this product is intended to be used in the country in which you reside WARNING Use of this product in any country other than that for which it is intended could be dangerous and could invalidate the manufacturer s or distributor s warranty Please also retain your receipt as proof of purchase otherwise your product may be disqualified from the manufacturer s or distributor s warranty 2004 KORG INC 1602 GTH Printed in Japan KORG INC 15 12 Shimotakaido 1 chome Suginami ku Tokyo Japan
14. use the text edit button to access the text input dialog box and specify the volume label The previously specified volume label will be dis played If no volume label had been specified for the media or if anon DOS media was inserted this will indicate NEW VOLUME 119 120 D Specify the initialization format Quick Format Normally you should use Quick For mat to initialize the media Select this if the media has already been physically for matted or if you want to format media that has been UDF formatted by the TRITON Extreme WA Since only the system area of the media need be for matted this will require less time Full Format Select this when formatting media that has not been physically formatted or media CD RW that has not been UDF formatted amp Normally it is not necessary to perform a Full Format on media that has been physically formatted at 512 bytes block Execute the Quick Format for such media note You will normally select Full Format for CD RW media etc that has not been UDF formatted If an error message of Media not formatted appears exe cute Full Format Depending on the capacity of the media executing Full Format may require a substantial length of time RS Some USB devices don t support the Full Format operation For details refer to the owner s manual for your device Specify the file system FAT16 can format a maximum of 4 Gbyte If you are using media larg
15. 0000 P 993 4 Piano BD mf R Delay B6GGms Yelocity M Sample SW Lo gt Hi O5C1 656 O5C2 656_ OSC Basic aa Transpose 66 e Some pages have no tabs 6 To move to a page with a different P number press the MENU key and continue from step of this procedure 3 Setting a parameter The parameter value in the edit cell can yawe be set by using the front panel VALUE controllers VALUE slider A V7 keys VALUE dial numeric keys 0 9 key ENTER key and 10 s HOLD key As necessary you can also use the BANK keys and the COMPARE key For some parameters the value can be set by pressing a popup button to display the popup menu and then selecting a parameter value or by holding down the ENTER key and playing a note on the keyboard to input a note num ber or velocity value 13 14 VALUE controllers VALUE slider Use this when you wish to make major changes in the value In Program mode and Combination mode this slider can also be used as a control source for alternate modulation or dynamic modulation This is active in Program or Combination P0 Play when the Program Select or Combination Select the large characters in the upper part of the LCD is selected ATI V keys Use these when you wish to make small changes in the value 9 7 8 COo MO T VA LUE dial Use this when you wish to make large changes in a value
16. 02 d d d d Chordal pattern Set Step No to 01 and press the 0 key Set Gate to Legato 2 For Step No 02 do not enter a tone 3 Set Step No to 03 and press the 1 2 3 4 keys 4 Set Step No to 04 and press the 1 2 3 4 keys 6 For Step No 05 do not enter a tone 6 Set Step No to 06 and press the 1 2 3 4 keys Set Gate to Legato D For Step No 07 do not enter a tone Set Step No to 08 and press the 1 2 3 4 keys WA To simulate the timing nuances of a strummed guitar chord select Flam In Program mode select an acoustic guitar program and choose the user arpeg gio pattern that you created here In the Arpeg Setup page of Program P7 Edit Arpeggiator set Gate to Step Then return to the Global P6 User Arpeggio Pattern Edit page For odd numbered steps set Flam to a positive value For even numbered steps set Flam to a negative value g gt Kros OPRPWANT JWD Drum pattern You can use the arpeggiator to play a rhythm pattern by using Fixed Note with a drum program In Program mode select a drum kit program For this example select the preset program J036 Stan dard Kit 1 2 In Global P6 User Arpeggio select the Pattern Setup page and make Arpeggio Pattern Setup settings Arpeggio
17. 127 Bank H 0 127 Bank A 0 127 Bank H 0 127 NS Assigning a name Rename You can modify the name of an edited program combina tion song drum kit user arpeggio pattern multisample or sample etc You can also modify the category names for programs and combinations These renaming operations can be performed in the fol lowing pages Program Program PO 9 page menu command Write Program Combination Combination PO 9 page menu command Write Combination Song Sequencer PO 2 4 7 page menu command Rename Song Sample Sampling PO 4 page menu command Rename Sample Drum Kit Global P5 page menu command Rename Drum Kit User arpeggio Global P6 page menu command Rename pattern Arpeggio Pattern Program Global P4 Program Cat category Combination Global P4 Combination Cat category File Media Save Save All Save Audio CD Track List Utility page menu command Rename As an example here s how to input Extreme01 in step 3 of Using the page menu command Write Press the text edit button T to open the text edit dia log box 2 Press the Clear button Press the Shift button to switch to uppercase charac ters and press E Press the Shift button once again to switch to lower case characters and press the characters x t r e m e 0 1 3 Press the OK button to close the dialog box If you don t need to make any corrections press the OK button to clo
18. Are you using a drive that supports JustLink With other drives only single speed writing is possible Writing is not possible if your drive won t let you select single speed writing Depending on the performance of your drive there may be cases in which even single speed writing is not possible In addition if you re using a USB hub and writing from a USB hard disk to a USB CD RW drive writing may not be possible with a drive that doesn t support JustLink _ Are you using the recommended media for your drive L If you are writing from an USB drive to CD R RW it is possible that the transfer speed is insufficient Writing may be successful if you lower the writing speed PG p 196 Insome cases you may be able to succeed by first copying the data from the USB drive to the CF card slot media and then executing the Write operation from the CF card slot media In some cases a certain length of time may be required before the data begins to be saved When first saving data on high capacity media e g the first time after powering on the TRITON Extreme that you save in Media mode or execute sampling to media in Sampling mode some time will be required to allocate free area Are you using blank media If using CD R please use new media If using CD RW use the page menu command Erase CD RW Media Make Audio CD to erase the contents of the media before you execute Save A CD R RW saved
19. IFX3 To Song 868 Track 03 Measure HHE Beat Tick 01 000 Insert the effect settings from song 001 into song 000 Effect IFX3 To Song 000 Track 03 Measure 009 Beat Tick 01 000 9 Press the OK button Now when you select song 000 and play it back the track 3 effect will switch to 020 Stereo Flanger from measure 9 Using the COMPARE key you can listen to the pre vious version before you performed the Put Effect Setting to Track operation note Processing the data placed in a track by the Put Effect Setting to Track command may take a little bit of time As your song becomes filled with more and more data it may take longer to complete the effect change When listening to the playback in step if you notice the effect change does not take place smoothly at the desired location use the COMPARE key lit to return to the previous state and try the operation again This time change the Beat Tick settings so that the change takes place a little bit 40 100 Ticks earlier or later in the song Event Edit Track 63 Measure HHE Index HAHAH Meter 4 4 BT 81 000 EXCL BT 61 606 EXCL BT 61 000 EXCL BT 81 000 EXCL M 69 685 BT 61 666 EXCL M 8a9 aa6 BT 01 000 EXCL Realtime recording to a pattern Here s how you can use realtime recording to create a pat tern User patterns can be accessed by the RPPR function in the same way as
20. SMF Standard MIDI File playback In Song Play mode you can load and play Standard MIDI File SMF data directly from media If you re playing SMF data using Song Play mode will provide a higher degree of reproducibility than using Sequencer mode to play the data ZB For details on the types of media you can use refer to p 137 How Song Play mode is structured Song Play mode is structured as follows This mode consists of tracks 1 16 song parameters such as song name etc effects and the arpeggiator Song Play mode page structure PO Program Mix Play SMF data and make settings Specify the program pan and level for each track P1 Track Make MIDI and scale settings for each track If the separately sold EXB MOSS option is installed set related parameters P2 Controller Setup Controller settings P3 Select Directory Select the directory that contains the desired Jukebox SMF and select the playback order of SMF files Create jukebox lists DE a ee BO E a P7 Arpeggiator Arpeggiator settings P8 Insert Effect Select and make settings for insert effects Make settings for the routing insertion effects master effects and individual output assignments of each track in the song P9 Master Effect Select and make settings for the master effects Master EQ and Valve Force settings WA For details on how to access each mode and page refer to Basic operation p 13 amp If the separatel
21. Song Setup funcher aaan 38 Producing songs Sequencer mode 39 Features of the Sequencer seesssessseserererersrsrrerererereses 39 The structure of Sequencer mode sssr 40 Preparations for recording esseessseserererersrsererererereses 41 R cordine methods orsina 43 oong edine MCUIOUdS essees nese neato 50 Creating and playing a Cue List oo eee 53 Creating and recording RPPR Realtime Pattern Play IRECOM eisene aA 55 Recording the sound of a combination or program 58 Caution and other functions in Sequencer mode 59 Sampling Open Sampling System 61 Features of sampling on the TRITON Extreme 61 How Sampling mode is organized c cece eee 62 Samples and Multisamples c cece eeeeeeeeeeeees 63 Preparations for Sampling s cccccsissinsonssssovcsecesersesesevsnsons 64 Sampling and editing in Sampling mode 000 68 Sampling in Program Combination or Sequencer Mod Serena eG ckin des O 80 SMF Standard MIDI File playback 85 How Song Play mode is structured eee eee 85 Pray eco WAR dataen ear soressinotewar encom mines 86 Playback using the Jukebox function eee 87 Playing along with SMF data ou eee eeeeeeeeees 88 Settings for the entire TRITON Extreme Global MOE siiiiiiaviriveiseiiasieninn 89 How Global mode is structured eee eens 89 Basic Setup PO Basic Setup renerne ia wine enen vies 89 MIDI re
22. and a three band master EQ stereo in stereo out can all be used simultaneously You can select and edit any of 102 types of effect algorithms e The effect routing is highly flexible Effects can be routed freely to the individual inputs and outputs Alternate Modulation and Effect Dynamic Modulation e The synthesis section filter etc provides Alternate Modulation capabilities and the effect section provides Effect Dynamic Modulation This allows you to freely apply modulation to parameters that affect the pitch filter amp EG LFO and effects etc e LFO delay time and other effect parameters can be synchronized to an external MIDI clock You can also synchronize sounds and effects to the tempo of the internal sequencer or the arpeggiator Valve Force circuit e This section includes an analog low frequency boost circuit plus a vacuum tube amp that uses a 12AU7 ECC82 vacuum tube One vacuum tube is used to support stereo in stereo out Proprietary Korg technology is used to generate warm and powerful sound with the rich overtones and smooth distortion typical of vacuum tubes while retaining clarity and definition Programs and combinations Programs e In addition to 1 536 user programs 256 programs and 9 drum kits for GM2 compatibility are provided as ROM presets You can use a rich array of editing parameters effects Valve Force and the arpeggiator to modify the 1 536 user programs and create your own ori
23. the pattern will start accurately if you play the note slightly ear lier than the timing of the beat or measure Even if you play the note slightly later than the beat or measure but no later than a 32nd note it will be considered to have started at the beat or measure and the beginning of the pattern will be compressed so that the remain der of the playback will be correct M If you wish to trigger the RPPR function from an external MIDI device use the MIDI channel that is selected for Track Select 4 To turn off the RPPR function uncheck the RPPR check box Play RPPR while a song plays back RPPR can be played in synchronization with the playback of a song Pattern playback for a key with a Sync setting of SEQ will synchronize to the playback of the song PG p 92 Sync Start the song playback and then press the key The pat tern playback will start in synchronization with the mea sures of the song amp Synchronization will be lost if you use the lt lt REW or FF gt gt keys while a song is playing is if you want RPPR pattern playback to begin at the moment that song playback begins it is a good idea to insert an empty measure containing no musical data before the song playback begins ZS If the song is stopped the pattern will synchronize to the timing of the arpeggiator function Realtime recording an RPPR performance An RPPR performance can be recorded in realtime
24. 127 L 900 094 BT 02 093 F2 V 127 L 000 098 BT 92 191 F 2 W127 L 000 094 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to start playback As an example set J Tempo to 100 Notice that the pitch does not change when you play back at a differ ent tempo 5 If the beat of the original rhythm loop sample is not reproduced correctly when you change the tempo or if obtrusive noise is heard this is because the sample was not sliced appropriately in step The way in which the percussion instrument sounds were divided will have a major impact on the quality of the playback when the tempo is changed You will need to adjust the way in which the samples are divided in step 79 80 ZS The silence between samples may become obtrusive if you play back at a slower tempo or noise may occur between samples if you play back at a faster tempo To avoid such problems you can set Stretch New BPM or Ratio in step to the tempo at which you want to play back and execute time stretch to adjust the length of each sample PG p 130 In Song Select choose 001 SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 68 A 001 01 000 Meter 444 J 120 gt Manu CiS001 NEW SONG Reso Hi a bald P Tracks TRACK 1 4 5 F y Keyboad TKeyboad Bank Program Dual Place Paol D Jaooo D aaaoj J De and BD Grand BD nd BD Grand BD The following song data has been set created automat ic
25. 64 102 103 105 110 133 S P DIF 6 16 64 107 131 Specifications 138 Split 34 35 Standard MIDI File SMF 39 59 85 Status 35 60 85 Step Cue List 53 User arpeggio pattern 98 Step recording 45 Step Arpeggiator 99 SW1 SW2 3 21 108 129 Synchronize 45 60 85 102 T Tab 9 13 Tap tempo 7 74 90 130 Template song 39 113 Tempo 5 29 33 42 53 60 74 78 94 96 108 Text edit button 9 114 Timbre 34 Time signature 39 42 49 53 74 78 Toggle button 9 Tone 22 23 27 User arpeggio pattern 99 Tone Generator 12 Tone Arpeggiator 99 TouchView 2 Track 43 Musical data 40 79 Setup parameters 40 Track edit 50 Track list 123 Transpose 35 89 Tremolo 26 29 Tuning 89 U Use DKit Setting 28 Use Zero 77 User arpeggio pattern 98 User pattern 40 49 User Scale 91 User template song 113 V VALUE controller 4 14 VALUE dial 4 VALUE slider 4 22 Valve Force 3 109 Velocity 22 25 130 Arpeggiator 95 Velocity crossfade 34 Velocity Curve 89 Velocity drumsample switching 93 Velocity multisample switching 24 Velocity switch 34 36 Velocity Zone 37 Velocity Sample SW Lo gt Hi 93 Vibrato 21 26 29 Volume 3 18 19 23 25 28 34 41 65 71 Combination 34 Sequencer 41 VOLUME slider 3 W Wah 21 26 28 29 Write 5 90 113 Arpeggiator 96 98 Global settings User drum kits User arpeggio patterns 116 Program Combination 114 SW1 SW2 21 User template song 113
26. After pressing the MENU key and press the P1 Edit Basic 3 Press the Controller tab 4 Press the Realtime Control Knob B Assign Knob 1 B popup button and select F A Attack 6 Press the REALTIME CONTROLS key to select B mode and rotate knob 1 The EG attack of the filter and amp will change is If you wish to keep these settings after the power is turned off you must save them p 114 However the settings of Sampling mode cannot be saved Adjusting the contrast brightness of the LCD screen Use the rear panel contrast knob to make adjustments 129 130 Using tap tempo control In Program Combination Sequencer and Song Play modes you can use the tap tempo function to control the arpeggiator tempo In Sequencer and Song Play modes you can use this method to control the song tempo During playback lightly press the ENTER key several times at the desired tempo The tempo will follow your tapping in realtime This is a convenient way to match the tempo in realtime to the beat of a different source As an example here s the procedure for using tap tempo to set the speed of the arpeggiator In Program mode or Combination mode start the arpeggiator running Turn on the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key and play the keyboard If you check Latch P0 Play Arpeggia tor page the arpeggiator will keep running even if you take your hand off the keyboard 2 Lightly press the ENT
27. Combination D062 Old Vox Organ Although this is a somewhat sophisticated editing tech nique we will describe the settings of one of the preset combinations as an example Select combination D062 Old Vox Organ press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key to turn it on and play Before you play make sure that the global MIDI channel Global P1 MIDI MIDI Channel is set to 01 e Arpeggiator A is assigned to T timbre 7 and 8 When you play the keyboard the arpeggio pattern U396 User Dr Jump Up DnB will sound only the T7 program J068 HipHop Kit e The arpeggio pattern uses Fixed Note mode which is suitable for playing drums from the arpeggiator Global P6 User Arpeggio Pattern Setup page Arpeggio Tone Mode Fixed Note With this setting the arpeggio pattern will always play the specified pitches regardless of the note numbers received from the keyboard PG p 171 e The A Bottom Key and Top Key Combination P7 Edit Arp Scan Zone A B page are set so that arpeggiator A will operate only for notes B3 and lower e Arpeggiator A is also assigned to T8 but this is so that the T7 program J068 HipHop Kit will sound only when the arpeggiator is on Notice the timbre settings for T7 and T8 C J status bi Ghannet asson e Ifthe arpeggiator is off playing the keyboard will sound the timbre s that are set to Gch or to the global MIDI channel in this case 01 Since the MIDI Channel of T7 is s
28. DS 1H can be connected to TRITON Extreme If a DS 1H is connected it will function as a half damper pedal The half damper function cannot be controlled by other ped als Assignable Foot Switch If an optional foot switch such as the Korg PS 1 is con nected to the rear panel ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack an assigned function can be switched on off using the foot switch The function of the foot switch is assigned in Global P2 Controller Foot Switch Assign p 90 Assignable Foot Pedal An optional expression pedal such as the Korg EXP 2 foot controller or Korg XVP 10 EXP VOL pedal can be con nected to the rear panel ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack and used to apply an effect The function of the foot pedal is assigned in Global P2 Controller Foot Pedal Assign p 90 Easy program editing Performance Edit the Performance Edit tab You can use the eight Performance Editor sliders to make overall adjustments to the major parameters of Program P1 9 t For details on what is controlled refer to QS p 6 or PG ps2 REALTIME CONTROLS 1 2 3 4 t For details on what is controlled refer to QS p 6 Easy arpeggiator editing Arpeggio tab Here you can select the arpeggio pattern and make real time adjustments to the arpeggio parameters while you perform ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key TEMPO knob GATE knob VELOCITY knob Use the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key to turn the arpeg giator on off The ARPEGGIATOR
29. Digital audio input output connections Digital audio output The same audio signal present at the TRITON Extreme s AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO and R jacks can be output in digital format to a DAT MD or digital multi track recorder that can accept a digital audio input with a sample frequency of 48 kHz Use an optical cable to connect the S P DIF OUT MAIN jack to the optical digital input jack of your DAT MD or digital multitrack recorder amp The VOLUME slider does not affect the volume of this output jack Digital audio input TRITON Extreme can accept a digital audio input from a DAT or other digital device that can output digital audio at a sampling frequency of 48 kHz This signal can be input to the L and R channels then sampled or processed by the internal effects and output from the OUTPUT jacks Use an optical cable to connect the optical digital out put jacks of your DAT etc to the S P DIF IN jack 5 Connecting pedals Foot pedal connections A foot pedal can be used to control various synthesis and effect parameters Connect an optional expression pedal such as the Korg XVP 10 or EXP 2 to the rear panel ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack The function controlled by the foot pedal is specified in Global P2 Foot Pedal Assign p 90 PG p 165 282 Foot switch connections A foot switch controls sostenuto soft pedal on off arpeg giator on off to select programs or combinations and to start stop the
30. If you are using only one track Track01 Drums as in Creating and recording RPPR p 55 set Track Select to Track01 Drums and use single track recording in which only one track will be recorded Even if RPPR uses only one track use multi track record ing if you will be selecting another track in Track Select and recording its performance at the same time You should also select multi track recording if you created the RPPR data using multiple tracks rather than just a sin gle track and want to simultaneously record the perfor mance of multiple tracks WA The RPPR pattern will be recorded as performance data on the tracks used by the pattern Here we will explain how you can simultaneously record a performance that uses both RPPR and the arpeggiator For each RPPR pattern set Sync to SEQ With a setting of SEQ patterns played by the RPPR function while the sequencer is playing or recording will start in synchronization with the measures of the sequencer SEQUENCER P6 Pattern RPPR RPPR Setup EEk P 5504 Hip Hop Rap J 090 13 baal Drums JG68 HipHop Kit RPPR Setup KEY C 2 V Assign p aes C 1 to C2 Shutdown Keys Syne Djs Pattern gt Preset P P121 HipHop 1 HipHop Track Pail Drums pled eck assigned can Setup 2 We will use the arpeggiator to play the bass pattern Follow these settings Set Track Select to Track02 Bass Select the Sequencer P7 A
31. Select L R Level 127 Pan L000 Example Send the signal from the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks in stereo to the L R bus Input1 BUS IFX Indiv Select L R Level 127 Pan L000 Input2 BUS IFX Indiv Select L R Level 127 Pan R127 amp When BUS IFX Indiv Select is changed from Off to L R or IFX please be aware that the volume level of the AUDIO OUT L MONO and R jacks and the headphones may rise excessively WA An easy way to make these settings is to use the Auto Sampling Setup REC Audio Input function You can do this in Sampling PO Recording or in Program PO Play Sampling 2 Setting the recording level Recording Level dB 1 Produce sound at the volume that you want to record If you are inputting via the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks gradually turn the LEVEL knob from the MIN position toward MAX Set the level immediately below the point where the display indicates ADC OVER LOAD AD converter input overload ZS The best audio quality will be obtained at a level immediately below the point where ADC OVER LOAD is displayed i e the highest level that does not produce an overload 2 Press the SAMPLING REC key Produce sound at the volume that you want to record Watch the level meters to check the input volume Use the Recording Level slider to adjust the record ing level amp The output volume will not change at
32. Trigger P Sampling START SW Metronome Precount Off J 126 Resample gt Manual Recording Level dB Prefe Memory rence Jl Status If you want to route the sound through an insert effect and then into Valve Force set the post IFX BUS Sel to 3 4 Tube 3 Tube or 4 Tube SAMPLING P8 Insert Effect Insert FX PantCC 8 BUS Sel Chain Insert Effect Use BUS Sel to assign the output of Valve Force You can send the output to the L R bus the insert effect IFX1 IFX5 bus or the 1 2 buses ALYE FORCE Input Trim 064 Ultra Boost 666 Tube Gain 64 Output Level 127 YALYE FORCE PantCC 8 gt BUS Sel Sendi Send2 6 If you want to sample the sound that has passed through Valve Force set Source BUS to the final output bus of the Valve Force signal You can sample the signal if you ve set Placement to Insert Use 3 4 BUS SAMPLING P Recording Input Analog SAMPLING inputi Level 127_ BUS IFX Indiv Select 3 4 Tube Pan LOGG Input2 Level 127 BUS IFX Indiv Select Off input Setup ow recording Level d6 Trigger gt Sampling START Siw Metronome Precount Off J 120 Resample Manual Prefe Memory rence Jl Status Adjusting the Valve Force settings and sam pling 6 Adjust the Valve Force settings and sample the result For the sampling procedure refer to QS p 21 Resampling the output of Va
33. ae L MONO R AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 4 Placement Insert Use Indiv 3 4 BUS Valve Force ag a P9 Sequencer mode page structure PO Play REC Play record songs and make associated set tings Select the program for each track Pan and level settings Settings for sampling P1 Cue List Play create and make settings for cue lists P2 Trk Param Parameter settings for each track of a song MIDI OSC Pitch etc P3 MIDI Filter MIDI message transmission reception filter settings for each track of a song P4 Zone Ctrl Key Zone and Velocity Zone settings for each track of a song Controller settings If the sepa rately sold EXB MOSS expansion is installed settings for related parameters P5 Track Edit Edit musical data for song tracks Specify track names Tone settings for the program of each track P6 Pattern RPPR Record and edit patterns for a song Specify pattern names RPPR function settings for a song P7 Arpeggiator Arpeggiator settings P8 Insert Effect Select and make settings for insert effects Set the routing insert effects master effects and individual output send amounts for each track of the song P9 Master Effect Select and make settings for the master effects Master EQ and Valve Force settings WA For details on how to access each mode and page refer to Basic operation p 13 RO If the separately sold EXB MOSS option is installed bank
34. amp PG p 189 File copying deleting and for matting Media Utility In the Media mode Utility page you can rename copy or create new files on media You can also format or optimize media In this page you can also transfer data between a computer connected to the USB B connector and media inserted in the TRITON Extreme s CF card slot Formatting media Here s how to format media Newly purchased media or media that has been used by another device cannot be used as is you must format the media before you can use it with the TRITON Extreme amp When you format all data saved on that media will be erased If you had used a computer etc to set up that drive so that it can be used as multiple drives partitions this data will also be erased Be sure to double check before you format amp After formatting it is not possible to press the COM PARE key to return to the previous state 1 Make sure that the media you want to format is inserted p 117 Setting up media 2 Press the MEDIA key to enter Media mode 3 Press the Utility tab to select the Utility page Utility a Media Select 4 Press Media Select and choose the media that you want to format 6 Press the page menu button to access the page menu and press Format to open the dialog box Format NEW YOLUME Yolume Label Quick Format C Full Format Erari Pa t 6 In Volume Label
35. i The TRITON Extreme can share a single waveform among multiple samples This allows you to create multiple samples with different playback addresses from the same waveform without wasting internal memory For example suppose that you have wave form data that records a voice saying One Two Three This single piece of waveform data could be shared by three samples with the playback of sample A producing One Two Three sample B producing One Two and sample C producing Two Three PG p 108 Multisamples A multisample consists of settings that make one or more samples sound in different areas of the keyboard A multi sample consist of between one and 128 indexes Each index contains parameters that specify the sample that will playback the zone in which it will playback the orig inal pitch key the playback pitch and level etc Using multisamples When sampling an instrument that is able to produce a wide range of pitches such as a piano recording just one sample and applying it playing it back over the entire pitch range will not produce a natural sounding result By using a multisample you can record separate samples for each pitch range and assign these samples to their respec Conceptual diagram of the Open Sampling System Resampling Program combinations and Insert Effects songs Master Effects Analog digital convertor USB A connector CD R RW i Audio CD i i Digital signa
36. keys is memorized RS You can use these keys as alternate modulation or effect dynamic modulation sources and control pro gram parameters or effect parameters In this case you will normally select SW1 Mod CC 80 and SW2 Mod CC 81 For an example in which the SW1 key is specified as an effect dynamic modulation source for a program and used to control an effect refer to p 108 5 If you wish to keep these settings after the power is turned off you must save them p 114 However the settings of Sampling mode cannot be saved Setting the B mode functions of REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 You can specify the B mode functions of REALTIME CONTROLS knobs 1 4 PG p 280 The B mode functions can be specified independently for each program each combination and each song These functions can also be set independently for the entire mode in Sampling mode and Song Play mode These settings are made in Realtime Control Knobs B Assign of the respective page Specifying the function of SW1 and SW2 note You can use these knobs as sources for alternate mod ulation or effect dynamic modulation and control program parameters or effect parameters In this case you will normally select Knob Mod 1 CC 17 Knob Mod 2 CC 19 Knob Mod 3 CC 20 and Knob Mod 4 CC 21 Here is an example of how knob 1 can be used to control the filter and amp EG attack of a program Press the PROG key to enter Program mode 2
37. nected to the rear panel ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack and use it to switch combinations p 90 Selecting a combination from an external MIDI device You can transmit a MIDI program change message from an external MIDI device to the TRITON Extreme to switch combinations PG p 290 t For details on the factory set combinations refer to the VNL Using controllers to modify the sound You can use the joystick ribbon controller SW1 SW2 Realtime Controls 1 4 VALUE slider keyboard and a foot pedal switch to control the sound t Refer to the corresponding explanation for programs on p 21 Easy combination editing Selecting a program for each timbre 1 8 Program Select tab Switching the program assigned to each timbre 1 8 will change the sound of the combination There are three ways to switch programs For details on each procedure refer to the appropriate page of explana tions e Selecting a program from the TRITON Extreme by bank program number by program category e Selecting a program by receiving a MIDI program change MIDI program changes cannot switch programs for a Timbre whose Status is set to other than INT t For details on the factory set program names refer to the VNL Status This specifies the status of MIDI and the internal tone gen erator for each timbre 1 8 Normally you will set this to INT if you want the TRITON Extreme s internal tone gen erator to sound Set this to Off for
38. start address Start and end address End and exe cute the page menu command Truncate p 74 76 2 Access the P2 Loop Edit page SAMPLING P2 Loop Edit Start AAAAAAA VY Loop _ Rev LJ 1206 LoopS 949940 Loop Lock Loop Tune 00 4 zoom mp End 6696661 v use Zero orni ing som i 3 Select the page menu command Time Slice The Set Sample Tempo dialog box will appear Set Sample Tempo Beat o4 Source BPM EJ 4 Specify the number of quarter note beats in the sam ple and its tempo If you know the BPM set Source BPM If you do not know the BPM set Beat and the BPM will be calculated automatically Since in this example we know the beat set Source BPM to 120 5 Press the OK button The sample will automatically be sliced and a dialog box will appear Time Slice Sample 66686 Index Source Sensitivity E Start 00AAGAG When you play the keyboard C2 will play the original sample Source and D2 and subsequent keys will play the divided samples While listening to each divided sample adjust Sensi tivity so that each drum strike or other rhythm instru ment sound is divided into its own sample In some cases it may not be possible to slice the sample cleanly even if you adjust Sensitivity If the attack of the next sound is included in the end of the preceding sample or if one sample contains two notes you wil
39. that was sampled to the media is loaded into sample memory RAM it can be used as a tone generator waveform A sample WAVE file of up to 16 Mbytes mono or 32 Mbytes stereo if sam ple memory has been expanded to 32 Mbytes or greater can be loaded into sample memory RAM You can create an audio CD by writing Wave files to a CD R RW drive connected to the USB A connector e A maximum of 1 000 multisamples and 4 000 samples can be created e In Media mode you can load multisample sample data from various types of media e Korg format or Akai S1000 3000 samples mapped multisamples only format sample data and AIFF or WAVE format sample data can be loaded Once data has been loaded into the TRITON Extreme it will all be treated as Korg format sample data Sample data created on the TRITON Extreme can be exported output as an AIFF or WAVE format sample file e The external audio source that you are sampling can be processed by the five insertion effect to apply effects such as a compressor or EQ The LFO frequency or delay time of the effect can be specified as a BPM value which is highly effective when sampling phrase loops etc In Sampling mode only the insert effects can be used In Program Combination and Sequencer modes the master effects can also be used e You can apply Valve Force to the external audio source you are sampling e Sampling can be initiated by the SAMPLING START STOP key note on thr
40. the USB connector of your computer gt PG p 288 MIDI applications Connecting MIDI devices computers amp Some USB MIDI interfaces may not be able to trans mit or receive the TRITON Extreme s MIDI exclusive messages 9 Installing options The functionality of the TRITON Extreme can be extended by installing option boards and or sample memory The following two types of options can be installed For details on installation refer to PG p 319 e EXB MOSS DSP synthesizer board e DRAM SIMM Memory boards for sample data 17 18 Turning the power on off amp Before you turn on the power make sure that the desired connections have been made as described in Connections p 15 1 Turning the power on Press the rear panel POWER switch to turn on the power The LCD screen will display the name of your model and the software version The following graphic shows the factory set LCD screen The version number is subject to change with ome ETEN B Extreme i MUSIC WORKSTATIONZSAMPLER OPTIONS Yersion 1 6 8 SIMM Slot 16MB o Slot3 2 Turn on your powered monitors or stereo amp 3 Raise the TRITON Extreme s VOLUME slider to an appropriate level and adjust the volume of your powered monitors or stereo amp amp You must turn off the power before inserting media into the CF card slot The TRITON Extreme s CF card slot does not support hot pluggin
41. to specify the range that will be edited Turn on the Replace radio button and set Shift Note to 003 PG p 84 Shift Erase Note in Track 62 From Measure 1 To Measure 848 Beat Tick 01 000 Beat Tick 44 191 Note Range Bottom C 1 Top G9 Shift Note EEE Replace O Create O Erase Note Press the OK button The pitch of track 2 will be raised three semitones 6 Use the same procedure to raise the pitch three semi tones for each track on which performance data is recorded However do not change the key of track 1 which uses a drum kit amp If you change the key of a track that is using a drum kit the relationship between the notes and the instru ments of the drum kit will be shifted and the sequence will not play the correct rhythm instru ments Creating and playing a Cue List A cue list allows you to play multiple songs in succession For example you can create a separate song for each por tion introduction melody A melody B chorus and end ing of a composition and use the cue list to specify the order of each portion and the number of times that it will be repeated to complete the song If you want to change the structure of the song the cue list lets you do so in an efficient way You can also use this as a jukebox function that will play back completed songs in the order you specify Cue List Step Song Repeat 01 S000 Intro 02 In
42. which allows you to record up to six samples of approximately 2 minutes 54 seconds each mono or approximately 1 minute 27 seconds each stereo for a total 17 minutes 28 seconds of sampling time e The media Option lets you record up to 80 minutes as a single sample file in either mono or stereo monaural approximately 440 Mbytes stereo approximately 879 Mbytes This will createa WAVE file In order to play a media sample from the TRITON Extreme s keyboard it must be able to be loaded into the sampling memory RAM amp In order to sample to media on the TRITON Extreme you will need to obtain media of the recommended type sold separately p 137 Song Play In Song Play mode you can play SMF Standard MIDI File data directly from media You can also play the key board along with the SMF playback and use the arpeggia tor in synchronization with the playback tempo of the SMF Format 0 and 1 are supported and you can also use the Jukebox function to edit the playback order of the songs Dual polyphonic arpeggiator e Five preset arpeggio patterns UP DOWN ALT1 ALT2 RANDOM and 507 user arpeggio patterns are built in e With the factory settings these contain a wide variety of preload user patterns 489 e In addition to providing conventional arpeggiator functions the polyphonic arpeggiator of the TRITON Extreme can respond to the pitches or timing at which you play the keyboard and produce a diverse r
43. 000 003 Preset multisamples for stereo piano New1 16 000 007 Preset multisamples for stereo piano and choir New2 16 000 048 Preset multisamples for organ solo brass electric guitar acous tic guitar electric bass acoustic bass etc Best 16 000 046 Preset multisamples for electric piano clavi brass woodwinds choir drums etc OrchS 16 000 112 Preset multisamples for orchestral strings OrchB 16 000 079 Preset multisamples for orchestral brass woodwinds percussion and harp etc Vint 16 000 157 Preset multisamples for vintage analog synths Synth 16 000 077 Preset multisamples for house and trance music WA If High MS Bank is set to ROM pressing the High Multisample popup button will display all internal ROM multisamples organized into 15 categories Use the tabs located at the left and right to select the desired category and select a multisample from within that category High Multisample and Low Multisample If you specify a High and Low multisample for an oscilla tor either the High or the Low multisample will sound depending on the velocity of the note i e the strength at which you play the keyboard This function is called velocity multisample switching 4 Specify different multisamples for High Multisam ple and Low Multisample 2 Specify a velocity value for Velocity M Sample SW Lo Hi Notes played on the keyboard at a velocity less than the val
44. 01 000 Meter 4 4 J 108 ph Maw gt S000 Acid Jazz gt Tr ec Piano Reso P Hi O RPPR iT Buta ee Graan Des Sjer D xi26 D kasi D osz Dicer F P iStandarciFretless Pro Dyn Funkin CStereo SiPercussiiTsunami Espress 3 In Track Select select Track 03 Elec Piano and record a performance as desired QS p 26 4 Make the effect settings for the second half of the song in another copied song 1 Create song S001 2 Use the page menu command Copy From Song to copy Song 000 as the copy source PG p 58 Copy From Song 6 In song 001 make the effect settings that you want to use at measure 9 In the Sequencer P8 Insert Effect Insert FX page select 020 Stereo Flanger for IFX3 SEQUENCER P8 Insert Effect gt Track 3 Elec Piano Chain Insert Effect insert FX i aa K126 Pro Dyno EP PantCC 8 BUS Sel Sendi Send2 Li 6 In the Sequencer P8 Insert Effect IFX3 page make the desired parameter settings SEQUENCER P8 Insert Effect Stereo Flanger Delay Time msec eo LFO Waveform Triangle LFO Shape LFO Phase degree 90 LFO Frequency Hz 6 56 BPM MIDI Syne Off BPM MIDI Ctrl Ch gt cha3 sre P off Amt 0 00 Base Note J Times x1 Depth Feedback High Damp 5 bat 50 50 Sre 3 d 5 D Choose Put Effect Setting to Track to open the dia log box Put Effect Setting MIDI Exclusive to Track Effect gt
45. 64 96 103 105 110 114 133 CompactFlash 125 Compare 14 23 34 60 COMPARE key 14 Connection 15 Controller 21 37 50 60 Copy 11 46 50 53 58 119 120 Create Control Data 45 Cue List 40 53 Current page 8 Cutoff frequency 27 D DAMPER 7 16 23 36 Damper Pedal 16 23 36 131 Data dump 113 Delete Specific data 44 50 Demo song 127 Dialog 9 DIGITAL OUT 6 Dmod 108 Drum Kit 25 28 78 92 116 134 Drum sample 93 134 Dual arpeggiator 101 Dynamic modulation 108 Edit Buffer 114 Edit cell 8 13 Effect 1 103 EG 26 28 29 Event Edit 45 EXB MOSS 18 128 Exclusive Group 93 EXIT key 4 EXL file 113 External sequencer 45 102 F Factory settings 127 Filter 1 23 27 Filter EG 28 Filter LFO Mod 28 Filter Mod 27 Keyboard Track 27 Foot Pedal 16 23 Foot Switch 16 23 Cue List Switch the Step 54 Manual punch in 43 Program Combination will change 91 Format 120 135 G Global 11 13 89 93 98 116 GM 2 86 GM GS XG 133 Grid 74 H Headphone 6 16 HI Hyper Integrated synthesis sys tem 1 Index 69 77 INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 4 6 16 68 80 82 93 104 131 Insert Effect IFX 30 37 70 93 103 104 106 In Track Sampling 60 82 J Joystick 3 21 28 Lock function 22 Pitch bend 26 Jukebox 87 Jukebox list 87 K Key Zone 35 Keyboard amp Index 69 73 74 77 Keyboard crossfade 34 Keyboard input 14 Keyboard Track 27 29 Keyboard Arpe
46. F programs can also be used in Sequencer mode For details on the parameters of bank F pro grams refer to the EXB MOSS owner s manual M The MIDI transmit receive settings for each track are made in MIDI Channel P2 Edit Trk Param MIDI Ch page Insert effects master effects and Valve Force settings are controlled on the Ctrl Ch P8 P9 i Sampling or resampling can be performed in Sequencer mode p 80 You can also apply the TRI TON Extreme s effects to an external audio input source for a wide range of possibilities p 107 111 Preparations for recording amp Before you begin recording make sure that the mem ory protect setting in Global mode is turned off p 90 Creating a Song Before we can begin this example we need to create an empty song where we can record First press the SEQ key to enter Sequencer mode Next press the Song Select popup button to the left of the Song number and name S000 NEW SONG Press the number correspond ing to the first unnamed song A dialog box will appear Create new song this song No Set Length HZS Are you sure Press OK to create the new song or press Cancel to exit Track settings Since we re going to record a new song in this example we will start by explaining how to assign a program to each MIDI track and make basic settings such as volume By loading a template song you can easily make appropriate settings for v
47. If you wish to force a polyphonic program to sound monophonically in this combination without re writing the program itself set this either to MN Mono or LGT Legato Conversely set this to Poly if you wish to force a monophonic program to play polyphonically PG p 43 OSC Select Normally you will set this to BTH Both If the timbre is using a program whose Oscillator Mode is Double and you want only OSC1 or OSC2 not both to sound set this to OSC1 only OSC1 will sound or OSC2 only OSC2 will sound Portamento Normally you will set this to PRG If you want to override the portamento setting specified in the program assigned to the timbre to be forced off set this parameter to Off Conversely if you want to force the portamento to be on or to change the portamento time set this to a value of 001 127 to specify the portamento time Pitch page COMBINATION P2 Edit Trk Param Pitch aa Bank E 0G Initial CombiEgaa ALLE LOGI Grand lano 4 Keyboar fina irass Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar H 3 i i Transpose ssfeneennnenne sash tieidenione E MM 2 12 00 soo 00 soo 00 ecesecesecececsose ossee Detune Use BPM Adj in Page Menu 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 MIDI Channel Transpose Detune BPM Adjust These parameters adjust the pitch of the timbre e Ina layer type combination you can set two or more timbres to the same program and
48. Input1 Level 127 Pan as desired BUS IFX Indiv Select L R D Specify how recording will be initiated For this example make settings so that recording will begin after a metronome count in Trigger Sampling START SW Sampling will begin when you press the SAMPLING START STOP key Metronome Precount 4 After you press the SAMPLING REC key to enter record ready mode and then press the SAMPLING START STOP key recording will begin after a four measure count in PROGRAM P Play Input gt EEE COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY MEDIA inputi Level 127 _ BUSCIFX Indiv Select off Pan LOBB Send1 MFX1 G88 Send2 MFX2 900 Input2 Level 127 BUSCIFX Indiv Select Off Pan R127 Send1 MFX1 GGG Send2 MFX2 606 Sampling Setup Source BUS gt L R fecording Level CdBI Save to RAM Mode Stereo Sample Time A min 16 923 sec Play your guitar at the volume that you will be recording If the display indicates ADC OVERLOAD AD converter input overload turn the rear panel LEVEL knob toward MIN to adjust the level appropriately amp The best audio quality will be obtained at the highest possible level that does not cause an overload i e a level that is slightly below the point where ADC OVERLOAD is displayed Sampling Aa 9 Press the SAMPLING REC key Play your guitar and the level meter will indicate the volume at which the guita
49. Int to B specify by how much the LFO will change the tone JS Y Intensity to A and JS Y Intensity to B specify the depth of the wah effect that will be produced by the LFO when the joystick of TRITON Extreme is moved toward yourself or when CC 2 is received Intensity to A LFO1 AMS Int to A and Intensity to B LFO1 AMS Int to B specify the depth of the wah effect that will be produced by the LFO when AMS LFO1 AMS is used For example if AMS LFO1 AMS is set to After Touch applying pressure to the keyboard of the TRITON Extreme will produce a wah effect Filterl EG page Indicates settings for the filter EG which controls time variant changes in tone Make settings for the EG here and set the depth of its effect in the Filteri Mod page Fil ter EG parameter amp PG p 20 Filter EG and Amplifier EG When the Filter EG changes the cutoff frequency the tone will change However depending on the volume changes produced by the Amplifier EG this can be heard in differ ent ways For example by changing the speed at which the tone and volume begin attack or decay you can signifi cantly vary the character of the tonal change It is a good idea to adjust the changes of both the Filter EG tone and the Amplifier EG volume as you proceed with editing Amp1 EG page Amplifier settings P4 Edit Amp These settings affect the volume Here you can adjust the way in which
50. Level PG p 158 2 In Sample Time specify the length of time that you want to sample This can be set in units of minutes and seconds If you are sampling to RAM sample memory you can sample a maximum of approximately 2 minutes 54 seconds in mono or approximately 1 minute 27 sec onds in stereo If you are sampling to MEDIA you can sample a max imum of 80 minutes in either mono or stereo mono approximately 440 Mbytes stereo approximately 879 Mbytes 3 Set Sample Mode to specify whether a mono or a stereo file will be created L Mono The sound of the internal L channel will be sampled in mono R Mono The sound of the internal R channel will be sampled in mono Stereo The sound of the internal L and R channels will be sampled in stereo The recording level and Auto 12 dB On When you resample the playback of a song or your key board performance using a program combination or sample or if you mix your performance with an external audio source and sample the result you should normally set Recording Level to 12 0 dB If you resample at 12 0 dB the sample data will be recorded at the opti mum level but the playback level will be lower than the level during sampling if 12 dB is off In such cases you can check Auto 12 dB On when you resample so that 12 dB Sampling mode Loop Edit page will auto matically be turned on and the recorded sample will play ba
51. Mode Single or Double is fundamentally different from that of a drum kit program Oscillator Mode Drums The program parameters of a multisample specify filter and amp settings etc appropriate for a multisample For this reason it is difficult to convert such a program for use with a drum kit Thus if you wish to edit a drum kit you should first use Program mode to select a program that uses a drum kit Oscillator Mode Drums and then move to the Global P5 Drum Kit page Editing a drum kit Here s the procedure for editing a drum kit amp Before editing a drum kit uncheck the Memory Pro tect p 90 In Program P0 Play select the program that you wish to use while editing the drum kit Select a drum kit program from the preload programs etc If the drum kit that you will be editing is already being used by a program select that program Other wise assign the drum kit you wish to edit to the pro gram in the Program P1 Edit Basic OSC Basic page In the separate VNL programs that use a drum kit are marked by a d symbol amp Set Octave Program P1 Edit Basic OSC Basic page to 0 8 With a setting other than 0 8 the relationship between the keys and the sounds will be incorrect amp The effects will sound using the settings of the last selected program amp When you edit a drum kit all programs that use that drum kit will be affected 2 Access the Sam
52. Numeric keys 0 9 EN TER key key 10 s HOLD key Use these when you know the parameter value that you wish to input After using the numeric keys 0 9 to input a number press the ENTER key to finalize the parameter value Use the key to enter negative numbers Use the 10 s HOLD key to enter a decimal point In Program and Combination mode P0 Play page other than the Sampling page the 10 s HOLD key performs the 10 s Hold function p 21 32 BANK A G H N keys PROG BANK _ SPL COMBI BANK 0 D MOSS GM The BANK A G H N keys are used in Program mode to select the program bank and in Combination mode to select the combination bank In combination Sequencer and Song Play modes these keys are used to select the bank of the program used by each timbre track CO MPARE key COMPARE Use this key when you wish to compare the edits you have made to a program or combination s sound with the un edited original i e the sound that is written into memory When editing a program or combination press this key The LED will light and the last written settings for that program number or combination number will be recalled When you press the COMPARE key once again the LED will go dark and you will return to the settings that you were editing If you edit the settings that are recalled by pressing the COMPARE key
53. PLAY MUTE buttons and SOLO ON OFF but tons that allow you to play and mute tracks 1 16 in the same way as in Sequencer mode You can use these when you wish to mute the melody track and play the part yourself on the keyboard minus one play or when you wish to audition a track p 88 You can use the Solo Selected Track page menu com mand to audition only the currently selected track This provides a convenient way to hear the parameter settings and effect settings of a track PG p 58 144 Playback using the Jukebox func tion The TRITON Extreme provides a Jukebox function that can be used to playback SMF data This function allows you to specify the order in which files in the same directory will be played amp Any jukebox list you create will be erased when the power is turned off and cannot be recovered If you wish to keep your jukebox list refer to the section Saving a Jukebox list and save it onto media Playing back in the order of the jukebox list Press the EXIT key to display the P0 Prog Mix page 2 Check the Jukebox check box SONG PLAY P Prog Mix Program 161 68 961 61 GOQ Meter J 122 7 Jukebox 3 Select P3 Jukebox SONG PLAY P3 Jukebox 2 Jukebox SONG_663 MID SONG _ Z 3 SONG_685 D SONG_664 MID SONG_867 SONG_666 D SONG_9 5 MID SONG_664 SONG_661 SONG_ amp 8B7 b D SONG 006 MID SONG_ 87 MID Media Select
54. Program and Sequencer modes 2 Select the page for making Input settings As an example here s how to make settings in Sam pling mode and in Program mode e Sampling mode Press the SAMPLING key to enter Sampling mode Press the Input Setup tab to access the P0 Recording Input Setup page SAMPLING P Recording Input gt ERE SAMPLING Input Level 127 BUSCIFX Indiv Select Off Input2 Level 127 BUSCIFX Indiv Select Off Pan R127 Recording Setup Source BUS L R Trigger Sampling START Sw Metronome Precount Off J 126 Resample gt Manual Recording Level d6 e Program mode Press the PROG key to enter Program mode Press the Sampling tab to access the P0 Play Sampling page PROGRAM P8 Play Ow Input gt EEE COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY MEDIA Input Level 127 BUS IFX Indiv Select Off Pan LOBB Send1 MFX1 G88 Send2 MFX2 900 Input2 Level 127 BUSCIFX Indiv Select Off Pan R127 Send1 MFX1 88 Send2 MFX2 000 Sampling Setup z 3 E Source BUS L R P Recording Level d6 Use Input to select the input source If you want to sample the input connected to the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks set Input to Analog If you want to sample the signal being input via the S P DIF IN jack set Input to S P DIF amp If Input is set to S P DIF an Obey Copyright Rules dialog box will appear Carefully read About copyri
55. SAMPLING START STOP key to play back Finalize Audio CD the sample 6 When you are ready to write to the CD R RW media or to execute a writing test press the OK button To cancel without executing press the Cancel button To add other WAVE files to the track list press the Insert button once again If you want to add another track select the WAVE file that follows the track you want to add If you want to amp When you press the OK button the Obey Copyright add the track to the end of the track list select Rules dialog box will appear End Then press the Insert button Carefully read About copyright QS p iii If you accept the terms press the OK button to write to the CD or to perform the test If you do not accept the terms press the Cancel button to cancel the opera To delete a WAVE file from the track list select the WAVE file that you want to delete and press the Cut button tion Subsequent tracks will be moved forward in the list ZS For details on editing operations such as Clear and a Swap Track refer to PG p 195 Are you sure 3 Insert a blank CD R or CD RW disk into the drive In the Make Audio CD page use Media Select to select your CD R RW drive The CD R RW drive is shown as CDD Blank Disc amp In order to avoid causing errors do not subject the drive to physical shock or vibration while CD R RW media is being written amp An audio CD c
56. START STOP key Playback will begin 6 At the point at which you wish to begin recording press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key Recording will begin Play the keyboard and operate controllers such as the joystick to record your perfor mance When you finish recording press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key Recording will end playback will continue RA Instead of pressing the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key in steps and you can use a foot switch con nected to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack Set the Global P2 Controller page Foot Switch Assign to Song Punch In Out p 90 T Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key Playback will stop and you will return to the location that you specified in step Auto punch in First you must specify the area that will be re recorded Then recording will occur automatically at the speci fied area With this method the musical data previously on the track is overwritten by the newly recorded data Use Track Select to select the track that you want to record 2 Set the Recording Mode to Auto Punch In Eas Reco rding Setup ih ot C Over Write Auto Punch n Maos GEE O Over Dub C Loop All Tracks ig Mayn ipin i PReragve Gata _ Mutti REC 3 In M Auto Punch In Start Measure M Auto Punch In End Measure specify the area that you wish to record For example if you specify M005 M008 recording will occur only from measure 5 to
57. Set the Recording Mode to Over Write 4 Select the P0 Play REC Program T01 08 page For all tracks the PLAY MUTE REC indication will show REC The track played by RPPR will be recorded simulta neously with the track played by the arpeggiator Set PLAY MUTE REC to PLAY or MUTE for all tracks other than tracks 1 and 2 which we will be recording Make sure that Track Select is set to Track02 Bass Your keyboard playing on keys not assigned to the RPPR function can be recorded on the track specified by Track Select SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 68 A 001 01 000 Meter 4 4 J sa P Manu S004 Hip Hop Rap P Trackez Bass Reso gt Hi 7 RPPR Kaboa ut Guard Gram aE wonaceesecencscceeEconasecanecseesece les Deel Bla D kas zh a D sess ae Ba B E Piz Funkin CDa Jaz 5 Make sure that the RPPR check box is checked 6 Press the LOCATE key to set the location to 001 01 000 T Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key and then press the SEQUENCER START STOP key Press a key that plays an RPPR pattern and one or more keys that play the arpeggiator If you press a key during the pre count before record ing the pattern playback and arpeggio performance will begin simultaneously when recording begins and will be recorded Record the RPPR pattern playback and arpeggio per formance amp When recording the playback of patterns triggered by RPPR the timi
58. TEMPO GATE and VELOCITY knobs control the tempo duration and strength of the arpeggiated notes Program editing You can edit the preloaded programs banks A D H N that the TRITON Extreme is shipped with or you can start with an initialized program banks E N to create an orig inal program The PO Play page lets you perform basic editing but more detailed editing can be done in the P1 Edit Basic P9 Edit Master Effect pages amp If you wish to save an edited program into internal memory be sure to Write the program p 114 You can write programs to the 1 536 program mem ory areas internal memory of banks A E and H N You can also save and manage programs on various types of media p 117 WA The P1 Edit Basic P5 Edit Common LFO parameters are shared by oscillators 1 and 2 and can be copied using the page menu command Copy Oscillator This command is useful when you want to set both oscillators to the same settings or when you want to copy settings from a different program The three elements of sound Sound can be broken down into three elements pitch tone and volume On TRITON Extreme these elements correspond to the Pitch Filter and Amplifier settings of a program In other words you would adjust the Pitch settings to modify the pitch the Filter settings to modify the tone and the Amplifier settings to modify the volume In Oscillator Oscillator P1 Edit Basic settings you
59. Tube or 4 Tube You can send more than one timbre track to Valve Force COMBINATION P8 Edit Insert FX Routing aa rr IF 1 Stereo Compressor On a HFx3 St ParametricdE On Fxd Stereo Phaser On P IFx5 Stereo Auto Pan Jon fee 395678 Timbre Chain Bank K 846 Studio E Piano IFX Indiv Out BUS Sele ct Fx3 gt oki oxit gt L R G Sendi M FX1 oga oaa Send2 FX2 i gt 127 000 If you want to send the m a an insert effect and then to Valve Force set the Routing page BUS Select to the insert effect and set the post IFX BUS Sel to 3 4 Tube 3 Tube or 4 Tube COMBINATION P8 Edit Insert FX Insert FX Ik Z Bank K 046 Studio E Piano Chain Insert Effect IFX1 ia gt GH2 Stereo Compressor IFX2 IFX3 PantCC 8 BUS Sel Sendi Send2 D 007 St Parametric4EQ i IFx4 is IFX5 Dente Bec Oe E k Fx The output from Valve Force is assigned by the Combi nation P9 Edit Master FX VALVE page parameters BUS Sel Send1 and Send2 Use BUS Sel to send the signal to the L R bus insert effect IFX1 5 buses or 1 2 buses Use Send1 and Send2 to adjust the send levels to the master effects Adjusting the Valve Force settings 6 Adjust the Valve Force settings Refer to step on p 109 Valve Force settings in Sampling mode In Sampling mode you can apply Valve Force to an exter nal audio source
60. a positive value the vol ume will increase as you play higher on the keyboard With a negative value the volume will decrease as you play higher on the keyboard Amp Modulation Velocity Intensity is used by most programs to decrease the volume of softly played notes and increase the volume of strongly played notes and the Amp Modu lation parameter adjusts the depth of this control Nor mally you will set Amp Modulation to positive values As this setting is increased there will be greater volume difference between softly played and strongly played notes LFO 1 2 Specifies how the LFO s will produce cyclic changes in volume tremolo effect The volume will be affected by the LFO s for which you set an LFO1 Intensity LFO2 Intensity value Intensity AMS Intensity adjusts the depth by which the tremolo effect produced by the LFO will be affected when you assign an AMS LFO1 AMS LFO2 AMS For example if you set AMS to JS Y 02 tremolo will be applied when you move the joystick of TRITON Extreme toward yourself or when CC 02 is received Amp1 EG page Here you can make settings for the amp EG which changes the volume over time Every instrument has its own characteristic curve of vol ume change This is part of what gives each instrument its identifiable character Conversely by applying a strings type Amp EG curve to an organ type multisample you can produce a sound
61. and IFX2 effects or use the P5 Track Edit Tone Adjust page to adjust the sounds in realtime SEQUENCER P8 Insert Effect gt Track 9 TRACK a9 insert FX A886 BD Grand Concert Chain Insert Effect PantCC 8 BUS Sel Sendi Send2 EBARA T A A SANT WA For details on the parameters that you can realtime record refer to PG p 101 4 Stop recording iS Exclusive messages are always recorded on the cur rent track selected by Track Select In this example they are recorded on track 9 WA In the event edit screen you can view the recorded exclusive events and their location Exclusive events are displayed as EXCL To view these events go to the Sequencer P5 Track Edit page and select the page menu command Event Edit Then in the Set Event Filters dialog box check Exclusive and press the OK button Event Edit Track 99 Measure HHA Index AAAA Meter 4 4 Event display BT 01 000 EXCL Location BT 01 000 EXCL M 882 as BT 01 000 EXCL M 8a2 4 BT 01 000 EXCL M 002 005 BT 01 000 EXCL M 002 006 BT 01 000 EXCL amp Exclusive events cannot be changed to a different type of event Nor can other events be changed into exclusive events 6 If you go to the page e g Sequencer P8 Insert Effect that shows the parameters you adjusted in realtime you can watch the recorded changes be reproduced while the song plays back Exclusive messages that can be realtime recorded T
62. bus will be sent through Valve Force at the final stage of the L R output Set BUS IFX Indiv Select to L R or IFX1 IFX5 If you use IFX1 IFX5 set the post IFX BUS Sel inset FX page to L R 111 112 If Placement Insert Use 3 4 BUS If you want to send the external audio source to Valve Force set BUS IFX Indiv Select to 3 4 Tube 3 Tube or 4 Tube PROGRAM P Play Sampling E Input Analog COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY MEDIA Input Level 127 BUS IFX Indiv Select PEMA Pan LOOO i taxdicMFX1 AGR Tne MERD Bee Input2 Level 127 BUS IFX Indiv Select Off Pan R127 Send1 MFX1 809 Send2 MFX2 880 Sampling Setup a Source BUS gt Indiv 1 2 Trigger Sampling START SW Metronome Precount P Off If you want to send the signal through an insert effect and then into Valve Force set BUS IFX Indiv Select to the insert effect and set the post IFX BUS Sel Insert FX page to 3 4 Tube 3 Tube or 4 Tube The Valve Force output is assigned by BUS Sel Send1 and Send2 Valve Force page Use BUS Sel to send the signal to the L R bus insert effect IFX1 IFX5 bus or 1 2 bus Send1 and Send2 adjust the send levels to the master effects Loading and saving data creating audio CDs and editing Wave files media mode etc Types of data that can be saved You can save data by writing it to internal memor
63. detected correctly it will be displayed in Other devices or Unknown devices Reconnect the USB cable if the TRITON Extreme is again displayed as an Unknown device the computer has failed to detect it correctly Delete the Unknown device entry and reinstall the driver PG p 326 Your software does not respond to the TRITON Extreme _ Is the USB cable connected correctly L Did you install the driver Has your computer detected the connected TRITON Extreme If you are using Windows XP go to Control Panel gt Sounds and Audio Devices Properties and click the Hardware tab If you are using Mac OS X go to Macintosh HD gt Application folder Utility folder gt Audio MIDI Settings select the MIDI Devices tab and check that the TRITON Extreme has been detected amp Some computers may not recognize the microKON TROL because of their hardware configuration _ Check the TRITON Extreme s assignments and USB MIDI port settings L The connected device or software may not support the messages you are transmitting Refer to the owner s manual of the connected device or software to verify that it responds to the messages you are transmitting Media that can be used with the TRITON Extreme Types of media that can used with the TRITON Extreme as of July 2003 Media inserted in the TRITON Extreme s CF card slot e CF CompactFlash Type I Type II Pow
64. device MIDI program change messages can be transmitted from an external MIDI device and received by TRITON Extreme to select programs PG p 290 Performance Edit BERA Using controllers to modify the sound The TRITON Extreme provides various controllers a joy stick the ribbon controller the SW1 and SW2 switches and the REALTIME CONTROL 1 2 3 4 knobs that let you modify the tone pitch volume or effects in realtime while you play You can use these controllers to modify the sound while you are playing a program Joystick JS X Move the joystick toward the right to apply an effect Normally this is used to control the pitch bend up Move the joystick toward the left to apply an effect Normally this is used to control the pitch bend down JS X JS Y Move the joystick away from yourself to apply an effect Normally this is used to control the oscillator LFO vibrato Move the joystick toward yourself to apply an effect Normally this is used to control filter LFO wah JS Y note You can use the Lock function of SW1 or SW2 keys to hold the effect in the current position of the joy stick For the procedure refer to The lock function on the following page W9 You can use the joystick as a source for alternate mod ulation or effect dynamic modulation to control pro gram parameters or effect parameters Ribbon controll
65. do not sound Make sure that the PLAY MUTE REC button or PLAY MUTE button is set to PLAY p 42 88 Make sure that the Status is INT or BTH p 32 41 Are the Key Zone and Velocity Zone set so that sound will be produced when you play PG p 13 47 76 Notes do not stop _ In Program P1 Edit Basic select the Program Basic page make sure that the Hold check box is unchecked PG p 10 L In Global P2 Controller make sure that Damper Polarity or Foot Switch Polarity is set correctly t PG p 165 Can t input sound Are the appropriate sources connected to the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks the S P DIF IN jack p 64 _ If there is no sound in Sampling mode check that Input Level and BUS IFX Indiv Select are set correctly in the Sampling P0 Recording Input Setup page p 64 131 132 _ If there is no sound in Program Combination Sequencer Song Play and Media modes check that Input Level and BUS IFX Indiv Select are set correctly in Global PO Basic Setup Input Sampling page or in the P0 Sampling pages of Program Combination or Sequencer modes or in the Media mode Play Audio CD page p 64 _ If you are inputting sound to the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks make sure that the AUDIO INPUT LEVEL knob is raised p 65 _ If you are inputting sound to the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks is the MIC LINE switch set appropri
66. dotted vertical Grid lines will start at LoopS Loop Start If you want to set End at the end of one 4 4 measure the fourth verti cal line from the LoopS Loop Start line will be the end of the first measure Place End at this vertical ae Start G26697 Loop _ Rev LJ 1208 Loops 26697 se Lock Loop Tune 8 Ea 2 End Use Truncate to delete the unwanted data that is outside of the start or loop start and end addresses Select the page menu command Truncate to access the dialog box Truncate Sample 66086 Stereo Range Start 0026697 End 8188983 Front amp End Frot End Save to No L CECAN i R 0003 _ Overwrite Select the Front amp End radio button In this example we will not change the settings of the Save to No and Overwrite check boxes so press the OK button to execute When you execute the oper ation the truncated samples 0002 LOOP1 140B0002 L and 0003 LOOP1 140B0002 R will be automatically assigned to Index 1 WA Please refer to A note on saving samples 1 p 77 for a cautionary note regarding the Save to No and Overwrite check boxes Sample waveform data editing Editing the waveform data of the sample is done in P1 Sample Edit You can use commands such as cut copy and normalize to edit the waveform data 1 Select the sample that you wish to edit Use Sample Select or Inde
67. editing command Make the appropriate settings in the dia log box and press the OK button to execute For details on each command PG p 119 A note on saving samples In the dialog boxes of some page menu there is a Save to No setting that lets you specify the sample number to which the edited sample will be saved At this time a vacant sample number will be selected automatically so you will change the setting only if you want to specify the save destination number If you check Overwrite in the dialog box of the com mand the data prior to editing will be deleted and will be overwritten by the edited data Normally you will exe cute the Write operation without checking this so that the unedited data is preserved When you are completely fin ished with your editing you can use the page menu com mand Delete Sample to delete unneeded samples amp In Sampling mode there is no Compare function that lets you compare the data before and after editing If you wish to preserve the unedited state of the mul tisample or sample use Copy Sample or Copy MS PG p 108 109 to copy the sample or multi sample before you begin editing For some page menu commands in P1 Sample Edit or P2 Loop Edit you can execute without checking the Overwrite setting in the dialog box so that the sample data previous to editing will be preserved Multisample editing Editing a multisample is accompli
68. effect AMS Pan AMS Intensity Intensity specifies the depth of the panning effect that will occur when AMS Pan AMS is in use If you set AMS Pan AMS to Note Number the pan will change according to the keyboard position at which you play a note ona TRITON Extreme With a setting of LFO1 or 2 the sound will sweep from side to side auto pan Other settings allow you to move the oscillator pan by operating a controller Use DKit Setting This is valid when Oscillator Mode is set to Drums If this is checked the pan location specified by the Drum Kit for each drum sound will be used If this is unchecked all drum sounds will sound at the same location Preload and GM drum kits are set to stereo settings Normally you will leave this checked Amp1 Mod page PROGRAM P4 Edit Amp Ampi Mod i Keyboard Track Key Low EE Key High C4 Ramp Low 00 Ramp H Amp Modulation velocity Intensity 50 AMS Ribbon CC 16 Intensity 16 LFO 1 2 LFO1 Intensity AMS JS CC 2 Intensity 00 LFO2 Intensity AMS JS CC 92 Intensity 58 S ET Keyboard Track This lets you vary the volume relative to the position of the key you are playing on the keyboard e When Ramp Low has a positive value the vol ume will increase as you play lower on the keyboard With a negative value the volume will decrease as you play lower on the keyboard e When Ramp High has
69. ers Multisamples reproduce the complex overtone struc ture and frequency characteristics that allow us to identify a sound as being piano like or guitar like etc Program Basic page PROGRAM P1 Edit Basic Program i _ __ Oscillator Mode zz Yoice Assign Mode O Single Poly UO Single Trigger Double O Mono iegeais O Drums _ Hoia Scale Type Equal Temperament Key P C Random 0 EE Oscillator Mode This sets the mode of the oscillator Single uses one oscil lator and Double uses two oscillators In the case of Sin gle the maximum polyphony is 60 notes and in the case of Double the maximum polyphony is 30 notes If you wish to use a Drum Kit to create a drums program select Drums In the case of Drums the polyphony is normally 60 notes WJ Depending on the multisamples that are selected for each oscillator the maximum polyphony can be up to 120 notes for Single up to 60 notes for Double and up to 120 notes for Drums p 12 Voice Assign Mode Select whether the program will sound in Poly polyphon ically or Mono monophonically If this is set to Poly you will be able to play chords using the program If this is set to Mono only one note will sound even if you play a chord Normally you will set this to Poly but it is effective to use Mono when you are playing sounds such as a solo instrument an analog synth bass or a synth lead Try switching between Poly and Mono and listen
70. example select any desired program for tim bres 1 4 2 Select Combination P2 Edit Trk Param MIDI Ch page For the timbres that you will be using set Status to INT and set MIDI Channel to Gch or to the global MIDI channel set in Global P1 MIDI MIDI Chan nel For this example set timbres 1 4 to a Status of INT and timbres 5 8 to a Status of Off Set the MIDI Channel of timbres 1 4 to Gch COMBINATION P2 Edit Trk Param MIDI Ch Z Bank E A InitialCombiEGGa Kesko iaraan Bell Mall Strings Keuboars Ke j seat Keuboars Status ceveresed j casscssosssasececedosososososossnsscofecsossescosssosose pamp INT me D INT D off D off D off P or 3 Select Combination P7 Edit Arp Setup page iT 1 J G1 Acoustic Piano 1 2 E Keyboar Organ Bell Mall Strings Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Arpeggiator Assign D E a Off a Off a Off Bor Off D off Arpegg lArpegg Scan A B Zone Set Temp to specify the tempo This is the same as for a program p 94 However the tempo is shared by both arpeggiators A and B 6 Make Arpeggiator Assign settings Assign arpeggiator A or B to the desired timbres Each timbre will be played by the arpeggiator that has been assigned to it 6 Make Arpeggiator Run settings Check the arpeggiator s that you want to operate The arpeggiator s checked here will run when the ARPEG GIATOR ON OFF
71. files PG p 317 Viewing information about media Media Media Info You can view information about the media selected by Media Select You can also mount a device connected to the USB A connector amp PG p 203 Handling CompactFlash and Microdrive media Immediately after use CompactFlash or Microdrive media may be at a high temperature Before removing the media power off the TRITON Extreme and allow the tem perature to cool down CompactFlash and Microdrive media are precision devices Do not bend them subject them to excessive force or shock or drop them Microdrives in particular are prone to damage from vibration handle them with care Do not use or store these types of media in locations of extremely high or low temperature in direct sunlight in a closed automobile near heating equipment or in loca tions of excessive humidity or dust Avoid using or storing these types of media in locations where there may be strong static electricity or electrical noise Be careful not to let dust or dirt adhere to the terminals of the CompactFlash or Microdrive media If the terminals should become soiled wipe them lightly with a dry cloth When not using media protect it from static electricity by keeping it in the protective case that came with it Keep media out of reach of infants or children since they may place it in their mouth and possibly choke on it or swallow it Carefully read the instructions included
72. for normal keyboard performance Use Track Select to select the track that will be played from the keyboard For example you might assign backing patterns such as drums and bass to the C 2 B2 keys and use these keys to control pattern playback and use keys C3 and above to play solos in realtime It is a good idea to keep the assigned keys together in this way vJRPPR gt RPPR function is on _ RPPR gt Normal song playback and recording U00 R amp B Suffle1 User Pattern U00 U99 Shift 00 Cto last assigned P6 Rattern RPPR RPPR Setup 95 56 RPPR playback Let s use the RPPR you created to perform in the Sequencer PO Play REC page 1 Select Sequencer P0 Play REC 2 Check the RPPR check box The RPPR function will be turned on Set the on off for each song SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 68 A 001 01 000 Meter 44 J aga gt Manu S004 Hip Hop Rap a Drums Roso h i v RPPR i Category i 6 L Peta gt H Rari N St Ba nk Program Dark Jaz Are tri reie Le Te oi Plas Jre Pleas Pluessl D 1939 Danse Dana Bla JEA 3 Play the keyboard and patterns will begin playing according to the RPPR settings e Pattern playback for a key with a Sync setting of Beat or Measure will sync to the playback of the first pattern PG p 92 Sync e If you are playing the pattern in synchronization when Sync is Beat Measure or SEQ
73. i e the settings that are written into memory the LED will go dark and it will not be possible to return to the previous edits by pressing the COM PARE key again In Sequencer mode you can use the COMPARE key to make before and after comparisons immediately after using realtime recording or step recording to record a song or after performing a track edit operation For example this can be used effectively when realtime recording a track for a song 1 Realtime record a MIDI track Take 1 2 Once again realtime record on the same track Take 2 3 Press the COMPARE key The LED will light and take 1 will be recalled 4 Press the COMPARE key once again The LED will go dark and take 2 will be recalled If at step G you once again realtime record on the same track take 3 the object of the Compare function will now be take 1 If at step 4 you once again real time record on the same track take 3 the object of the Compare function will be take 2 In this way the Compare function lets you recall the pre vious recording or the previous state of event editing amp The Compare function is not available Sampling Song Play Global or Media modes Popup buttons and popup menus You can press a popup button to access a popup menu and then set parameter values 1 p 8 Keyboard input When inputting a note number or a specific velocity as the value of a parameter you can use the keyboard
74. in the LCD screen you can select pages set parameter values rename programs and combinations write data and perform many other opera tions note References in the TRITON Extreme s owner s manual to the button or tab refer to objects displayed on the LCD screen References to the key knob dial or slider refer to controls on the front or rear panel of the TRITON Extreme e category Popup button i Page menu button NS a Current page COMBINATION P Play Arpeggio Play A Eika Category Sank A gt fit Keyboard d 100 d Popup button 2 2 Cle The Piano Arpeggiator Run SSS f Check box Ae 48 Geet e ecduendyatnuecauiwed sabudveds sucbieasdienesduaney Arpeggiator A sorveennennnnnnnnnnnnpeannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnannnnnnennnay b Edit cell P butt C PEROU Dee Dr Djembalia Reso F N E 5 5 Boos Eo er ere 5 aaa J Latch _ Keyboard ence eee eee eee ee eee ee a Current page This indicates the selected page within the current mode From the left this shows the mode name page number and page name Mode name Page number Page name COMBINATION P Play Arpeggio Play AME A b Edit cell When you press a parameter in the LCD screen the parameter or parameter value will sometimes be high lighted displayed in inverse video This is called the edit cell and the highlighted i
75. key is turned on With the settings shown in the LCD screen for steps and 3 turning the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key on will cause arpeggiator A to operate for timbres 1 and 2 and arpeggiator B to operate for timbre 3 When the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key is turned off timbres 1 4 will sound as a layer If all timbres Assign are Off or if Arpeggiator Run A or B is unchecked the arpeggiator will not function T In the Arpeggiator A and Arpeggiator B pages set the parameters for arpeggiators A and B The parameters for A and B are the same as for a pro gram p 94 In the Scan Zone A B page specify the range in which arpeggiators A and B will operate The parameters for A and B are the same as for a pro gram p 94 You can use keyboard ranges or playing velocity to operate the arpeggiator or to switch between arpeggia tors A and B By using the Combination P4 Edit Zone Ctrl Key Zone page and Vel Zone page to set key board ranges and velocity ranges in conjunction with each other you can create even more variations If you wish to save the edited combination settings in internal memory turn off memory protect in Global mode and write the combination p 114 115 The Status MIDI Channel and Assign settings shown in the LCD screen of steps 2 and 8 can be made so that certain timbres will sound only when the arpeggiator is On and will be silent when the arpeggiator is Off
76. key when you want to make a before and after comparison of the track 3 In the Sequencer P5 Track Edit page set Track Select to Track03 Then choose the page menu com mand Event Edit to access the event edit screen In the Set Event Filters dialog box check the Exclu sive setting Notice that a MIDI parameter change system exclusive message is inserted at the beginning and at measure 9 of track 3 Event Edit Track 83 Measure ip Index HAHAA BT 1 900 EXCL 002 BT 81 000 EXCL 003 BT G1 000 EXCL 004 BT 100G EXCL 005 BT 1 00 EXCL M 001 0 6 BT 01 000 EXCL i invert Event Edit Track 3 M 689 pgg Measure HEHE Index HAHAA M089 001 BT 1 900 EXCL BT 1 000 EXCL BT 01 000 EXCL BT 01 000 EXCL M009 005 BT 01 000 _ EXCL M 8a9 aB6 BT 01 000 EXCL 2 Using the effect specified by the song itself from the beginning of the song and inserting the effect settings from another song at the middle of the song For the insert effect IFX3 used by track 3 we will use 023 Stereo Phaser specified by the template song from the beginning of the song and insert MIDI parameter change system exclusive messages at measure 9 to switch to the 020 Stereo Flanger settings from another song Enter Sequencer mode and use Song Select to select song S000 2 Use the page menu command Load Template Song to load Acid Jazz SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 68 A 0001
77. locations that will not produce noise when the sample is played back e The grid function displays a BPM based grid on the waveform display helping you to create loops or make waveform edits that match the desired BPM e Each multisample allows you to create up to 128 indices Each index consists of a sample assignment a key zone an original key a playback pitch and settings such as level e The Keyboard amp Index display lets you edit a multisample while viewing the assignments and zones of each sample e Sample names and multisample names of up to 16 characters can be assigned Sample names and multisample names can also be viewed in Media mode PG p 177 Translation e The Time Slice function automatically detects the attack portions of a kick or snare etc in a rhythm loop sample a looped pattern of drums etc and divides it into separate rhythm instrument sounds A pattern corresponding to the divided samples is created automatically so that you can immediately use the Sequencer mode RPPR function to play the pattern and adjust the tempo without changing the pitch You can also do things such as adjusting the pitch of only the snare replacing it with a different sample or changing the playback timing on the sequencer in this way creating a new rhythm loop based on the rhythm loop you started with Stereo samples are supported e The Time Stretch function lets you modify the tempo without changing the pitch o
78. measure 8 4 In Location specify a location several measures earlier than the point at which you wish to begin recording 6 Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key and then press the SEQUENCER START STOP key Playback will begin When you reach the starting location you specified in step 8 recording will begin Play the keyboard and operate controllers such as the joystick to record your performance When you reach the ending location you specified in step recording will end Playback will continue 6 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key Playback will stop and you will return to the location you specified in step Loop All Tracks This method lets you continue recording as you add musical data The specified region can be recorded repeatedly This is ideal when recording drum phrases etc M Use Track Select to select the track that you want to record 2 Set the Recording Mode to Loop All Tracks If Multi REC is checked it will not be possible to select Loop All Tracks Es R ecor di n g Ss e t u p siete O Over Write O Auto Punch In MAgm fies fas C Over Dub Loop All Tracks Mag4 EEE C Manual Punch Inf F iemsve pata Mull RES 3 In M Loop Start Measure M Loop End Mea sure specify the area that you wish to record For example if you specify M004 M008 recording will occur repeatedly as a loop from measure 4 to measure 8 4 In
79. or contract the display beginning at the Start LoopS Loop Start or End point that is selected Zoom in vertically Zoom out wn c t B zor in horizontally Maximum EHH horizontal zoom in horizontal zoom out r ES Aan an A ANa Zoom out Jee If you check Use Zero locations where the wave form is at zero will automatically be found and selected when you use the VALUE dial etc to set Start LoopS Loop Start or End points This makes it easy to set these points to addresses that will not produce clicks or noise in the loop Loop _ Rew LJ t2de Loops gagagaa _ Loop Lock Loop Tune 48 28 Ie zoom m End 0120135 Use Zero crm izei ma Ge Be Lh TIT TTT TTT titre ti ttt t itt et ee For this example set LoopS Loop Start and Start to the same value WA If desired you can make a dotted vertical line appear in the sample waveform display to indicate the BPM If you use this function with waveforms that have a specific BPM it will be easier to make accurate set tings for End M Select the page menu command Grid to access the dialog box On O off Resolution gt J Check Grid set Resolution to J and press the OK button Set Grid to 140 With these settings vertical dotted lines will be displayed at 140 BPM quarter note inter eee Set End When Loop is On the
80. output level of Valve Force amp Depending on the sound you are using you may hear noise if you turn the Valve Force knobs or edit Valve Force parameters while sound is being produced 109 110 Valve Force settings for Combination Song and Song Play modes In Combination Sequencer and Song Play modes you can set Placement to Final or Insert User 3 4 BUS just as for a program If you want to apply Valve Force to a specific timbre or track set Placement to Insert Use 3 4 BUS The proce dure is the same for making settings in Combination Sequencer and Song Play modes As an example here we will describe the procedure for Combination mode 4 Press the VALVE FORCE ON OFF key to turn Valve Force on The key will light Placement 2 Access the Combination P9 Edit Master FX VALVE page 3 Use Placement to specify where the Valve Force cir cuit will be placed Refer to step 8 in the procedure on p 109 In Out amp You can t use Valve Force on the L R output from S P DIF nor when resampling the L R output in the various modes 4 Specify the input output destination for Valve Force If Placement Final Valve Force will be placed at the final stage of the L R output If Placement Insert Use 3 4 BUS If you want to send the output of each timbre Combi nation track Sequencer Song Play to Valve Force set BUS Select to 3 4 Tube 3
81. playing even after you take your hand off the key board If this is unchecked the arpeggio will stop play ing when you take your hand off the keyboard Key Sync If this is checked the arpeggio pattern will start from the beginning when you play a note after having released all notes This setting is suitable when you are playing in realtime and want the arpeg gio to start at the beginning of the measure If this is unchecked the arpeggio pattern will always be syn chronized to the tempo of the MIDI clock For details on synchronization refer to Synchronizing the arpeg giator p 102 Keyboard If this is checked the notes you play on the keyboard will be heard as well as the arpeggiated notes If this is unchecked only the arpeggiated notes will be heard The same setting can be made by editing the parameter of the same name or abbreviation in the Program PO Play Arpeggio page WA You can use the page menu command Copy Arpeg giator to copy arpeggiator settings from another program or combination PG p 29 6 In the Scan Zone page specify the range in which the arpeggiator will operate PROGRAM P7 Edit Arpeggiator Scan Zone EEk MLUALAUALOLALULLOLLLOLLOLLLELLOLLLOLLELLLELLOLLLOLLELLLOLLOLLLOLLOLLLOLLILI Scan Zone Top Key Bottom key Top elocity Bottom Yelocity Bottom Key Top Key The arpeggiator will oper ate when you play keys within the specified r
82. preset patterns and can be copied to or placed in a song Playback data from a track can also be copied to a pattern When realtime recording a pattern a pattern of the speci fied number of measures will playback repeatedly allow ing you to continue adding musical data to it 1 Create a new song and as described in Preparations for recording set the track to the program that will be used by the pattern p 41 2 Access the Sequencer P6 Pattern RPPR Pattern Edit page SEQUENCER P6 Pattern RPPR Pattern Edit 61 gt 5096 R amp B P Trackaz Bass Pattern p User PE P Ony REC Reso Hi USED IN SONG TRACK J11S E Bass Finger USED IN RPPR Pattern RPPR Edi Name Jl Setup 3 Use Track Select to select the track that you will use to record the pattern The pattern will sound with the program and other set tings of the selected track 4 Set Pattern Pattern Bank to User and set Pattern Select to U00 User patterns U00 U99 can be created for each song Select the page menu command Pattern Parameter A dialog box will appear Set Pattern Parameter of UBA Length BEY Meter 4 4 6 Set the number of measures in the pattern to a Length of 04 four measures and set Meter to a time signature of 4 4 Press the OK button D As necessary set Resolution to apply realtime quantization Begin realtime recording You can
83. record in the same way as you did when recording tracks with Loop All Tracks p 44 Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key and then press the SEQUENCER START STOP key After the pre count pattern recording will begin Play the keyboard and operate the joystick and other con trollers to record your performance When you reach the end of the pattern the sequencer will return to the beginning of the pattern and continue recording If you continue recording the newly recorded data will be added to the previously recorded data 49 50 If you want to delete specific data while you continue pattern recording you can press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key or check the Remove Data check box For details refer to step of Loop All Tracks t p 44 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to stop recording If you made a mistake or decide to re record press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to stop recording and press the COMPARE key Then begin the pattern recording procedure again as in step 8 Control data in pattern recording amp To record control data in a pattern you should restore the control data to its normal value within the pat tern If you fail to restore the normal value unneces sary control data may remain in a stuck position when you place the pattern in a song or use the RPPR function to play the pattern However the following control data will be automatically reset to the follow ing va
84. s currently existing in internal memory without leaving a vacant number Clear will erase all songs and the cue list from inter nal memory and load the songs into the numbers from which they were saved Use Select KSC Allocation to specify where the multisamples and samples will be loaded Append will load the data into the next available vacant numbers following the multisamples and sam ples that are already in sample memory RAM Clear will erase all multisamples and samples from sample memory RAM and load the data in the same configuration with which it was saved Press the OK button to execute loading amp Never remove the media while data is being loaded Loading individual banks from a PCG file C Select the PCG file containing the data you want to load and choose the page menu command Load Selected Refer to steps of Loading PCG SNG and KSC files select the PCG file in step 2 Press the page menu button to open the page menu and choose Load Selected You can load individual banks by using PCG Con tents in the dialog box to select the load source bank and To to select the load destination bank When you execute loading only the programs combi nations drum kits and user arpeggio pattern data of the selected bank will be loaded into the load destina tion bank you specify Global setting data will not be loaded If you set PCG
85. selected Step If you set Current Step while stopped the display will change e M Indicates the starting measure of that step e Meter Indicates the currently playing time signa ture This cannot be changed e The name of a cue list can be specified by the Rename Cue List page menu command e When you play the keyboard the program of the track selected by Track Select will sound If a different program is selected for each song the program speci fied for the currently playing song will sound What to do when playing back a cue list and the songs do not transition smoothly If the effect settings differ between songs and depending on the playback data within the song there may be cases in which there is a time lag between songs during play back Also the playback data at the transition between songs may not play at the correct timing In such cases use Convert to Song to convert the cue list into a single song When you play back this song there will be no time lag at the transition and the data will play at the correct timing If the effect settings differ between songs and you want to smooth the transition between songs check FX for Step 01 This way the effect settings will be made before play back begins and there will be no time lag when cue list Length G683 53 94 playback is started or when switching from song to song Although it will not b
86. sequencer and tap tempo etc Connect an optional foot switch such as the Korg PS 1 to the rear panel ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack The function assigned to the foot switch and the polarity of the foot switch can be set in Global P2 Foot Switch Assign and Foot Switch Polarity p 90 PG p 165 281 Damper pedal connections This pedal applies a piano style damper effect as you play Connect an optional footswitch to the DAMPER jack of the TRITON Extreme If a Korg DS 1H is connected half damper effects can be produced The polarity of the pedal is set in Global P2 Controller Damper Polarity and the sensitivity is set in Global PO Half Damper Calibration amp PG p 157 165 6 Inserting and removing CF card slot media You can insert a CompactFlash or Microdrive card into the CF card slot and use it to save or load song data or sam ple data When using a Microdrive you can save the sampled data directly to media amp The TRITON Extreme s CF card slot does not support hot plugging You must turn off the power before inserting or removing CF card slot media Turning off the TRITON Extreme to insert media into the CF slot will cause your unsaved sequence and sample data to be lost so we suggest you always insert your media before you turn the TRITON Extreme on in case you want to save any of the data you create Inserting media Turn off the power of the TRITON Extreme 2 Make sure that th
87. the data Setting up media 2 Press the MEDIA key to enter Media mode 3 Press the Save tab to access the Save page 4 Press Media Select to select the save destination media 6 If the media contains directories select the directory in which you want to save the data Press the Open button to move to a lower level or press the Up button to move to an upper level WA Ifyou are saving data on high capacity media we recommend that you create directories to organize the media into sections To create a new directory move to the level at which you want to create the directory and execute the Util ity page menu command Create Directory 6 Press the page menu button to access the page menu and press Save All Save All will save PCG SNG and KSC files A dialog box will appear The contents settings and operations for the dialog box will depend on the type of data that you are saving Save All PCG SNG and KSC T NEWFILE PCG SNG KSC Program Combination Drum Kit Arp Pattern i RECDEFG AEBCDEFG AECDEFSGU AECDEFGU iN TMM NTA NT INTL rrira AAAA EBAZ Pa P al Fal reAAaaaaaa 7 Press the text edit button and input a filename for the file you want to save p 115 Press each Selection button to access the dialog box and use the check boxes to uncheck any items that you do not need to save Select Save Items Program Bank In order to accu
88. the LCD screen indicate the steps Use Step No to select the step For each step specify Pitch Offset Gate Velocity and Flam e Tone At each step a chord consisting of up to 12 tones Tone No 00 11 can be sounded To input tones select Step No and then use numeric keys 0 9 and 10 s HOLD to input tones The Tone No corresponds to the 0 9 and 10 s HOLD keys as shown below Each time you press a 0 9 or HOLD key the corresponding tone will be turned on off The horizontal lines of the grid shown in the center of the LCD screen indicate the tones Tone00 09 0 9 keys Tone10 key Tone11 10 s HOLD key Length 8 Tone No 01 05 Step No Creating an example pattern 4 Set Step No to 01 and press the 0 key 2 Set Step No to 02 and press the 1 key 3 Set Step No to 03 and press the 2 key 4 Set Step No to 04 and press the 1 key 6 Set Step No to 05 and press the 3 key 6 Set Step No to 06 and press the 1 key T Set Step No to 07 and press the 2 key Set Step No to 08 and press the 1 key ded d When you play the keyboard as shown in the illustra tion the arpeggiator will begin playing Tone 0 corresponds to the pitch of the lowest key of chord you play on the keyboard If Sort is unchec
89. the P1 P9 pages is selected you can press the COMPARE key the key will light to recall the sound that was last written before editing As you are editing a combi you can use the COMPARE key to listen to the previously saved version as it was before you began editing Pressing COMPARE again the light goes dark returns you to the version you are editing If you continue editing when the COMPARE key is lit the key will go dark and the current setting will now be the sound that is recalled when the COMPARE key is dark Timbre 1 8 program pan and volume P1 Edit Program Mixer Here you can assign programs to each timbre 1 8 and set the pan and volume for each one WA These settings can also be made in the Program Select and Mixer pages of PO Play Edit Program Mixer page COMBINATION P1 Edit Program Mixer Bank E B G Initial Combi EGAGA 3 gt ry Keaboad Meyboa Bank Program 2 SD Ive Deed a Da D aca Category Program Select Bank Program Assigns a program to each timbre RO When the Bank Timbre Program select menu is displayed you can select programs by bank When the Category Timbre Program select menu is displayed you can select programs from the 16 cat egories p 32 ff You can also use the BANK A N keys to select the bank of the program M If you wish to select programs by receiving MIDI pro gram changes do so in PO Play Pan Specifies the panning
90. the SMF file make sure that the extension is SMF appears in the LCD screen press the EXIT key and move to P0 Prog Mix File Select will show the SMF filenames note If no jukebox list has been created no filenames will be displayed if the Jukebox check box is checked Uncheck the Jukebox check box 4 Press the File Select popup button From the file list choose the filename that you wish to play back SONG PLAY P Prog Mix Program 161 65 861 61 606 Meter 474 File gt EE Play AR chat J 129 _ Jukebox File Select Name SONG AB 1 GAB Acoustic Piano EEE lesbos k Progra Ba Slee Deel AEM sen m 5a A Acoustic Acoustic Acoustic Acoustic Acoustic Acoustic Acoustic Acoustic 6 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key Playback will begin At this time all songs displayed in the File Select popup button will playback consecu tively if Auto Start is checked 6 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key once again to stop playback Starting stopping playback for each song In the PO Prog Mix Preference page uncheck Chain to next file or Auto Start and press the SEQUENCER START STOP key Playback will begin and will stop when each song ends For details on these settings PG p 145 eee Next File aaa Chain to next file Auto Start M ute Solo function In PO Prog Mix the Program T01 08 and T09 16 pages provide
91. the TRITON Extreme provides five insert effects two master effects one master EQ stereo 3 band EQ and a mixer that controls the routing of these components You can choose from 102 types of full digital effects for each insert effect and from 89 types for each master effect The effects are categorized as follows Categories of the 102 effect types 001 015 Filter and dynamics effects such as EQ and compressor 016 031 Phase modulation effects such as chorus and phaser 032 040 Other modulation and pitch shift effects such as rotary speaker and pitch shifter 041 051 Early reflection and delay effects 052 057 Reverb effects 058 089 Mono mono chain effects that internally connect two mono effects in series 090 102 Double size effects You can select effects 000 089 for IFX1 2 3 4 5 MFX1 and MFX2 You can select effects 090 102 for IFX2 3 or 4 This is because these are double size effects which require twice as much processing as the other effects Effects in each mode In Program mode insert effects can be used as part of the sound creating process in the same way that the output sound of the oscillator OSC is processed by the filter and amp to create the final sound Then the master effects can be used to apply spatial type effects such as reverb The stereo 3 band master EQ is located immediately before the OUTPUT MAIN L MONO and R outputs and is used to make final adjustments in tone Th
92. the function of SW1 and SW2 129 Setting the B mode functions of REALTIME CONTROLS ITRH err a eee ocienes 129 Adjusting the contrast brightness of the LED Scree ienn n 129 Using tap tempo control sesesessssessesssessesesessesessesesess 130 POr ea e A 130 ADDENGICES iriiria aL Troubleshooting ona chs cpusanauiebvchncaesicstaateetess 131 Media that can be used with the TRITON Extreme 137 Specifications and options sssessssssesssssesessrerseseseseress 138 OPAO aerie 139 System requirements for computer connection 139 MIDI implementation chart cece eee eeeeee tenes 140 TINTON saps so oes Mesut rhachis has toast EE 141 introduction Main features The TRITON Extreme is a music workstation sampler that features the HI Hyper Integrated synthesis system as its tone generator It provides high quality preset multisamples programs combinations together with a broad range of integrated features such as an effect section 16 track MIDI sequencer sampling dual polyphonic arpeggiators RPPR four channel audio input six channel audio out put and song play functionality You can modify the sound in realtime by using a wide range of performance controllers such as the joystick rib bon controller REALTIME CONTROLS and ARPEGGIA TOR knobs and pedals that you connect You can also expand the TRITON Extreme s capabilities by installing the MOSS modeling synthesizer or by add ing more sample memor
93. the settings described in steps O of Edit ing the indexes 2 Set parameters for the selected index PG p 135 e Changing the Top Key will change the upper limit of the zone Simultaneously the lower limit of the next numbered index will also change e If you check Constant Pitch all notes in the index zone will sound the sample at its original pitch e Pitch adjusts the sample pitch for each index You can use the Pitch BPM Adjust page menu command to set the loop interval to a desired BPM value PG p 136 Converting a multisample to a program In pages PO Recording P4 Controller Setup you can select and execute the Convert MS To Program page menu command When you execute this command the settings of the currently selected multisample will be con verted into a program In Program mode you can make fil ter amp and effect settings etc and play the sample as a program The resulting program can be used in a combi nation or song For details on the Convert MS To Program page menu command PG p 110 Using samples in a drum kit A sample you created in Sampling mode can be used as one of the instruments in a drum kit In the Global P5 Drum Kit Sample Setup page and Low Sample page set Drumsample Bank to RAM and use Drumsample to select the sample that you created Using Time Slice to divide a sample and playing it in Sequencer mode Time Slice is a
94. timbres you are not using If the status is set to Off EXT or EX2 that timbre will not sound The EXT and EX2 settings allow the timbre to control a connected external MIDI device QS p 8 PG p 38 Mixer tab Here you can adjust the pan and level for each timbre 1 8 QS p 9 PG p 40 Easy arpeggiator editing Arpeggio Play A Arpeggio Play B tabs e You can switch arpeggiators A and B on off independently To turn both arpeggiators on off use the ARPEGGIA TOR ON OFF key The arpeggiator will operate only on timbres to which arpeggiator A or B is assigned e The ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO GATE and VELOCITY knobs control the tempo duration and strength of the arpeggiated notes QS p 11 Combination editing You can edit the preloaded combinations banks A D H M with which the TRITON Extreme is shipped or start with an initialized combination banks E N to create your own original combination You can perform simple editing even in the PO Play page but the P1 Edit Program Mixer P9 Edit Master FX pages let you perform more detailed editing WA Original programs using sample waveforms multi samples you sampled on the TRITON Extreme or loaded into memory via Media mode can also be used in a combination WA If a program being edited in Program mode is used in a combination it will sound according to the settings being edited amp If you wish to save an edited combination in internal memory you mu
95. to Setting the function of SW1 and SW2 p 129 Using the Lock function examples Joystick Select program bank J001 Acoustic Piano and play the keyboard To select a program make sure that you are in Program mode and press the BANK J key numeric key 1 and then the ENTER key 2 Move the joystick toward yourself the Y direction The modulation will deepen and at the same time res onance will be applied to give a unique character to the sound 3 While holding the joystick toward yourself press the SW2 switch The SW2 key will light The modulation effect at this point will be maintained Lock function 4 Release the joystick and play the keyboard The modulation will stay the same as it was when the SW2 key was pressed Moving the joystick toward yourself will not affect the sound 6 Press the SW2 key once again to release the Lock function Ribbon controller Make sure that the J001 Acoustic Piano program is selected Press the SW2 key The SW2 key will light 2 Touch the ribbon controller and move your finger to left and right Movement in the X direction will brighten the tone and movement in the X direction will darken the tone 3 Take your finger away from the ribbon controller The sound will remain as it was before you removed your finger Lock function 4 Press the SW2 key once again to release the Lock function note In the LCD scre
96. to access the Load Preload Demo Data dialog box 2 Specify the Kind and bank Set Kind Program and Bank F To F see the illus tration Load Preload Demo Data Kind P rogram Can Bank pF C Single Pb F amp EXB MOSS programs can be loaded only into Bank F 3 Press the OK button to execute loading If you decide to cancel press the Cancel button When you press the OK button a dialog box will ask you for confirmation Press the OK button to execute loading 4 As described in steps O load three more sets of data with Kind and the bank set as follows Kind Program Bank J To J Kind Program Bank K To K Kind Drum Kit Bank A B To A B Kind Arpeggio Pattern Bank A B To A B Kind Combination Bank E To E iS EXB MOSS combinations are created using EXB MOSS programs together with preload program banks J and K This is why you need to load preload program banks J and K note The preload combination data for the EXB MOSS is stored in Bank E and will be available only if the EXB MOSS is installed 6 If you want load the demo song data access the Load Preload Demo Data dialog box set Kind to All Demo Songs and press the OK button to load the data Load Preload Demo Data Kind gt ZS Since this method will load the following data the data of these banks will be overwrit
97. user arpeggio pattern settings Global P6 and all other global settings Global PO P4 Each of these can be written into their respective memory area This data can also be saved to various types of media in Media mode p 116 117 amp Global mode does not provide a Compare function Basic Setup PO Basic Setup Basic Page Tuning to another instrument Transposing GLOBAL P86 Basic Setup Basic Master Tune Soman 440 GGHz Key Transpose Velocity Curve After Touch Curve Effect Global SW O IFX1 5 Off I MF x1 off _ MF x2 off se ef Lean Auto Arpeggiator Program Combination Master Tune adjusts the overall pitch Edit this setting when you are playing the TRITON Extreme with other instruments or when playing along with music on CD or tape You can adjust the pitch in a range of 50 cents one semitone 100 cents Key Transpose shifts the pitch in semitone steps Edit this setting when you want to transpose the sound of the entire TRITON Extreme You can adjust the transposition in a range of 1 octave Adjusting the way in which velocity or after touch will affect the volume or tone You can adjust the way in which changes in velocity or after touch will affect the volume or tone By changing this you can for example make the volume of the notes more consistent even when they are played with varying velocities dynamics Each curve has its own character so you can select
98. will appear Specify the destination to which the ripped sample will be written Select RAM if you want to rip the sample into sample memory RAM In this case you can also set Sample No L R to specify the sample number that will be written Normally you can leave this unchanged Ripping To Dyer Sample No L saga Sample No R 991 Select MEDIA if you want to rip the sample to media Use drive select to select the drive and use the Open and Up buttons to select the directory in which the data will be saved Also specify a name for the WAVE file that will be saved To EMED A T NEWFILE WAY WAVES gt HDD INTERNAL HD 9 Press the OK button to execute ripping or press the Cancel button to cancel without executing amp When you press the OK button the Obey Copyright Rules dialog box will appear Carefully read About copyright QS p iii and if you consent to the terms press the OK button to begin ripping If you do not consent to the terms press the Cancel button to cancel the operation Obey Copyright Rules Are you sure Reading the analog audio output of an audio CD into a sample Here s how analog audio data from an audio CD track can be loaded into a sample In the same way as when inputting the output of your CD player to the TRITON Extreme s AUDIO IN 1 2 jacks use audio cables to connect the audio output of the CD ROM or CD R RW drive connecte
99. you press the SAMPLING REC key until you enter sampling standby mode The length of time until you enter sampling standby mode will depend on the state of the free space on the media i e whether the free space is continuous or fragmented When sampling to the media pressing the SAMPLING REC key will cause the amount of space specified by Sample Time to be allocated within the media You should set Sample Time slightly longer than the length that you will actually sample and avoid speci fying an excessively long sample time Drum kits The pitch of a drum sample does not change You have left the Assign check box unchecked and want to play the drum sample at the adjacent right a semitone lower but the pitch does not change If you have selected a drum program in Program mode and then want to edit the drum kit in Global mode go to the Program P2 Edit Pitch OSC1 Pitch Mod page and set Pitch Slope to 1 0 before you enter Global mode Arpeggiator Arpeggiator does not start L Is the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key turned on lit If the arpeggiator does not start for a combination or song make sure that Arpeggiator Run is checked and that an arpeggiator is selected for Assign t p 96 PG p 49 93 149 Is the MIDI Clock Global P1 MIDI parameter set to Internal PG p 162 L If the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key does not respond in Global P6 User Arpeggio
100. 0 s HOLD when selecting programs If you press the 10 s HOLD key to turn on the 10 s Hold function the LCD screen will indicate rata the ten s place of the program number will be fixed and you will be able to switch programs simply by pressing a single numeric key Each time you press a numeric key the one s place will change You can also use the A V keys to change the value of the ten s place Press the 10 s HOLD key to make the display indi cate ica The ten s place of the program number will be held fixed PROGRAM P Play Bank A J 120 Dj000 BD Grand Concert iSW1 Octave Down iSW2 Octave Up 1688 St Graphic TEQ Knob 1B Cutoff 2 090 PianoBody Damper Knob2B KMod2 i 3 Knob3B KMod3 i d 888 No Effect _KnobaB KModd 2 IFAS B88 No Effect i MFX1016 Stereo Chorus iMFX2 852 Reverb Hall Performance Editor Octave Pb Attack Decay tretch p hn Time Time Balance Balance 2 By pressing a numeric key 0 9 you can input the one s place in a single action You can use the A V keys to change the value of ten s place 4 To cancel the 10 s HOLD function press 10 s HOLD to erase the display Using a footswitch to select programs You can assign the Program Up Down function to an on off type foot switch such as the optional PS 1 connected to the rear panel ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack and use it to switch combinations p 90 Selecting programs from a MIDI
101. 1 and Send 2 Insert FX page after the signal passes through the insert effects Insert effects 4 Select the Insert FX page PROGRAM P8 Edit Insert Effect insert FX i Chain Insert Effect PantCC S BUS Sel Sendi Send2 IFX1 of D B 2 Stereo Compressor IFX2 D 998 St Graphic 7EQ IFx3 D 920 Stereo Flanger IFX4 D 223 Stereo Phaser pongi ne OQ D 259 5t BPM Delay nT I FX 1 2 3 d 5 For IFX1 5 select the effect type for each insert effect iS When you press the popup button all effects will be displayed organized into six categories Use the pages located at the left to select a category and select an effect from that category on the LCD screen amp You can select effects 000 089 for IFX1 2 3 4 5 MEX1 and MFX2 You can select the double size effects 090 102 for IFX2 IFX3 or IFX4 ZS You can use the Copy Insert Effect page menu com mand to copy effect settings from another program etc Also you can use Swap Insert Effect to exchange for example IFX1 and IFX5 6 Press the ON OFF button to turn on the insert effect Each time you press the button the insert effect will be switched on off When OFF the result will be the same as when 000 No Effect is selected The input sound will be output without change T Make Chain settings If the Chain check box is checked the insert effect will be connected in series Since the output of the o
102. 2 TRACK 3 PROGRAM TRACK 11 PROGRAM i Procran T TRACK 4 PROGRAM TRACK 12 PROGRAM IFX4 MEQ TRACK 5 PROGRAM TRACK 13 PROGRAM C 1Fx5 Valve Force TRACK 6 PROGRAM TRACK 14 PROGRAM Arpeggiator A TRACK 7 PROGRAM TRACK 15 PROGRAM J TRACK 8 PROGRAM TRACK 16 PROGRAM Arpeggiator B Sequencer mode e Use the 16 track MIDI sequencer to record and play songs e Record onto the sixteen MIDI tracks individually or all sixteen tracks at once Exclusive messages can also be recorded and edited e Perform sampling resampling An external audio input source can be sampled in syn chronization with the song playback When doing so you can automatically create a note event that will be used to trigger the resulting sample letting you record an external audio source just as if you were recording onto an audio track This is called the In track Sam pling function You can also resample the playback of a song After resampling your song to media you can then use Media mode to write the song to a CD R RW drive connected to the TRITON Extreme s USB A connector creating your own audio CD e Make effect and Valve Force settings for a song e You can record a performance that uses the arpeggiator s into a song or pattern e You can use a cue list to create an arrangement using individual songs for each verse chorus bridge etc and specify the nu
103. 3 34 Layer Layer refers to settings which cause two or more pro grams to sound simultaneously when a note is played Layer Two or more programs sound simultaneously Split Split refers to settings which cause different programs to sound on different areas of the keyboard Program B Program A Split Different programs will sound in different areas of the keyboard Velocity switch Velocity Switch refers to settings which cause different programs to sound depending on the velocity keyboard playing dynamics Stora Keyboard plying Sot dynamics Velocity Switch Keyboard playing dynamics velocity switches between different programs On TRITON Extreme you can use a different program for each of up to eight timbres and combine two or more of the above methods to create even more complex setups Program A Program B Program D Strong Keyboard playing Program C Soft dynamics iT ee layered In the higher keyboard range C and D are switched by velocity and layered with A As an additional possibility you can set the slope for a key zone or velocity zone so that the volume diminishes grad ually This lets you change a split into a keyboard cross fade or a velocity switch into a velocity crossfade Keyboard X Fade keyboard crossfade to high notes the volume of A will fade out and the volume of B will fade in Program A Program B The Compare function When one of
104. 4 programs and non rewritable bank G 256 programs compatible with the GM2 standard and nine drum programs The 128 programs of bank F can be selected only if the EXB MOSS option has been installed e Sample or resample For example you can sample an external audio source while listening to the performance of the arpeggiator or resample a performance you play using a program e Edit a program Make settings for the oscillator filter amp EG LFO effects valve force and arpeggiator SAMPLING MODE S P DIF IN S P DIF IN L R Multisample i i Sample Insert Effect Valve Force _1Fx1 IFx4 Sample e IFX 2 IFX 5 IFX 3 Valve Force Sample e eN GLOBAL MODE DRUM KIT Key Assign Drumsample Sample H Drumsample Sample L ARPEGGIATOR PATTERN Preset Arpeggio Pattern PO 4 User Arpeggio Pattern U00 506 CD R RW Ripping i D o CD RON Write Audio CD 1 i MEDIA MODE Resampling The following multisamples are available for the oscil lator e 962 internal multisamples 160 Mbytes e Multisamples RAM that you sampled on the TRITON Extreme or loaded in from media maximum of 96 Mbytes e Create drum programs using a drum kit created in Global mode Combination mode Select and play combinations A combination is a set of two or more programs up to a maximum of e
105. 660 B60 Bottom Velocity i 661 i ool i Velocity Zone Slope Here you can specify the range of values over which the original volume will be reached starting from the top velocity and bottom velocity In the case of the above example you could set the veloc ity zones of the two timbres so that they partially overlap and set the Top Slope and Bottom Slope so that the sound changes gradually instead of changing suddenly between velocity values of 63 and 64 Control page Controller settings For each combination you can specify the functions of the B mode functions of REALTIME CONTROLS knobs 1 4 and the SW1 and SW2 p 129 PG p 48 279 280 Arpeggiator settings P7 Edit Arp Indicates settings for the arpeggiator p 96 Insert Effect settings P8 Edit Insert FX Indicates the insert effects and allows you to adjust their settings Specifies the routing for each timbre i e how it is sent to the insert effect master effects and individual outputs p 105 Master Effect and Valve Force settings P9 Edit Master FX Indicates the master effects and allows you to adjust their settings Here you can also make master EQ and Valve Force settings p 106 37 38 Auto Song Setup function This function automatically applies the settings of the cur rent combination to a new song If inspiration for a phrase or song strikes you while you re playing a combination you can
106. 9 Combination 35 Drum kit 92 134 Program 23 26 Sampling 66 78 Scale 91 Polyphonic 24 35 Polyphony 12 Popup button 8 14 Popup menu 8 14 Portamento 26 35 36 Power 6 16 18 Recalling the last selected mode 90 Preload data 113 Program 10 19 64 90 91 92 94 103 104 109 114 Combination 32 34 Sampling 78 Sequencer 41 58 Q Quantize 42 49 R Radio button 9 REALTIME CONTROLS 3 22 39 129 Realtime Quantize 49 Realtime recording Pattern 49 Track 43 REC key 5 65 66 REC WRITE key 5 43 114 116 Recording Level 65 67 132 134 Rename 115 Resampling 67 70 83 Resonance 27 93 Ribbon controller 3 21 Lock function 22 Pitch bend 26 Routing 93 104 105 106 107 RPPR 55 79 Create 55 Play 56 Realtime recording 56 S Sample 36 61 63 70 71 77 Sample memory RAM 2 18 66 67 Sample memory RAM slot cover 6 Sampling 2 5 11 13 62 64 68 80 103 106 110 Sampling frequency 7 62 123 132 Save 113 117 Data filer 119 Jukebox list 87 Media 117 Track list 125 Scale 36 91 Scroll bar 8 Send AUDIO INPUT 107 Combination Sequencer Song Play 105 Drum kit 93 Program 104 Sequencer 5 11 13 39 40 61 64 78 80 102 103 105 110 Shortcut 130 SIMM 18 NG file 113 118 Solo 42 86 Song 39 40 85 Convert a cue list 54 Copy 50 Create a Wave file 83 Edit 50 In Track Sampling 82 Naming 51 Save 117 Setting the number of measures 51 Song Play 11 13
107. 9 Edit Master Effect Master FX A Chain Direction P MFx1 gt MFx2 Chain Signal MFX1 gt 616 Stereo Chorus Send gt 52 Reverb Hall faa A Ma i High iene Out FR di In MFX1 and MFX2 select the type of each master effect The procedure is the same as when selecting an inser tion effect amp The master effects cannot use double size effects amp The master effects are mono in stereo out Even if a stereo input effect is selected it will function as mono input 2 Press the ON OFF button to turn on the master effect Each time you press the button the master effect will be switched on off When OFF the output of the mas ter effect will be muted 3 Use Return 1 and Return 2 to adjust the output levels of the master effects ZB For each effect the Wet value of the Wet Dry parameter is the output level at the effect The return value is multiplied with this Return 127 will be x1 0 to determine the actual output level of the mas ter effect Select the MFX1 and MFX2 pages and set the param eters for each selected effect For details on the parameters of each effect PG p 217 Master EQ 5 Use the stereo 3 band master EQ to make final equal izing adjustments just prior to the sound being sent to the AUDIO OUTPUT L MONO and R jacks Move the slider for each band to make adjustments You can select the Master EQ page and adjust the band frequ
108. Combination PO Play select the Arpeggio Play A or the Arpeggio Play B page and uncheck the Arpeggiator Run check box 6 To modify the name of a user arpeggio pattern use the Utility Rename Arpeggio Pattern p 115 D If you wish to save the edited user arpeggio pattern in internal memory you must write the user arpeggio pattern In this case both user arpeggio patterns will be written simultaneously If you turn off the power without writ ing the edited contents will be lost p 116 If you wish to save the state of the combination at the same time return to Combination mode and write the combination p 114 WA When editing a user arpeggio pattern pay attention to the global MIDI channel the channel of each track and the arpeggiator assignments and make sure that the arpeggiator you are hearing is the pattern that you wish to edit amp If you moved here from Sampling mode the arpeg giator will not turn on Nor will it be possible to edit arpeggio patterns 101 102 Synchronizing the arpeggiator The note timing of the arpeggiator will differ depending on the state of the arpeggiator Key Sync check box If this is checked the arpeggiator will operate at the tim ing of the first note on you play from a state in which all keys are released If this is unchecked the arpeggiator will operate in syn chronization with the internal or external MIDI clock The paragraphs below expl
109. Contents to Bank A and To to Bank A data will be loaded as follows Load NEWFILE PCG O Load NEWFILE SNG too E Load NEWFILE KSC too PCG Contents P Bank To gt Bank A ons Sgt Rossi ARESO 0 S ERAD T PSAT OAL miia Sn LO j RPR RI s Programs e Bank A loaded into bank A Combinations e Bank A loaded into bank A Drum Kits e 000 015 A B loaded into bank A B Arpeggio Patterns e 000 199 A B loaded into bank A B When data is loaded into a bank that is different than its original bank the data bank program pattern and kit numbers etc will automatically be reconfigured so that after loading the various types of data will correspond correctly in each mode The following data will also be reconfigured automati cally if you have checked Load SNG too so that song data is loaded at the same time the following data will also be reconfigured automatically in order to ensure that the song data plays back correctly e The bank of each program used by combinations e The pattern number of each user arpeggio pattern used by the combinations programs songs e The kit number of the drum kit used by each program e The bank of the program used by each track of the song e Ifthe song contains track pattern events the program banks within these events Loading data by individual item or bank The TRITON Extreme lets you load programs and combi nations individually or by indi
110. E key Pause LOCATE key Move to the specified location 14 ARPEGGIATOR These knobs control the performance of the arpeggiator in realtime Q5 p 11 ARPEGGIATOR GATE VELOCITY ON OFF TEM PO knob This adjusts the base tempo of the arpeggiator and sequencer The LED will blink at quarter note intervals of the current tempo GATE knob This adjusts the gate time note duration of the arpeggi ated notes At the center position 12 o clock the gate time will be the same as the Gate parameter of the arpeggiator Rotating the knob toward the left will shorten the gate time and rotating it toward the right will lengthen the gate time VELO CITY knob This adjusts the velocity playing strength of the arpeggi ated notes At the center position 12 o clock the velocity will be the same as the Velocity parameter of the arpeg giator Rotating the knob toward the left will decrease the velocity and rotating it toward the right will increase the velocity O N OFF key This switches the Arpeggiator function on off When on the key will light 15 SAMPLING SAMPLING REC START STOP SAMPLING REC key In Sampling Program Combination and Sequencer modes pressing this key will make the key light and when you continue by pressing the SAMPLING START STOP key sampling will either begin or you will enter the sample ready mode SAMPLING START STO P key In Sampl
111. EG Pitch The JS X and JS X settings specify the amount of pitch change in semitones that will occur when MIDI pitch bend messages are received or when the joystick is moved to left or right A setting of 12 allows the pitch to be controlled a maximum of one octave upward a setting of 12 allows the pitch to be controlled a maximum of one octave downward Ribbon specifies the amount of pitch change in semi tones that will occur when MIDI control change CC 16 messages are received or when the ribbon controller of a TRITON Extreme or other MIDI connected instrument is moved to left or right With a setting of 12 the pitch will be raised one octave at the far right of the ribbon control ler and will be lowered by one octave at the far left of the ribbon controller Pitch EG When the Intensity value is set to 12 00 the pitch EG specified in the Pitch EG page will produce a maximum of 1 octave of pitch change Portamento If Enable is checked portamento will be applied Portamento makes the pitch change smoothly when you play the next note before releasing the previous note The Time parameter specifies the portamento time As this value is increased the pitch will change over a longer time With a value of 000 there will be no portamento WA If Porta SW CC 65 is assigned as the function of SW1 or SW2 key the portamento effect can be switched on off by SW1 or SW2 key
112. EG RELEASE O LPFCUTOFF RESONANCE HPF EG INTENSITY Wy 8B F ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE2 ASSIGNABLE3 ASSIGNABLE 4 f A VALVE FORCE O INPUTTRIM ULTRA BOOST TUBE GAIN OUTPUT LEVEL 2 Rotate the desired knob to control the sound etc t For details about what is controlled refer to QS p 6 VALUE slider When a program number is selected in Program PO Play page or when a combination number is selected in Com bination mode page P0 Play page you can use the VALUE slider as a source for alternate modulation or effect dynamic modulation and control program parame ters or effect parameters Keyboard Velocity The force with which you initially strike a note can apply an effect Normally this is used to control volume or the speed or sensitivity of the EG After Touch This effect can be applied by varying the pressure on a key that is already being held down Normally this is used to control volume tone cutoff fre quency or LFO sensitivity etc Note Number Varying amounts of an effect will be applied depending on the position of the key on the keyboard Normally this is used to control volume tone cutoff fre quency LFO sensitivity and EG sensitivity etc WA This can be used as a source for alternate modulation or effect dynamic modulation to control program parameters or effect parameters Foot pedals Switch Damper Pedal An optional switch type damper pedal such as the Korg
113. ER key several times at the desired tempo Notice that the J in the upper right of the LCD screen will change to indicate the tempo at which you press the ENTER key If you press the ENTER key at slightly shorter inter vals the playback tempo will become correspondingly faster You can use tap tempo control whenever the TEMPO knob can be operated For example in Sequencer mode tap tempo control will not be avail able if you are playing a song whose Tempo Mode setting PG p 56 is set to Auto note You can also use a foot switch connected to the ASSIGNABLE FOOT SWITCH jack to control the tap tempo function p 90 PG p 281 Shortcuts MENU key numeric keys 0 9 e Accesses the pages within a mode EN TER key numeric keys 0 9 e Accesses the page menu commands in each page up to ten items EN TER key REC W RITE key e Accesses the Song Setup function In Program or Combination mode you can press this combination of keys to automatically assign the settings of the program or combination to a song in Sequencer mode and then enter record ready mode EN TER key keyboard e Inputs note number values or velocity values e Selects KEY in Global P5 Drum Kit Sequencer P6 Pattern RPPR RPPR Setup page e Selects base key and index in Sampling mode EN TER key LOCATE key e In Sequencer mode and Song Play mode sets the current location as the Location equivalen
114. Expression Effect Control 1 2 C 64 65 66 67 O D Damper Portamento Sw Sostenuto Soft C Control 70 79 O O Sound Realtime Controls 1 4A 74 71 79 72 C Change 80 81 82 83 e O Switch 1 2 Foot Switch Controller C 93 91 92 94 95 O O Send 1 2 Effect ON OFF IFXs MFX1 MFX2 C 6 38 O O Data Entry MSB LSB C 96 97 x O Data Increment Decrement 1e 98 99 O O NRPN LSB MSB C 2 100 101 x O RPN LSB MSB gs Ora 0 95 O O Realtime Controls knobs 1 4 B assign C 0 101 O O Sequencer data receive C 120 121 x O All Sound Off Reset All Controllers C Program O0 127 9 127 tP Change Variable Range 3K GK ok ok K ok ok 3K 2k ok ok 2k ok k 127 Ce a E Song Position When cue list is selected corresponds to cue list 1 Song Select When cue list is selected corresponds to cue lists 0 19 1 une System Clock 4 Real Time Command 1 Local On Off Aux All Notes Off O a 127 Messages Active Sense O Reset x System Common P A C E Transmitted received when Global P1 MIDI Filter Program Change After Touch Control Change Exclusive is Enable respectively 1 When Global mode P1 MIDI Clock is Internal transmitted but not received The opposite for External MIDI or USB 2 LSB MSB 02 00 Arp Arpeggiator ON OFF 0A 00 Arp Gate OB 00 Arp Velocity 10 00 V F Valve Force ON OFF 11 00 V F Input Trim 12 00 V F Ultra Boost 13 00 V F Tube Gain 14 00 V F Output L
115. Filters 24 dB oct LPF with resonance lal 12 dB oct LPF HPF Alternate modulation function 88 keys RH2 76 keys 61 keys The 88 keys model features an RH2 Real Weighted Hammer Action 2 keyboard which provides a differing key weight in each of four keyboard ranges just as on a grand piano Waveform memory 160 Mbytes PCM ROM 962 multisamples 1 175 drumsamples ere 16 Mbytes user sampling RAM SIMM expandable to a maximum of 96 Mbytes Combinations 1 536 user memory combinations 1 280 preload Programs 1 536 user memory programs 128 more when EXB MOSS is installed 1 344 preload 256 9 drum ROM programs GM2 sound map compatible 48 kHz 16 bit linear RAM Maximum sample data memory capacity 96 Mbytes when SIMM modules are installed Maximum size of one sample file is 16 Mbytes allowing approximately 2 minutes 54 seconds of mono or 1 minute 27 seconds of stereo sampling If memory is expanded to 96 Mbytes a maximum of six such sample files can be created MEDIA One sample file either mono or stereo can be a maximum of approximately 80 minutes occupying approximately 440 Mbytes for mono or approximately 879 Mbytes for stereo Sampling to MEDIA requires separately sold media p 137 4 000 samples 1 000 multisamples 128 indexes for each multisample Record playback rip CD DA audio CD Able to load AIFF WAVE AKAI S1000 3000 Korg format sample data can be loaded Sample data can b
116. IDI MIDI Filter setting Enable Exclu sive must be checked Go to Global mode and make sure that this parameter is checked GLOBAL P1 MIDI MIDI Setup MIDI Channel gt EY Local Control on Convert Position PreMIDI Note Receive gt All MIDI Clock Internal C External MIDI External USB tiene Prarasti MIDI Filter Enable Program Change Enable After Touch Bank Change Enable Control Change Combination Change Enable Exclusive 4 Use the page menu command Load Template Song to load Acid Jazz In the dialog box check the Copy Pattern to Track too setting and copy a pattern of about 16 measures QS p 24 SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 63 al 001 01 000 Meter 444 J 108 gt Manu aad Aciq Jazz Reso Hi Bhai r Danky P roo an Djoni Pl 7a D kas D saz E T P panda cinas Pro Dyn Funkin ead plain Tsunami Espress Prog Mizer Mizer PlyLoop Yar Sampling Pate i 9 16 1 3 3 16 1 3 rence 2 Move to Sequencer mode use Track Select to select Track 09 and begin recording For this example select an empty track note If you want to record onto a track that already con tains data set the Recording Setup parameter Recording Mode to Over Dub p 43 3 At the appropriate time while recording adjust the parameter s that you want to realtime record For example you might use the Sequencer P8 Insert Effect Insert FX page to adjust the IFX1
117. Location specify a location several measures earlier than the point at which you wish to begin recording 6 Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key and then press the SEQUENCER START STOP key Playback will begin When you reach the starting loca tion you specified in step 3 recording will begin Play the keyboard and operate controllers such as the joy stick to record your performance When you reach the ending location you specified in step you will return to the starting location and continue recording The musical data that is loop recorded will be added to the previously recorded data 6 You can also erase specific data even while you con tinue loop recording If you press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key dur ing loop recording all musical will be removed from the currently selected track as long as you continue pressing the key By checking the Remove Data check box you can erase only the specified data During loop recording press the note that you wish to delete and only the data of that note number will be deleted from the key board as long as you continue pressing that note Similarly bender data will be deleted as long as you tilt the joystick in the X horizontal direction and after touch data will be deleted as long as you apply pressure to the keyboard When you are once again ready to record musical data uncheck the Remove Data check box 7 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key
118. ON P Play Program Select A Bank B J 954 Djo00 Stereo Piano ZT AN ES Dai aa Seat D voee D 1080 D saec Sia Shine C Grand Naze Bru Standarti a ot sa St Noisy St pa St Mony Sti Pro og Mixer irpan ripaga T n l Select 2 If you change any of the settings in the combination Such as volume panning effect routings and arpeggia tor setting including Arpeggiator On Off you must first save the edited settings using Update Combina tion or Write Combination amp The combination or program must be saved with the Arpeggiator On Off set to On in order for the Auto Adjust Arp settings for Multi REC see step 4 to work properly 3 Hold down the ENTER key and press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key The Setup to Record dialog box will appear Setup to Record Are you sure 4 Press the OK button to perform the Auto Song Setup The TRITON Extreme will automatically switch to Sequencer mode and the combination s settings will be applied to a new song The new song will be the first unused song 6 You will automatically enter record ready mode and the metronome will begin sounding according to the settings in Sequencer mode 0 8 Preference PG p 68 0 8b Metronome Setup 6 Press the START STOP key and realtime recording will begin When you re finished recording press the START STOP key once again p 43 Realtime recording on a MIDI track
119. OS Expression XVP 10 volume pedal Foot controller EXP 2 Damper pedal DS 1H Appearance and specifications of this product are subject to change without notice January 04 When using USB Storage Microsoft Windows 98 Me 2000 SP3 or later XP For Windows 98 Me a USB driver for Windows 98 is required When using USB MIDI Microsoft Windows XP Supported computers A computer with USB port that meets the requirements of the above operating systems Macintosh Supported OS When using USB storage Mac OS 9 0 4 or later Mac OS X 10 0 or later When using USB MIDI Mac OS X 10 2 or later Supported computers Apple Macintosh with USB port that meets the requirements of the above operating systems 139 Music Workstation Sampler Date 2003 8 27 TRITON Extreme MIDI Implementation Chart Basic Default 1 16 1 16 Memorized Channel Changed 1 16 1 16 Memorized 3 Messages x x Altered nie ok ok k k 2k 2k oe oe k ok k k k Note O 127 r 127 Sequencer and Arpeggiator data Number True Voice ole 3K 36 k k k k k k k kk k 127 can transmit all note numbers 0 127 Velocity Note On 9n j 1 127 O9n V 7 127 Note Off Aftertouch Polyphonic Key Polyphonic aftertouch transmitted Monophonic Channel only as sequence data 0 32 O Bank Select MSB LSB P 1 2 16 18 O O Joystick Y Y Ribbon Slider C 4 5 8 10 e O Pedal Portamento Time Volume IFX pan Pan C 1112 13 O O
120. P8 Insert Effect and P9 Master Effect p 105 PG p 95 98 6 Set the tempo and time signature Make these settings in Sequencer P0 Play REC J Tempo sets the tempo and Meter sets the time signature PG p 55 6 As necessary set Reso to specify the quantization resolution PG p 57 7 Make other settings as necessary As necessary make arpeggiator settings Sequencer P7 Arpeggiator MIDI filter settings Sequencer P3 MIDI Filter and Valve Force Sequencer P9 Master Effect PG p 55 102 When you are finished making these settings the basic setup is complete Record as described in Recording methods and following sections WA You can use the Tone Adjust page Sequencer P5 Track Edit Tone 1 2 5 6 to make adjustments to each program as appropriate for your song for example by making the bass a bit more mellow or by speeding up the attack of the strings This lets you adjust the sound and keep those changes as part of the song data without having to move back to Program mode to edit and write the settings LO CATE settings By pressing the LOCATE key you can move to a speci fied location The location is specified by the Utility menu command Set Location You can also hold down the ENTER key and press the LOCATE key to set the location even dur ing playback PG p 61 When you select a song the LOCATE setting will auto matically be set to 001 01 000 Nor
121. Pan Sets the pan of the input signal that you selected in Input When inputting a stereo audio source you will normally set Input1 to L000 and Input2 to R127 or Input1 to R127 and Input2 to L000 When inputting a mono audio source you will nor mally set this to C064 BUS IFX Indiv Select In the same way as when making settings for the oscillator s of a program Spec ifies the bus to which each external audio input will be sent p 104 Send1 to MFX1 Send2 to MFX2 In the same way as when making settings for the oscillator s of a program sets the master effect send levels for each external audio input This can be set only if BUS IFX Indiv Select is set to L R or Off p 105 If BUS IFX Indiv Select is set to IFX1 5 the master effect send levels are set by the Send1 and Send2 parameters following the insert effect in each Insert FX page amp If BUS IFX Indiv Select has a setting other than Off and you raise the Level value the external audio source will be input to the TRITON Extreme At this time if audio cables are connected to the rear panel AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks noise may be input to the TRITON Extreme via the AD converter even if no audio input is actually present and depending on the settings may be output from AUDIO OUTPUT L R 1 2 3 or 4 If you will not be using an external audio source but are using only the internal sounds
122. Placement set to Insert make sure that the Valve Force output destination BUS Sel is not set to a bus or insert effect located at an earlier stage since this would cause a feedback loop PG p 35 54 99 141 Depending on the sound you are using you may hear noise if you turn the Valve Force knobs or edit Valve Force parameters while sound is being produced This is because the level changes in steps it is not a malfunction Program Combination Settings for oscillator 2 are not displayed L Make sure that the Oscillator Mode Program P1 Program Basic parameter is set to Double PG p 9 A combination does not play correctly after you load data _ In the dialog box when you saved the data did you check the items that you wanted to save PG p 187 _ Are the bank numbers of the programs used by the combination the same as when the combination was created Song A song does not play correctly after you load data _ In the dialog box when you saved the data did you check the items that you wanted to save PG p 187 _ Are the programs used by the song the same as when the song was created When saving the song it is best to use Save All or Save PCG amp SEQ so that the programs are saved together with the song Then when loading load both the PCG and the SEQ data PG p 177 187 _ Have you loaded the multisamples and samples used by the program L Does the dem
123. Play Level to Normal and use the High 12 dB setting only if the WAVE file playback volume is lower than the playback of the RAM samples You should also use the High 12 dB setting if the S P DIF output is not loud enough Can t preview _ Is the WAVE file format supported Select a WAVE file of a supported format PG p 176 195 315 Other _ Saved files or sampled WAVE files have an incorrect date time Use the page menu command Set Date Time Media Utility page to set the current date and time p 120 Included CD ROM Can t install the driver Is the USB cable connected correctly Is the CD ROM inserted in your CD drive Make sure that the CD ROM is inserted correctly Could the lens of your CD drive be dirty Use a commercially available lens cleaner to clean the lens Are you attempting to install from a network CD drive This software cannot be installed from a network con nected CD drive C Are you able to use USB If you are using Windows XP go to Control Panel gt System and select the Hardware tab In Device Manager check the settings for Universal Serial Bus Controller and USB Root Hub _ Has the TRITON Extreme been detected as an unknown device If you are using Windows XP go to Control Panel gt System select the Hardware tab and check Device Manager If the TRITON Extreme has not been
124. Play mode SMF can be played back directly from media Audio CD creation Media mode A CD R RW drive can be used to create an audio CD from Wave files Writing may not be possible depend ing on the media on which the Wave files are saved Data transfer to from a computer Media mode Data from CompactFlash media inserted in the TRI TON Extreme s CF card slot can be saved to the com puter or data from the computer can be loaded to the CompactFlash media Convert to IS09660 Format Media mode UDF format CD R media can be converted to I509660 format 2S If you have any questions regarding the media that can be used please contact your local Korg distribu tor You may also check the Korg website http www korg com downloads USB A HD USB A RM USB A CD R RW USB A CD R RW Hard Disk Removable Media Packet Write ISO9660 i owe mearan e J e ueso e J e Gomene s0960 Foma J o o possible X not possible not applicable A partial support 1 Writing may not be possible for some media 2 Only loading is possible USB A CD DA audio CD can be ripped in Sampling mode 137 138 Specifications and options Specifications HI Hyper Integrated synthesis system Tone generator Polyphony 60 voices 60 oscillators Maximum 120 voices 120 oscillators in single mode p 12 30 voices 60 oscillators Maximum 60 voices 120 oscillators in double mode p 12
125. Playback will end and you will return to the recording start location that you specified in step 4 If Loop All Tracks is selected normal playback will be looped as well Mult multitrack recording Multitrack recording allows you to simultaneously record onto multiple tracks each with a different chan nel This method can be used with overwrite overdub manual punch in and auto punch in recording Using the arpeggiator to record multiple tracks simultaneously A multi track performance using the arpeggiator function can be recorded using multi recording When simultaneously recording multiple tracks using the RPPR function You can use multitrack recording to simultaneously record the playback of multiple tracks that are being trig gered by the RPPR function For the procedure refer to Realtime recording an RPPR performance p 56 When simultaneously recording multiple tracks of MIDI data from an external sequencer 1 Make sure that the TRITON Extreme s MIDI IN and the external sequencer s MIDI OUT are connected by a MIDI cable If they are not connected turn off the power make the connection and then turn the power back on again PG p 288 2 Set the MIDI Clock Global P1 MIDI page MIDI Clock to External MIDI so that TRITON Extreme will synchronize to the MIDI clock of the external sequencer Make sure that Receive Ext Realtime Commands is checked GLOBAL P1 MIDI MIDI Se
126. Press a BANK A IN key to switch banks By switching banks you can access programs in differ ent banks The key will light and the selected bank will appear in the left side of the LCD screen For example to select bank B press the BANK B key The B key will light and an indication of Bank B will appear in the upper left of the LCD screen MA The F key is only available if the EXB MOSS option is installed A Each time the G key is pressed it will advance to the next GM bank in the following order G 1 gt g 2 gt g 3 gt g 4 gt 6 gt 8 6 gt 8 7 gt 8 8 gt g 9 gt g d gt G The LED will light and an indi cation of Bank G g 1 g 9 or g d will appear in the upper left of the LCD screen Selecting by bank You can select programs from a list organized by program bank 4 Press the Program Select popup button A tabbed Bank Program Select popup menu will appear Bank Program Select G10 Glockenspiel 6011 Music Box GO 2 Vibraphone GO 3 Marimba bl 4 Xylophone In the illustration above bank G is selected The center area shows the programs contained in that bank WA The Variation button will be displayed only when bank G is selected Each time you press this button the bank will change in the following order G e 1 gt 2 2 g 8 gt g8 9 3G 2 Press the tabs located to the left and right sides of the display to select a bank 3 Press one of the
127. RW drive are connected to the AUDIO INPUT jacks If your drive does not have output jacks you won t be able to monitor the sound p 64 L_ Is the CD output being correctly input If you want to listen to the audio CD playback in the Media mode Play Audio CD page set Input COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY MEDIA to Analog and make the appropriate settings for Level and BUS IFX Indiv Select If you want to listen to the audio CD playback in Sampling mode make these settings in Input SAMPLING p 64 Is the Volume slider raised Media mode Play Audio CD page Sampling P5 Audio CD Ripping page PG p 139 197 C Has the CD been finalized A CD R RW disc that you wrote using the Media mode Make Audio CD page cannot be played in the Media mode Play Audio CD page or in Sampling mode unless you have finalized the disc Execute the page menu command Finalize Audio CD to finalize the disc PG p 197 Excessive noise or distortion in the audio input or in the sampled sound If you are inputting to the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks are the AUDIO INPUT LEVEL knob and Recording Level setting appropriate If Recording Level indicates ADC OVERLOAD adjust the LEVEL knob If CLIP is displayed adjust the Recording Level slider Adjusting the Recording Level will not affect the level of the out put sound but will affect the level that is samp
128. Save button once again to access the Save Samples amp MS dialog box Turn Program and Seq Event On checked Program E102 Pattern On Song 001 Pattern U00 Meter 4 4 RPPR On checked Key C 2 Track 01 Save Samples amp MS Beat 864 Source BPM 126 _ nTime Stretch Ratio 100 00 New BPM 126_ h Program gt 102 Initial ProglE102 YJ Seq Event Track Pattern Song EER Pattern UBG Meter 4 4 VJRPPR Key C 2 Track 01 Press the Save button to save the data You will return to the dialog box of step 7 Press the Exit button to return to the screen of step Press the SEQ key to enter Sequencer mode and select 000 for Song Select SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 68 aa 601 61 660 Meter 474 J 240 gt Manu S000 NEW SONG LP teeta TRACK 1 Reso Dl a Ch a ssossssnososososo T ar econcccesscceseceedvecsrecosececsccconieovececseceoracece E18 7 D aoe H Placed Di Db basa Dawes ote Ly or ie ee Pe Peet a The following song data has been set created automat ically as you specified in step e P0 Play REC page Song 000 Meter 4 4 Tempo 120 e P0 Play REC Program T01 08 page Track01 Program E101 e P5 Track Edit Track Edit page Track01 track data 8 measures D2 Event Edit Track 41 Measure iag Index HAHAH Meter 4 4 BT G1 000 PROG Bank E P 181 BT 01 000 D2 V 127 L 900 094 BT 41 894 aaa 127 L 666 897 BT G1 191 E2
129. Second to the correct year month day hour minute and second 3 Press the OK button amp If the calendar backup battery runs low a message of Battery voltage for calendar IC will appear in the LCD screen If the calendar backup battery runs down completely the calendar will be initialized and the date and time will not be recorded correctly R You can replace the calendar backup battery by your self Refer to PG p 324 for details Saving data from CF card slot media to your computer You can use your computer to access media inserted in the CF card slot and save the data to your computer s hard disk or copy Wave files or other data from your com puter s hard disk to the media in the CF card slot Execute the Utility page menu command USB Storage Mode 5 For details on the procedure and on the requirements for your computer refer to PG p 193 325 Loading data Media Load The types of data that can be loaded from media are shown in the diagram below For details on each type of data refer to PG p 177 The Media mode Load page lets you load data from media ZS Refer to p 137 for details on the types of media from which you can load media Loading data Loading PCG SNG and KSC files As an example here we will explain how to load a song We ll assume that this song uses edited programs and pro grams that use multisamples you sampled In such cases it is best to load all
130. Sequencer mode and record the perfor mance of a combination make sure that the ARPEG GIATOR ON OFF key is turned on for the combination when you write it in Combination mode Then execute the Copy From Combi p 58 RPPR does not start L Is the Sequencer PO Play REC RPPR setting checked p 56 Are Assign Pattern Select and Track set correctly 1 p 55 PG p 91 L If the MIDI Clock Global P1 MIDI parameter set to Internal PG p 162 Can t record exclusive data C Is Enable Exclusive Global P1 MIDI checked p 46 In Song Play mode a GM GS XG compatible SMF is not played correctly _ Execute GM Initialize to initialize the settings PG p 144 Is Bank Map set to GM 2 PG p 158 Is Status set to INT PG p 146 Sampling Can t sample Is sample memory RAM installed p 18 If you are sampling to media have you selected media to which sampling is possible p 137 PG p 7 112 Are the audio input settings correct Refer to Audio input and output Can t input sound p 131 Is there free space in memory 1 PG p 117 203 If you are sampling to sample memory RAM select a different memory bank PG p 6 41 64 106 If you are sampling to hard disk select a different hard disk PG p 7 41 64 112 Delete unneeded samples PG p 108 Save samples you want to keep and then dele
131. T MAIN L MONO R INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 and 4 jacks to the INPUT jacks of your mixer or powered monitor system L MONO and R are the main outputs If you are out putting in stereo make your connections using the MAIN L MONO jack and the R jack If you are out putting in mono make your connection to the MAIN L MONO jack The INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 and 4 jacks are used to out put specific sounds independently For example you can use these to apply an external effect to the snare sound of a drum kit When you are sampling and want to hear the sounds played by the TRITON Extreme s sequencer while you sample only the external audio source send the source to INDIVIDUAL 1 and 2 If you want to monitor this sound you can connect INDIVIDUAL 1 and 2 jacks to your mixer and monitor the sound via your mixer Headphones If you are using headphones connect them to the headphone jack of the TRITON Extreme The TRITON Extreme s headphone jack will output the same signal as MAIN L MONO and R RO If you are using INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 and 4 connect these jacks to your mixer and use the headphone jack of your mixer to monitor the sound 3 Analog audio input connections You can input external analog audio sources and sample them or process them with the internal effects and output them from the OUTPUT jacks Connect mics or the OUTPUT jacks of your external audio equipment to the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks 4
132. TRITON Re Fxtreme w MUSIC WORKSTATION SAMPLER Operation Guide HEE HYPER INTEGRATED SYNTHESIS SYSTEM TouchView Graphical User Interface VALVE O FORCE ji C lt 2 Thank you for purchasing the Korg TRITON Extreme music workstation sampler To ensure trouble free enjoyment please read this manual carefully and use the instrument as directed About this manual The owner s manuals and how to use them The TRITON Extreme come with the following owner s manuals e Quick Start e Operation Guide e Parameter Guide e Voice Name List Quick Start Read this manual first This is an introductory guide that will get you started using the TRITON Extreme It explains how to play back the demo songs select sounds use convenient performance functions and perform simple editing It also gives examples of using sampling and the sequencer Operation Guide This manual describes each part of the TRITON Extreme and what it does how to make connections basic operation and a summary of each mode It also explains for each mode the basics of editing your sounds recording on the sequencer and sampling The arpeggiator effects and MIDI are also explained This manual also contains other information such as a troubleshooting guide and specifications Parameter Guide The Parameter Guide contains explanations and other information regarding the operations of the parame ters and settings on the TRITON Ex
133. Tone Mode Set this to Fixed Note This will cause the tone to always sound at the specified pitch Fixed Note Mode If you set this to Trigger All Tones playing a single note on the keyboard will sound all tones If you set this to Trigger As Played the tones will be sounded according to the notes you play on the key board PG p 171 GLOBAL P6 User Arpeggio Pattern Setup A Sort Key Sync U Latch O Keyboard 4 Make settings for Tone No and Fixed Note No Select Tone No and set Fixed Note No to the note number that will be sounded by that tone For each horizontal line Tone in the screen you will spec ify the drumsample note number of the drum kit Each Tone will be displayed as a small circle For this example set Tone No and Fixed Note No as follows Fixed Note No w few Fa oar F 3 closed hi hat The drumsamples that correspond to each note num ber will differ depending on the drum kit It is conve nient to audition the drum sounds from the keyboard and then input Fixed Note No by holding down the ENTER key and playing the desired key 6 Input the kick Tone00 Set Step No to 01 and press the 0 key Then set Step No to 05 and press the 0 key 6 Input the snare Tone01 Set Step No to 03 and press the 1 key Then set Step No to 07 and press the 1 key D Input the close
134. added to a song you created WA In this example we will send the external audio input source to INDIVIDUAL 1 so if you want to monitor the sound being sampled connect AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO R and INDIVIDUAL 1 to your mixer and use headphones etc to monitor the output of the mixer Q In Sequencer mode select the song to which you want to add the guitar sound You can either create a song or use Media mode to load a previously created song 2 Connect your guitar to the rear panel AUDIO INPUT 1 jack Set the AUDIO INPUT MIC LINE switch to the LINE position and set the LEVEL knob near the center position amp If you connect a passive type guitar without an internal preamp the impedance mismatch will make it difficult to sample at an appropriate level This type of guitar should be sent through a preamp or effect processor Access the Sequencer P0 Play REC Sampling page 4 Press the page menu button and choose Auto Sam pling Setup from the menu The dialog box will appear 6 Choose In Track Sampling Auto Sampling Setup O Initialize O 2ch Mix to Media C Resample SEQ Play In Track Sampling Source Audio gt Analog gt Stereo To P Tracka9 TRACK a9 Program A E 6 Make the following settings for In Track Sam pling Set Source Audio to Analog The external audio input source the analog audio output of an instrument or other device connected to
135. aded from Media into TRITON Extreme s sequencer e Song data saved in TRITON Extreme s own format This data is only for this instrument However it is partially compatible with the TRITON STUDIO TRITON Rack and TRITON TRITONpro TRITONproxX PG p 309 Since the performance will be faithfully reproduced including detailed settings of this instrument you should use this format to save song data that is intended for playback on this instrument e Standard MIDI Files This format is not able to provide a totally faithful reproduction of the performance on TRITON Extreme in the way that TRITON Extreme s own format does although there will be no problem for normal play back but does provide compatibility with other SMF compatible devices To load or save song data etc use Media mode p 117 121 PG p 181 189 e Data including exclusive events Exclusive messages including XG or GS data received from an external MIDI device and parameter changes produced by editing track parameters 1 PG p 101 can now be recorded in realtime on the desired track You can also use the page menu command Put Effect Set ting to Track to place insert effect or master effect parameter settings as exclusive events in the desired location of a track amp Recorded GM XG or GS exclusive messages do not affect the TRITON Extreme when they are played back Since the recorded data is embedded in the song data as exclusive events it
136. age will be used amp This value will be in effect when the ARPEGGIATOR GATE knob is in the center position 12 o clock Be sure that the knob is in the center position when you make this setting Velocity Specifies the velocity of the notes in the arpeggio If this is set to Key the velocity with which you actually played each note will be used If a user arpeggio pattern is selected you can set this to Step In this case the value of the Vel setting for each step Global P6 User Arpeggio Pattern Edit page will be used amp This value will be in effect when the ARPEGGIATOR VELOCITY knob is in the center position 12 o clock Be sure that the knob is in the center position when you make this setting RA When a preload user arpeggio pattern is selected set ting the Gate or Velocity to Step will add a sense of groove to the arpeggio pattern Swing This adjusts the timing of the even num bered notes in the arpeggio counting from the first note to give the pattern a sense of swing Sort If this is checked the arpeggio will be sounded in order of pitch regardless of the order in which notes were played on keyboard On If this is unchecked the arpeggio will be sounded in the order in which the notes were played on keyboard Off Sort OFF UP Sort ON UP asf TT Latch If this is checked the arpeggio will continue
137. ain how synchronization occurs when the Key Sync check box is unchecked However synchronization with Song Start and with the MIDI realtime command Start message are exceptions to this Synchronization between arpeggiators A and B In Combination Sequencer and Song Play modes two arpeggiators can operate simultaneously In this case if you start an arpeggiator whose Key Sync is unchecked while the other arpeggiator is already run ning the arpeggiator you started will synchronize to the Tempo based on the timing of the already running arpeggiator RA If Key Sync is checked A and B will each operate on their own timing Synchronization between the arpeggiators and sequencer in Sequencer or Song Play mode When song playback is stopped e The arpeggiator will synchronize to the J Tempo based on the timing of the internal MIDI clock e In Sequencer mode when an RPPR pattern is playing the arpeggiator will synchronize to the beats of that pattern e In Sequencer mode if you want RPPR pattern playback to be synchronized to the currently running arpeggiator set Sync to SEQ Sequencer P6 Pattern RPPR RPPR Setup page The pattern playback will synchronize to the J Tempo timing of the arpeggiator When a song is being played or recorded e The arpeggiator will synchronize to the beats based on the timing of the song Synchronization with Song Start e When the arpeggiato
138. ally as you specified in step e P0 Play REC page Song 001 Meter 4 4 Tempo 120 RPPR On e P0 Play REC Program T01 08 page Track01 Program E102 e P6 Pattern RPPR RPPR Setup page Key C 2 Assign On Pattern User U00 Track Track01 Pattern data 1 measure D2 SEQUENCER P6 Pattern RPPR RPPR Setup EEk gt EEE SET J 126 P Track 1 TRACK ot KEY C 2 Assign Mode J gt Manual C 1 to C2 Shutdown Keys Sync P Beat Pattern P User P UGG PATTERN og Track ai TRACK 1 Shift 00 Event Edit Pattern UGG Measure ulug Index HAHAH Meter 4 4 BT G1 000 PROG Bank E P 102 BT 41 666 D2 W 127 L 000 094 BT 601 094 D 2 v 127 L 666 897 M 001 004 BT 61 191 E2 v 127 L 666 694 M 001 005 BT 02 093 F2 V 127 L 000 098 M 001 6 BT 02 191 F 2 V 127 L 000 094 In the P6 Pattern RPPR Pattern Edit page press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to start playback of pattern U00 When you press the C 2 key in the P6 Pattern RPPR RPPR Setup page the RPPR function will start playing pattern U00 In the same way as in step 8 changing the playback tempo will not affect the pitch Sampling in Program Combina ton or Sequencer modes External audio sources can be sampled from the various input jacks in Program Combination and Sequencer modes as well A performance in the above modes can also be internally resampled in digital form You can resample a perfor mance th
139. ame of a stereo sam ple the two characters L and R at the end are fixed When you assign a name to either the L or R channel the other sample will be named automatically Press the MENU key to access the page jump menu and press P2 Loop Edit The P2 Loop Edit page will appear Make settings to delete the unwanted portions at the beginning and end of the sample to ensure a natural sounding loop tran sition 75 SAMPLING P2 Loop Edit Start agag000 Loop _ Rev LJ 1206 LoopS 86880066 _ Loop Lock Loop Tune 00 e le 200M o End 0120135 _ use Zero sitet ilgi 5 Notice that 0000 LOOP1 140BPM L is selected for Sample Sample Select and that the sample wave form data is displayed The selected sample is a stereo sample The Land R waveforms will be shown in the upper and lower parts of the sample waveform display Use Start to set the start address LoopS Loop Start to set the loop start address and End to set the end address The sample will sound as follows When looping is on S gt E gt LoopS gt E gt continue repeating LoopS gt E When looping is off S gt E Select Start highlighted and use the VALUE dial etc to specify the location at which the sample will begin sounding The vertical line in the display will move accordingly WA If necessary you can press the ZOOM buttons to expand or shrink the waveform display Zoom will expand
140. and write UDF format CD R RW record and play CD DA load ISO9660 level 1 data sup ported Combination Program Sequencer Sampling Song Play Global Media Controllers Joystick ribbon controller SW1 SW2 keys REALTIME CONTROLS knobs 1 4 and A B VALVE FORCE mode key VALVE FORCE ON OFF key VALUE slider ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO GATE VELOCITY knobs and ON OFF key User interface TouchView graphical user interface 320 x 240 pixel LCD display VOLUME slider Mode keys COMBI PROG SEQ SAMPLING S PLAY GLOBAL MEDIA Value controllers VALUE slider VALUE dial A V keys numeric keys 0 9 10 s HOLD ENTER MENU key EXIT key COMPARE key A B C D E F G H J K L M N PAUSE REW FF LOCATE REC WRITE START STOP REC START STOP Audio outputs AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO R Output impedance 1 1 kQ L MONO is 550 Q for mono AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 4 Maximum output level 13 5 dBu or greater Load impedance 100 kQ or greater AUDIO OUTPUT HEADPHONE Output impedance 33 Q Maximum output level 22 mW Load impedance 33 Q S P DIF Connector optical Format 24 bit S P DIF IEC60958 EIAJ CP 1201 Sample rate 48 kHz Audio inputs AUDIO INPUT 1 2 Input impedance 10 kQ LEVEL MIC LINE switch LEVEL knob Nominal level LINE 4 dBu LEVEL knob min 30 dBu LEVEL kn
141. ange Keys outside of this range can be played in the normal manner and will not be affected by the arpeggiator on off WA For example if you set Pattern to P000 UP check Latch set Top Key to B3 and Bottom Key to C 1 playing a note B3 or lower will trigger the arpeg giator Since Latch is on the arpeggio will continue even after you release the keys You can use the C4 and higher keys to play conventionally along with the arpeggio sounded by the B3 and lower keys To change the arpeggio play keys in the range of B3 and below Bottom Velocity Top Velocity The arpeggiator will operate when you play notes with a velocity play ing strength that is within the specified range Notes played with a velocity outside this range will be sounded normally without regard to the arpeggiator on off 6 If you wish to save the edited program settings to internal memory turn off memory protect in Global mode and write the program p 115 116 Linking the arpeggiator to a program If you want the arpeggiator settings written in a program to be selected when that program is selected check Pro gram for Auto Arpeggiator Global P0 Basic Setup Basic page 95 96 Arpeggiator settings in Combination and Sequencer modes In Combination Sequencer and Song Play modes the TRITON Extreme provides dual arpeggiator functionality that lets you use two arpeggio patterns simultaneousl
142. ange of chords or phrases This can be used to play a variety of drum phrases using the Fixed Note Mode that is ideal for drums bass phrases or guitar and keyboard backing riffs The arpeggiator is also effective for use with subtly moving pads synth sounds or sound effects e In Combination mode Sequencer mode and Song Play mode the TRITON Extreme provides dual arpeggiators that can simultaneously play two arpeggio patterns You can apply separate arpeggio patterns to drum and bass programs or use keyboard splits or velocity to switch between arpeggio patterns for an even more dynamic performance RPPR e The TRITON Extreme features Korg s RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording function In Sequencer mode this function allows you to assign preset patterns or user patterns with a specified play back track to individual notes of the keyboard and playback that pattern in realtime simply by pressing the assigned note Numerous preset patterns includ ing patterns ideal for drum tracks are built into the internal memory 4 channel audio input 6 channel audio output e Both analog 2 channel and digital 2 channel audio inputs are standard allowing you to record stereo samples The analog inputs have a MIC LINE level select switch and a level knob accommodating a wide range of audio sources from mic level to line level The built in digital input supports 48 kHz S P DIF for mat digital audio The audio in
143. annot be created on a disc that con tains data other than audio e g files In this case it will not be possible to select the page menu com 6 An audio CD to which audio tracks have been writ mands Write to CD or Finalize Audio CD ten and which has been finalized can be played in the note Even when the recommended CD R RW media is Pay pute CD page aliowme yoti Near MeCD used some audio CD players may be unable to play youve crate back the disc Also since some audio CD players are a PE aA e E R unable to play back CD RW media we recommend CD page that you use CD R media Play Audio CD 4 Select the page menu command Write to CD to Media DE access the dialog box and specify how the CD will be Track p e1 03 00 0 T written Index a1 01 00 90 Sequencer START plays selected track Input Analog COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY MEDIA Input Level 127 BUSCIFX Indiv Select p Off Pan LOG Send1 MFX1 00 Send2 MFX2 00A Input2 Level 127_ BUSCIFX Indiv Select Off Pan R127 Send1 MFX1 800 Send2 MFX2 000 b Audiol D Audiol OD Srg Info J Write to CD Speed gt E Mode P write Execute finalize too Use Speed to set the writing speed This will indicate the speeds supported by the CD R RW drive you are using In this example set Speed to 1x In Drive select your CD R RW drive Drive will indicate Audio CD Make the
144. arious styles of music Assign a program to each MIDI track In the Sequencer PO Play REC Program T01 08 T09 16 page use Program Select to assign a program to each MIDI track At this time you can press the Category popup and select programs by category You can copy settings from a combination or program p 58 WA When assigning a program you can use Track Select to select the track for which you are making assignments and try playing the sound SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 68 aa 001 01 000 Meter 44 J a98 ph Manu 35000 NEW SONG Pb Track 1 Drums pe Revboak Raard JA Bank Program aa oe D kaos D oos Baa Ba Buses S Song Select Track Select Reso a Hi m RPPR ce Fingertip Rez Dow Dynamic iPower Cile Pox Mixer fear ica Facer pemn me ehs i g 9 16 1 3 3 16 16 rence 2 Set the pan and volume of each MIDI track In the Sequencer PO Play REC Mixer T01 08 T09 16 page Pan sets the pan of each track and Volume sets the volume of each track SEQUENCER P Play REC 001 01 000 Meter 474 15000 NEW SONG P Tracka Drums Mixer 161 63 EEk J 698 gt Manu Reso P Hi O RPPR aaa ey D Bass Keyboars gt JENDEA rence 3 Specify the tone generator and MIDI channel that will be played by each MIDI track In the Sequencer P2 Trk Param MIDI Ch T01 08 T09 16 page Status specifies whether each track will sound
145. at uses the TRITON Extreme s full range of fea tures filters effects arpeggiator and sequencer You can also sample the TRITON Extreme s performance together with audio from an external input source or monitor the performance of the TRITON Extreme s arpeg giator and sequencer etc while you sample only the exter nal audio from the input jacks In Sequencer mode you can sample external audio while listening to a song play back and automatically create note data in the track that will play the sample when the track is played back This allows you to sample vocals or guitar while the sequencer runs just as though you were using a multitrack recorder This function is called In Track Sampling t For examples of sampling in Program and Combina tion modes refer to QS p 22 The sampling procedure in Combination mode is the same as in Program mode Sample an arpeggiated drum phrase together with an externally input guitar Here s how you can resample an arpeggiated perfor mance together with an external audio input source In this example we will explain how a guitar connected to the AUDIO INPUT jack can be played along to a drum pattern played by the TRITON Extreme and how both can be sampled together WA Sampling can be performed in a similar way in Com bination and Sequencer modes as well as in Program mode R In this example we will send the external audio input source to INDIVIDUAL 1 so if you want
146. ata A dialog box will appear Load Preload Demo Data Kind gt All Preload PCG 3 In the Kind field select All Preload PCG note If you execute All Preload PCG and Demo Song the following data will be loaded If you execute All Pre load PCG the Demo Song data will not be loaded 4 Press the OK button to execute the load operation If you decide not to execute press the Cancel button When you press the OK button a dialog box will ask you for confirmation Press the OK button to execute loading RJ From the powered off state you can automatically perform the All Preload PCG and Demo Data operation by turning on the power while holding down the MENU key and EXIT key A message of Now writing internal memory will appear while the data is being loaded If the EXB MOSS is not installed Preload data will be loaded into the following banks Program Bank A B C D H L J K L M N 000 63 Combination Bank A B C D H I J K L M Drum Kit 000 A B 045 1 128 User 131 User Arpeggio Pattern U000 A B U488 User Global Setting Demo Song S000 S002 If the EXB MOSS is installed Preload data will be loaded into the following banks Program Bank A B C D F H L J K L M N 000 63 Combination Bank A B C D E H I J K L M Drum Kit 000 A B 045 1 128 User 131 User Arpeggio Pattern U000 A B U488 User Global Setting D
147. ate mode Press one of the front panel mode keys COMBI key MEDIA key to enter the corresponding mode COMBI key Combination mode PROG key Program mode SEQ key Sequencer mode SAMPLING key Sampling mode S PLAY key Song Play mode GLOBAL key Global mode MEDIA key Media mode 2 Selecting pages Each mode has a large number of parameters which are organized into pages These are further subdivided by tabs into up to eight tab pages 1 Make sure that the desired mode is selected To select a mode press the appropriate mode key COMBI key MEDIA key Here we will use Program mode as an example for our explanation Press the PROG key PROGRAM P Play Performance Edit EER A Category Bank A Dj000 BD Grand Concert HIFX1008 St Graphic TEQ Knob1B Cutoff IFX2 090 PianoBodyDamper Knob2B KMod2 i cIFX3 Knob3B KMod3 iMFX1G16 Stereo Chorus IFXd GBG No Effect _KnobdB KModd MFX2 O52 Reverb Hall 2 IFX5 GOG No Effect iSW1 Octave Down iSW2 Octave Up Performance Editor Octave Pha Attack Decay tretch Balance bens Time Time Race Balance wo oo i 2 Press the MENU key EXIT MENU The page jump menu will appear PROGRAM Jump PB Play P1 P2 P3 Edit Basic Edit Pitch Edit Filter P 4 P5 Edit Amp Edit Common LFO P P8 Po Edit Arpeggiator Edit Insert Effect Edit Master Effect WA In Media mode there is only one page so the page jump menu w
148. ately p 64 _ If you are inputting the external source into the S P DIF IN jack is System Clock set to S P DIF PG p 158 _ Is an unsupported format being input from the S P DIF IN jack Please connect an instrument or digital audio device that is compatible with CP 1201 or S P DIF Is the correct sampling frequency being input from the S P DIF IN jack Sampling frequencies of 48 kHz can be input If you input an unsupported sampling frequency noise will occur or a message of S P DIF Clock Error will be displayed amp If System Clock is set to S P DIF and you want to switch the sampling frequency being input to the S P DIF IN jack from 96 kHz to 48 kHz or from 48 kHz to 96 kHz you must first make sure that the TRITON Extreme is not accessing data You must also avoid touching the TRITON Extreme Be especially careful not to switch the sampling frequency being input to the S P DIF IN jack while the TRITON Extreme is accessing data i e while sampling or while load ing saving media sample memory or internal mem ory You must also avoid switching the S P DIF IN jack input during such times _ Digital audio input is sometimes not heard for two or three seconds Can t hear an audio CD in a USB CD R RW drive connected to AUDIO INPUT _ Make sure that you have selected the Media mode Play Audio CD page or Sampling mode _ Make sure that the audio outputs of your USB CD R
149. atically applies the settings of the cur rent program to a song If inspiration for a phrase or song strikes you while you re playing a program or combination you can use this func tion to start recording immediately Hold down the ENTER key and press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key The Setup to Record dialog box will open and ask Are you sure Press OK You will auto matically enter Sequencer mode and will be in the record ready state Press the START STOP key to start the sequencer and begin recording Playing and editing combinations Combination Mode Combination structure When the TRITON Extreme is shipped from the factory it contains 1 280 combinations You can create your own original combinations by editing these factory set combi nations or by initializing a combination and starting from scratch You can play a combination and resample your perfor mance or sample an external audio source while listening to the sound of a combination Each of the rewritable banks A E and H N contain 128 combinations total 1 536 When shipped banks A D and H M contain preloaded combinations Combination banks Bank Gombi No Explanation A D H M 000 127 Preloaded combinations E 000 127 User initial combinations EXB MOSS combinations 000 127 User initial combinations t For details on the factory set combinations refer to VNL PO Play is where you select an
150. attern to copy the user drum kit or user arpeggio pattern to an unused num ber 93 94 Arpeggiator settings P7 Edit Arpeggiator This chapter describes the procedure for making arpeg giator settings in each mode Arpeggiator settings for a program Arpeggiator on off Pressing the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key will turn the arpeggiator on or off When on the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key will light When you play the keyboard an arpeggio will play according to the selected arpeggio pat tern WA The on off setting is stored when the program is written Arpeggiator settings 4 Select the Program P7 Edit Arpeggiator Arpeg Setup page PROGRAM P Edit Arpeggiator Arpeg Setup EEE A Arpeggiator Tempo J 12 Arpeggiator Setup Pattern gt GREER Octave O Key Sync O Latch LJ Keyboard 000 Use J Tempo to set the tempo You can adjust the tempo by rotating ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO knob The LED will blink at the specified tempo M If MIDI Clock Global P1 MIDI is set to External MIDI or External USB the display will indicate J EXT This setting lets you synchronize the tempo with an external MIDI device In this case it will not be possible to change the tempo on the TRITON Extreme 3 In Pattern select the arpeggio pattern You can select from preset arpeggio patterns P000 P004 and user arpeggio patterns U000 A B U506 User The way in which the pattern is pl
151. ayed will depend on settings such as Octave and Sort P000 P004 in the following diagrams show how the arpeggio will be played when Octave is set to 1 and Sort is checked P004 RANDOM is only one possibility P000 UP P001 DOWN DOWN lt P002 ALT1 P003 ALT2 GAs P004 RANDOM wool FT lee U000 A B U199 A B With the factory settings various arpeggio patterns are preloaded These include a variety of patterns such as drum or bass phrases or guitar or keyboard backing riffs VNL U200 H U506 User When the TRITON Extreme is shipped from the factory arpeggio patterns are preloaded in some of these memo ries VNL 4 Adjust the settings of the various parameters Octave Selects the octave range in which the arpeg gio will be played Octave 4 UP amp If a user arpeggio pattern is selected the Octave Motion setting Global P6 Arpeggio Pattern Setup page will affect the way in which the arpeggio is played Resolution Specifies the timing value of the arpeg gio notes over a range of A d Gate Specifies the length gate time of each note in the arpeggio If a user arpeggio pattern is selected you can set this to Step In this case the value of the Gate setting for each step Global P6 User Arpeggio Pattern Edit p
152. being accessed If you turn off the power while media is being accessed the media may become unusable WA You can set the Power On Mode Global P0 System Preference page so that the mode and page that had been selected when you turned the power off will appear when the power is turned on p 90 Information displayed in the LCD screen when vari ous options or SIMM modules are installed The TRITON Extreme allows you to install separately sold options or sample memory RAM boards When the power is turned on the type of installed options will be displayed After installing an option be sure to check this display to verify that the option was installed correctly If the option is not displayed here even though it was installed it was not installed correctly Turn off the power and re install the option For details on install ing an option refer to PG p 319 OPTIONS EXB MOSS SIMM Slot1 16HMB Slot 327MB Slots OPTIONS EXB MOSS The EXB MOSS option is installed SIMM Slot 1 3 MB Sample memory RAM s are installed in SIMM slots 1 2 The capacity of each SIMM is shown in parentheses When shipped from the factory a 16 MB SIMM is installed in SIMM slot 1 Playing and editing programs Program Mode CCOCCCCOCCCOCCCOCCCCECECECSCEEEEES SO Program mode page structure Program structure PO Play Select programs use the Performance Editor to per When the TRITON Extreme is shipped f
153. by the EG or Keyboard Track settings Frequency MIDI Tempo Sync If MIDI Tempo Sync is checked the Frequency set ting will be ignored and the LFO will synchronize to the tempo of the sequencer and arpeggiator This lets you pro duce vibrato wah auto pan or tremolo effects that remain synchronized to the playback speed of the sequencer or arpeggiator even if you adjust this playback speed 29 30 Arpeggiator settings P7 Edit Arpeggiator Here you can make arpeggiator settings p 94 Insert Effect settings P8 Edit Insert Effect Here you can select insert effects and make settings for them You can also specify the oscillator routing the sig nal sent to the insert effects master effects and indepen dent outputs p 104 Master Effect and Valve Force settings P9 Edit Master Effect Here you can select master effects and make settings for them The master EQ is also set here p 105 109 More about Alternate Modulation Alternate Modulation is a type of modulation that can be used to control various aspects of the sound AMS Alternate Modulation Source refers to any of the numerous sources that can provide alternate modulation and includes controllers that you operate physically such as the joystick and realtime controllers incoming MIDI data as well as modulators such as the EG or LFO Since TRITON Extreme allows you to apply modulation to a modulator this type of control is r
154. can be saved or loaded to from media in the same way as before Exclusive messages can also be saved and loaded as SMF Standard MIDI File data Load Standard MIDI File Save Song as Standard MIDI File This means that you can save recorded exclusive events as SMF data or convert exclusive messages from an SMF file into song data 59 60 The Compare function When you perform realtime recording step recording or track editing this function allows you to make before and after comparisons amp If you continue editing when the COMPARE key is lit the key will go dark This now becomes the musi cal data that will be selected when the COMPARE key is dark Any previous unsaved edits will be lost Operations for which Compare is available e Recording to a track e Track Edit All commands except for the Utility menu commands Memory Status and Rename Track of the Sequencer P5 Track Edit page e Recording to a pattern e Pattern Edit All commands except for the page menu commands Memory Status Rename Pattern FF REW Speed and Rename Track of the Pattern Sequencer P6 RPPR Pattern Edit page e Song Edit Sequencer P0 P4 and P7 P9 pages Page menu com mands Delete Song and Copy From Song Sequencer P1 Cue List page Page menu commands Convert to Song and Copy Song e After in track sampling The Compare operation will also apply to the multi
155. ccession such as when recording phrases or rhythm loops MS gt 003 NewMS 003 Index GRMN 024 no Mina dakki 4 Select Index Index can also be selected by holding down the ENTER key and playing a note on keyboard For this example select 001 6 Assign a sample to the Index If sample memory RAM already contains samples use Sample Select to select the sample and assign it If you want to record a new sample you can sample it now The sample you record will be automatically assigned to the index you selected in step The assigned sample will sound when you play the keyboard in the range of the index to which the sample is assigned 6 Repeat steps 4 and to assign a sample to each index note The number and order of the indexes in a multisam ple the range of each index and the original key position can be freely changed later if desired Mul tisample editing p 77 Creating multiple samples In the example procedure described above several indexes were created by pressing the Create button sev eral times and then samples were assigned to each Index As an alternative method it is also possible to create one index sample into it and then repeat these two steps C Press the Create button once to create an index 2 Record a sample The recorded sample will automatically be assigned to the index you created in step Q Repeat st
156. change the tempo while the delay is sounding noise may occur in the delay sound This is because the delay sound becomes discontinuous and is not a malfunction M For some effects you can synchronize the LFO fre quency to the tempo Set the effect parameters BPM MIDI Sync to On and BPM to MIDI For details refer to PG p 278 Valve Force settings Valve Force is an analog circuit that uses a 12AU7 ECC82 vacuum tube It uses a single vacuum tube to deliver ste reo in stereo out operation By generating the rich overtones and smooth distortion that are typical of vacuum tubes Valve Force produces natural depth and a fat driven tone Valve Force also includes a low frequency enhancing ultra boost circuit You can apply Valve Force to the final stage of a program combination song or sample playback to add rich over tones and smooth distortion or use insert effects and mas ter effects except for sample playback in conjunction with Valve Force to create your sound Valve Force settings for a program 4 Press the Valve Force ON OFF key to turn Valve Force on The key will light Placement 2 Access the Program P9 Edit Master Effect VALVE page 3 Use Placement to specify where you want to place the Valve Force circuit If you set Placement to Final the Valve Force circuit will be placed after conversion to an analog signal by the Main Output L R output DAC Digital Analog Con
157. ck at the same level at during resampling When you sample an external audio source you should normally set Recording Level to 0 0 dB The sample data will be recorded at the optimum level If you sample with Auto 12 dB On turned off at this time 12 dB Sampling mode Loop Edit page will be off and the sam ple will play back at the same level at which it was sam pled When the power is turned on Recording Level and Auto 12 dB On will default to the following settings Program Combination Sequencer modes Recording Level 12 0 dB Auto 12 dB On on Sampling mode Recording Level 0 0 dB Auto 12 dB On off These settings assume that you will mainly be resampling in Program Combination and Sequencer modes listed above and performing conventional sampling in Sam pling mode listed below Optimizing the sample memory RAM If RAM has been specified as the destination to which data will be written during sampling you can specify that sample memory RAM be automatically optimized after the data is written When optimization is performed unused areas that are occupying memory space will be reorganized to increase the available free space In the Global mode P0 Basic Setup Input Sampling page you can check Auto Optimize RAM so that RAM will auto matically be optimized when sampling ends In this case you will always be able to sample without any was
158. combination in Program PO Play and Combination P0 Play the program or combi nation data is called into the edit buffer When you modify the parameters in PO Play or in the Edit pages P1 P9 of Program mode or Combination mode the changes you make will affect the data in the edit buffer If you wish to save this modified data into internal mem ory you must perform the Write operation When you perform the Write operation the data in the edit buffer is written to the specified program number or combination number of the specified bank If you select another program or combination without writing the data of the newly selected program or combi nation will be called into the edit buffer and your changes will be lost amp When you press the COMPARE key in Program mode or Combination mode the data from memory i e the contents that were written into memory will be temporarily called into the edit buffer This allows you to compare the settings you are editing with the original un edited settings Editing applies to the data in the edit buffer Programs or combinations will play according to the data in the edit buffer lt Edit Edit Buffer When you select a program or combination its data is Write fos called from internal memory Internal Memory When you write the program or combination settings will be saved in internal memory into the edit buffer rogram rogram Combination Combination Bank A 0
159. connected to the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 or S P DIF IN jacks and sample the result You can also apply Valve Force to the samples assigned to a multisam ple and resample the result 4 Press the VALVE FORCE ON OFF key to turn Valve Force on The key will light Placement 2 Access the Sampling P9 VALVE FORCE page 3 Use Placement to specify the placement of the Valve Force circuit Refer to step 8 of p 109 In Out amp You can t use Valve Force on the L R output from S P DIF nor when resampling the L R output in the various modes 4 Specify the input output destination for Valve Force If Placement Final Valve Force will be placed at the final stage of the L R output Use this setting if you want to apply Valve Force to the sound of a multisample Set BUS IFX Select P8 Insert Effect Routing page to L R or IFX1 IFX5 If you use IFX1 IFX5 set the post IFX BUS Sel P8 Insert Effect Insert FX page to L R If Placement Insert Use 3 4 BUS If you want the external audio source from the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 or S P DIF IN jacks to be input to Valve Force set BUS IFX Indiv Select to 3 4 Tube 3 Tube or 4 Tube SAMPLING P Recording Input P Anatog SAMPLING Input 1 i Level 127 _ BUSCIFX Indiv Select gt Ex Pan Logg Input2 Level 127 BUSCIFX Indiv Select Off Pan R127 Recording Setup input Setup MA Source BUS L R
160. contains a versatile range of 1 280 preloaded combinations Sequencer A sophisticated 16 track MIDI sequencer is built in e The TRITON Extreme combines dual arpeggiators RPPR time slice in track sampling and many other functions giving you an integrated music production environment with even more potential than an external sequencer would provide MIDI exclusive message recording playback is also supported e The Cue List function lets you play up to 99 songs in the order you specify For example you could create separate songs for the intro melody A melody B and the break etc and easily try out different song structures using the same material You can also specify the number of times that each song will repeat Songs can also be played back consecutively in jukebox style e A completed song can be resampled as a Wave file and burned to a CD R RW drive sold separately connected to the USB A connector to create an original audio CD Sampling The TRITON Extreme features our Open Sampling Sys tem that allows sampling and resampling to be performed not only in Sampling mode but also in Program Combi nation or Sequencer modes 48 kHz 16 bit linear mono stereo sampling is supported e Sample memory RAM of 16 Mbytes is factory installed allowing approximately 2 minutes 54 seconds of mono sampling or approximately 1 minute 27 seconds of stereo sampling Sample memory can be expanded to a maximum of 96 Mbytes
161. create a richer sound by using Transpose to shift their pitch apart by an octave or by using Detune to create a slight difference in pitch between the two e Insplit type combinations you can use Transpose to shift the pitch in semitone units of the programs specified for each key zone e If you wish to change the playback pitch of a drum program use Detune If you change the Trans pose setting the relationship between notes and drum sounds will change 35 36 Adjusting the BPM of multisamples or samples cre ated in Sampling mode If a timbre s program uses multisamples or samples that you created in Sampling mode or loaded in Media mode at a specific BPM value you can use the page menu com mand Detune BPM Adjust to call up a new BPM value This changes the BPM by adjusting the playback pitch PG p 44 Other page COMBINATION P2 Edit Trk Param Bank E A InitialCombiEGa8 iT 1 LOGI T Grand Piano 1 E Other M yt 4 i Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar nei ms se eavecscocrecosesce saveveseaceseacese Delay ms Specifies the amount of time before the program assigned to each timbre will sound Specifies the time from when you play the keyboard until the program will sound If you select KeyOff for this parameter the timbre will sound when the note is released Use Program s Scale Scale Specifies the scale for each timbre If you ch
162. ct a key and use the VALUE controller to adjust the pitch The range of 99 raises or lowers the pitch approximately one semitone above or below the stan dard pitch ZS You can also select a key by holding down the ENTER key and playing the desired note on the keyboard ZS You can copy one of the preset scales and edit it to create an original scale Execute the page menu com mand Copy Scale 2 Press the SEQ key to enter Sequencer mode 3 After pressing the MENU key press the P2 Trk Param 4 Press the Other 1 8 tab or Other 9 16 tab to select the Sequencer P2 Trk Param Other page 6 If you wish the program assigned to a track to use the scale saved with that individual program check the Use Program s Scale check box for that track Tracks that are not checked will use the scale specified by Scale Type Song s Scale 6 Set Type Song s Scale to select the scale for the currently selected song 91 92 Drum kitsettings P5 Drum Kit W hatis a drum kit A drum kit assigns a different drum sample PCM wave form data for drum sounds to each note If you set a program s oscillator specified by Oscillator Mode to Drums the program will use a drum kit instead of a multisample The TRITON Extreme has 144 drum kit memory areas When shipped from the factory some of the 000 A B 045 I and 128 User 131 User areas contain preloaded drum kits s
163. d hi hat Tone02 Set Step No to 01 02 03 05 06 and 07 and press the 2 key for each Input the open hi hat Tone03 Set Step No to 04 and press the 3 key Then set Step No to 08 and press the 3 key If Fixed Note Mode is set to Trigger All Tones play ing a single note on the keyboard will cause the rhythm pattern to play If Fixed Note Mode is set to Trigger As Played play ing a single note on the keyboard will cause only the kick Tone00 to play Playing two notes on the keyboard will cause only the kick Tone00 and snare Tone01 to play In this way the number of keys that you play will be played by the same number of tones 9 Set the parameters for each step Use Velocity etc to add accents to the rhythm pat tern amp The Gate and Velocity settings you make here will be valid if the Gate and Velocity parameters Program P7 Edit Arpeggiator Arpeg Setup page of the program selected in Program mode are set to Step If these parameters have a setting other than Step the Gate and Velocity that were specified for each individual step will be ignored and the notes of the arpeggio will be sounded according to the set tings of the Program P7 Edit Arpeggiator Arpeg Setup page Check the settings of the program amp Set the Gate and Velocity by using the ARPEG GIATOR GATE and VELOCITY knobs to the cen
164. d play combinations Here you can also make changes to the contents of each timbre adjust the volume and pan and make simple adjustments to the arpeggiator settings In the P1 Edit Prog Mixer P9 Edit Master FX pages you can modify the sound by editing the various parameters of the combination you selected in P0 Play Combination structure and corresponding pages Timbret Timbre2 Tinbrea Timbre4 Insert Effect Master Effect Routing P8 1 Insert Effect Individual Outputs Timbres Combination mode page structure Select a combination select a program for each timbre set the status pan and level select and set the arpeggio pattern make set tings for sampling P1 Edit program Select a program for each timbre and set pan Mixer and level These are common to the parame ters in PO and can be edited from either page P2 Edit Trk Param Set various parameters for each timbre such as MIDI OSC Pitch etc P3 Edit MIDI Filter MIDI transmission reception filter settings for each timbre P4 Edit Zone Ctrl Key zone and velocity zone settings for each timbre Make controller settings If the sepa rately sold EXB MOSS option is installed set related parameters a P7 Edit Arpeggiator settings These are common to Arpeggiator the K in PO and can be edited from either page P8 Edit Insert FX Select insertion effects and make settings Specify the timbre routing send levels to the in
165. d to the USB A connector to the TRITON Extreme s AUDIO INPUT 1 2 You can use the TRITON Extreme s SEQUENCER START STOP key etc to control operations such as playback and stop on your CD ROM or CD R RW drive Use audio cables to connect the audio outputs of your CD ROM or CD R RW drive connected to the USB A connector to AUDIO INPUT 1 2 of the TRITON Extreme 2 Insert an audio CD 3 Access the Sampling mode P5 Audio CD Ripping page 4 Use Media media select to select the drive that contains the audio CD and use Track to select the track that you want to read Raise the Volume amp Some USB A connector CD ROM or CD R RW drives cannot be controlled in this way so this setting may not affect the volume SAMPLING P5 Audio CD Drive P CDD Audio CD Ripping aa Track 91 03 00 0 index 1 01 00 08 Sequencer START plays selected track Range Start Range End Duration In the P0 Recording Input Setup page make Input settings as follows Input Analog Inputl Level 127 Pan L000 BUS Select L R Input2 Level 127 Pan R127 BUS Select L R 6 Specify the recording method in Recording Setup Source BUS L R Trigger Sampling START SW Sampling will start when you press the SAMPLING START STOP key Resampling Manual D In REC Sampling Setup make settings for the sample that will be recorded
166. data amp When loading programs combinations songs user drum kits or user arpeggio patterns you must make sure that the Global mode memory protect setting is unchecked p 115 Files that can be loaded m DOS directory Undefined DOS file DOS files cai gt v 0 amp w 3 N PTU or TL a Fy ap g w fe a Ea E All combinations T D 5 x D gt mn aa E 1 combinatio N amp When you load a PCG file the data in the TRITON Extreme s internal memory will be overwritten by the data of the PCG file programs combinations drum kits user arpeggio patterns global settings If you want to keep the data that is currently in internal memory use Save All to save it before you proceed Make sure that the media is ready for you to load data Refer to p 117 Setting up media 2 Press the MEDIA key to enter Media mode 133K 21 07 2003 22 12 22 rm NEWFILE PCG ol NEWFILE SNG 33K AA TAKENOGB WAY ANE 867K 21 07 2003 22 19 40 FEH NEWFILEKSC 54 21 87 2003 22 32 26 Load Save Utility Make i Pua H Sebi i Audiol D J fesist A Werke 3 Press the Load tab to select the Load page 4 Press Media Select and select the media from which you want to load i ay E 1 combination z Q 3 Z ry ie All user arpeggio patterns pattern group A B H N User fif Global settings H
167. data The fixed intervals mentioned above are generally expressed as the sampling frequency 48 kHz kilohertz means that sampling is performed 48 000 times each sec ond and that the interval is 1 second 48 000 times approximately 0 00002083 seconds approximately 0 02083 mS millisecond The higher the sampling frequency is the closer to the original analog signal the waveform in memory will be Each level is read and converted into digital data The accuracy at this time is determined by the bit resolution This process converts an analog signal with infinite reso lution into a digital signal with finite resolution With 16 bit resolution each level is indicated in 65 536 steps the sixteenth power of two The greater the bit resolution is the closer to the original analog signal the waveform in memory will be 48 kHz 16 bit sampling is the same quality as in audio devices such as DAT A CD uses 44 1 kHz 16 bit sampling which is a slightly lower sampling frequency Samples and Multisamples Samples The data that is recorded sampled into internal memory or loaded from a file is referred to as a sample or sample file Samples consist of the actual waveform data and parameters that specify how the data will be played back such as Start Loop Start and End Address Samples can be used in multisamples and drum kits The TRITON Extreme can hold a maximum of 4 000 sam ples in its internal memory
168. ding When the song ends stop the external sequencer TRITON Extreme s sequencer will receive the MIDI Stop message transmitted by the external sequencer and will automatically stop recording You can also press the SEQUENCER START STOP key on TRI TON Extreme itself to stop recording Playback In the Global P1 MIDI page set MIDI Clock to Internal Set Tempo Mode to Auto When you press the SEQUENCER START STOP key playback will begin ZS If the correct sounds do not play immediately after playback is started you may be able to solve the problem by using the page menu command Event Edit Sequencer P5 Track Edit to edit the Program Change data Step recording This is a method of recording where you specify the note timing note length and velocity etc in the LCD screen and use the keyboard to input the pitches QS p 27 PG p 78 Only note on off data can be recorded with this method Event Edit and Create Control Data Note data is the only type of data that can be recorded in step recording However there are ways to record other types of data aside from the realtime mode You can use the Event Edit and Create Control Data functions Event Edit is intended as a way to edit previously recorded data but you can also use it to modify program numbers or insert control changes Create Control Data is a function that lets you create and insert controller data that changes smoothly betw
169. e Force set BUS Select IFX Indiv Out Assign to 3 4 Tube 3 Tube or 4 Tube PROGRAM P8 Edit Insert Effect Routing i aa IFXi 5t Graphic TEQ fon IFX2 Stereo Phaser On A Fx3 Reverb SmoothHall On OSC MFX Sends SLE Tarji ite iPM ED lel If you want to send the signal through an insert effect and then into Valve Force set BUS Select IFX Indiv Out Assign to the insert effect and set the post IFX BUS Sel to 3 4 Tube 3 Tube or 4 Tube PROGRAM P8 Edit Insert Effect Insert FX Ik Z aerate Dee l Sendi Send ee Se ay gee f gas e gari Jos ni aia ROR JD 53 Reverb SmoothHall 2 3 FX 1 2 3 d 5 The output from Valve Force is assigned by the Pro gram P9 Edit Master Effect VALVE page BUS Sel Send1 and Send2 settings Use BUS Sel to send the signal to the L R bus insert effect IFX1 5 bus or 1 2 bus Send1 and Send2 adjust the send levels to the master effects Adjusting the Valve Force settings 6 Adjust the Valve Force settings Select VALVE FORCE as the control function for the front panel REALTIME CONTROLS knobs or use the Program P9 Edit Master Effect VALVE page to adjust the settings Input Trim Ultra Boost adjusts the input level to Valve Force adjusts the mix level to the ultra boost circuit located at the beginning of Valve Force Tube Gain adjusts the vacuum tube gain Output Level adjusts the
170. e Low Multisample For this example set OSC1 in Velocity M Sample SW Lo Hi to 032 and OSC2 to 096 The settings are shown as vertical lines in the velocity zone display In this example the multisamples will sound over four levels Velocity values 001 031 sounds only the OSC1 Low multisample Velocity values 032 063 sounds only the OSC1 High multisample Velocity values 064 095 sounds the OSC1 High multi sample and the OSC2 Low multisample Velocity values 096 127 sounds the OSC1 High multi sample and the OSC2 High multisample Controller Setup page For each program this tab lets you make settings for the SW1 and SW2 key and for the B mode of REALTIME CONTROLS knobs 1 4 p 129 PG p 14 279 280 25 26 Pitch settings P2 Edit Pitch Here you can specify how the pitch of the multisample assigned to each oscillator will change Pitch EG and LFO settings allow the pitch to varied over time The OSC1 P Mod page is valid when Oscillator Mode is set to Sin gle or Drums OSC1 Pitch Mod page PROGRAM P2 Edit Pitch Pitch Pitch Slope Ey JS 02 AMS After Touch 00 JS X 2 Intensity 00 0 OSC1 Pitch Mod AMs Off Intensity 66 06 LFO1 Intensity 96 66 AMS After Touch JS Int 66 66 Intensity 00 00 ee LFO2 Intensity 00 00 AMS After Touch e JS Y Int 00 00 Intensity 00 00 k_P Mod Jl P Mod
171. e CF card slot eject button located on the rear panel is pressed inward If the eject button is in the outward position press it in 3 Insert your CompactFlash or Microdrive card into the CF card slot Make sure that the card is oriented correctly the label should be upward and the connector end inserted first anh CF card slot CDs i Eject button CompactFlash Microdrive 4 Push the card in until the media is inserted all the way into the slot Turn on the power WA To verify that the media was recognized correctly check that the Media mode Media Select display shows CF CompactFlash or MD Microdrive p 119 If the display indicates Unformatted you will need to format the card Newly purchased media or media that has been used by another device must also be formatted before you use it on the TRITON Extreme for the first time For the formatting procedure refer to p 119 Removing media Turn off the power of the TRITON Extreme 2 Press the CF card slot eject button located on the rear panel and pull the button outward 3 Press the CF card slot eject button inward and then pull the media out of the connector inside the slot 4 Remove the media from the slot Store the media correctly as described in the instruc tions included with the media 7 Connecting a USB device You can connect an external USB device such as a hard disk or CD R RW drive to the USB A connecto
172. e TRITON Extreme Selecting by bank combination number Selecting by combination category Selecting by using 10 s Hold e From a connected foot switch e By receiving MIDI program changes Selecting a combination on the TRITON Extreme Selecting by bank combination number 1 Make sure that Combination Select is selected If it is not select the COMBINATION P0 Play page and press Combination Select to highlight it Category COMBINATION P8 Play popup button Category GHB Keyboard Combination P s leti HIN Dita a FES Select popup button Program Select o Combination Select Kaihea astoa a aaa a aana nei Eh frins fruns eel Et A E E XM Bank Program ig Sloot JME P e204 Daco ia iua Ps Program ac Concert Concert Orchestr House Kir BD Grand BD Grand ED Grand ED l E E E E A aceite ane Status seeeeeseeeeesseeesDeeeeneeeeseessoreecseseneecessnecnssesDssneeesneseeseneesceasseseesnerenneeesDenesseeessnerssnestssensrsesassesresselsssersssenesseness Miger j pss ET Select 2 Use the VALUE controllers to select the combination number that you want to play You can use any of the following methods e Turn the VALUE dial e Use the A V keys e Use numeric keys 0 9 to specify a number and press the ENTER key 3 Press a BANK A E or H N key to select a bank By switching banks you can select combinations from other banks The key will light and t
173. e an audio cable to connect the audio output of your drive to the TRI TON Extreme s AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks If you re using a drive that does not have audio output jacks or a headphone jack you won t be able to monitor the sound Ripping digital data from an audio CD asa sample Here s how digital data from an audio CD track can be captured as a sample C Insert an audio CD into the USB A connector CD ROM or CD R RW drive amp PG p 325 2 In the Sampling mode P0 Recording Input Setup page make Input settings so that you can monitor the audio that you want to rip Input Analog Input1 BUS IFX Indiv Select L R Level 127 Pan L000 Input2 BUS IFX Indiv Select L R Level 127 Pan R127 DA Ripping will not be affected by these inputs 3 Access the Sampling mode P5 Audio CD Ripping page 4 In Media media select select the drive that con tains the audio CD and use Track to select the track that you want to rip Raise the Volume SAMPLING P5 Audio CD Drive CDD Audio CD Ripping aa Track gt a1 93 00 8 index 1 01 00 0 Sequencer START plays selected track Range Start Range End Duration 6 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to play back the audio CD track 6 During playback press the ENTER key at the points where you want ripping to begin and end This will set Range Start and Ran
174. e currently in e You can perform 48 kHz 16 bit linear mono or stereo sampling e The TRITON Extreme is shipped with 16 Mbytes of sample memory RAM When you sample the data is written into this sample memory RAM or to media For details on the types of media you can use refer to p 137 The 16 Mbyte sample memory RAM allows approxi mately 2 minutes 54 seconds of mono sampling or approximately 1 minute 27 seconds of stereo sam pling By installing 72 pin SIMM boards you can expand sample memory to a maximum of 96 Mbytes three 32 Mbyte SIMM boards replacing the factory installed 16 Mbyte SIMM with a 32 Mbyte SIMM With the sample memory maxed out the total sam pling time is 17 minutes 28 seconds of mono sampling approximately 8 minutes 44 seconds in stereo How ever because the TRITON Extreme RAM is addressed as six individual 16 Mbyte banks the maximum length for any individual sample remains approximately 2 minutes 54 seconds mono or approximately 1 minute 27 seconds stereo Samples you record into sample memory RAM can be used as tone generator wave forms However this data will be lost when the TRI TON Extreme s power is turned off so you must save any sample data that you want to keep The Media lets you record up to 80 minutes as a single sample file in either mono or stereo monaural approx imately 440 Mbytes stereo approximately 879 Mbytes This will create a WAVE file If a sample WAVE file
175. e exported in AIFF or WAVE formats 144 user drum kits 50 preload 9 ROM GM drum kits GM2 sound map compatible Effect section 5 insert effects stereo in out 2 master effects mono in stereo out 1 master EQ 3 band stereo all usable simultaneously 102 effect types available for insert effects or master effects Effect dynamic modulation function Valve Force Valve Force circuit Ultra Boost circuit 12AU7 vacuum tube Input Trim Ultra Boost Tube Gain Output Level analog Placement usable either as Final or Insert Dual polyphonic Use two arpeggiators simultaneously Combination Sequencer Song Play modes arpeggiator 5 preset arpeggio patterns 507 user arpeggio patterns 489 preload Sequencer 16 timbres 16 tracks 1 master track Maximum capacity 200 000 notes Resolution J 192 200 songs 20 cue lists 150 preset patterns 100 user patterns for each song In Track Sampling function see Sampling RAM 16 preset 16 user template songs Supports TRITON format and SMF formats 0 and 1 RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording function One set is available for each one song Auto Song Setup function Song play 16 timbres 16 tracks SMF formats 0 and 1 supported Load save utility Audio CD writing playback Wave file editing USB storage function allows a computer to manipulate data on media inserted in the CF card slot Data filer function save load MIDI exclusive data CD ROM R RW read
176. e of P4 Edit Zone Ctrl set Top Key and Bottom Key Set timbre 1 to a Top Key of G9 and a Bottom Key of C4 Set timbres 2 and 3 toa Top Key of B3 and a Bottom Key of C 1 You can also enter these values by holding down the ENTER key and playing a note on the keyboard COMBINATION P4 Edit Zone Ctrl Key Zone EEk gt a_a i TOP Slope i 66 i 68 Key Zone Slope Here you can specify the range of keys over which the original volume will be reached starting at the top key and bottom key In the example above you could set the Bottom Key of timbre 1 to G3 and set the Top Key of timbre 2 to G4 so that these two timbres overlap Next if you set the Bot tom Slope of timbre 1 to 12 and set the Top Slope of timbre 2 to 12 the sound will change gradually instead of changing suddenly between B3 and C4 Vel Zone page Velocity zone settings Here you can make settings for velocity switching and velocity crossfading For each timbre you can specify a range of velocities for which it will sound The range of velocities for which a timbre will sound is called a Velocity Zone By setting a velocity zone you can set up a timbre which will be sounded only by notes played within a certain range of velocities and not by notes played outside this Velocity Zone By combining timbres that have differing velocity zone settings you can create velocity switched combinations
177. e possible to change effect types within the cue list you can use dynamic modulation or MIDI control changes such as Effect Control to control the effects within the cue list for example applying reverb more deeply on certain songs or raising the LFO speed for a specific song We recommend this method if you will be using a cue list to construct the song When you execute the page menu command Convert to Song the effect settings of the Step 01 song will be specified for the song that results from the conversion Even if FX is not checked there may be cases in which a time lag in the transition between songs depending on the musical data of the song Also there may be cases in which the musical data is not played at the correct timing at the transition between songs If this occurs you can edit the musical data of the song or convert the cue list to a song for playback If you use Convert to Song to con vert the cue list to a song there will be no time lag during playback at the transition between songs and the musical data will be played at the correct timing Creating multiple songs for use in a cue list If you want to create multiple songs for use in a cue list it is a good idea to make the various necessary settings pro gram and other settings for each track effect settings etc for one song e g 5000 and then use the page menu com mand Copy From Song in SEQ 1 1 etc to copy it to other
178. e to to specify the location into which the data will be sampled RAM The sample will be written into sample memory RAM If you select RAM you can also specify the writing destination RAM bank In Sampling mode this is specified by Bank In other modes this is specified by the page menu command Select Bank amp Smpl No When you select Select Bank amp Smpl No the fol lowing dialog box will appear Select RAM Bank amp Sample No Bank gt GEG Auto 12dB On Sample No L saga CR 901 Z Program P 00 Initial ProgEaae MS gt saa New MS aAA Orig Key C3 Specify the Bank in this dialog box Sample No specifies the writing destination sample number If Sample Mode is set to Stereo specify L and R If you check Program in the Convert to area the sample will automatically be converted to a program immediately after the sample has been written into RAM This is convenient when you want to hear the sampled sound immediately At the right use Program and MS to specify the program number and multisample number of the pro gram that will be created by the conversion Use Orig Key to specify the key that will play the sample at its original pitch Orig Key will increment by one after you sample so that the next sample you record will be assigned to the next higher note Press the OK button to finalize the settin
179. eck Use Pro gram s Scale the scale specified by the program will be used Timbres for which this is not checked will use the Scale setting MIDI filter settings P3 Edit MIDI Filter For each MIDI Filter item you can specify whether or not the corresponding MIDI message will be transmitted and received The checked items will be transmitted and received a LOGI is Grand ne Kesboari Strings Brass Keyboar kaboari prem Keyboar Keyboar Enable Program Change i able After OUD fn PREE i SH SH N 5 B 3 N N amp MIDI filter does not turn the function itself on off but specifies whether or not that MIDI message will be transmitted and received For example if porta mento is on portamento will be applied to the sound of TRITON Extreme even if Portamento SW CC 65 is unchecked For example if you selected a bass program for timbre 1 and a piano program for timbre 2 to create a split type combination you could make the following settings so that pressing the connected damper pedal would apply the damper effect only to the piano program of timbre 2 Set the P3 Edit MIDI Filter 1 Enable Damper parameter Timbre 1 Enable Damper unchecked Timbre 2 Enable Damper checked Layer split and velocity switch settings Controller settings P4 Edit Zone Ctrl Key Zone page Key zone settings Indicates settings such as layer split and keyboard cr
180. ed to the multisample will be sent is specified by the Sampling P8 Insert Effect Routing page BUS Select Indiv Out Assign parameter SAMPLING P8 Insert Effect Routing B IF 1 No Effect Off IFx2 No Effect Off IFR3 No Effect Off IFXS No Effect Off Chain BUS Select IF X Indi Out Assign BUSCIFX Select gt E Routing Insert IFs IF IFX IFX IFX FR 1 2 3 d ca Insert effects Select an effect for IFX1 IFX5 and set Pan CC 8 for the signal that has passed through each insertion effect If the Chain check box is checked the settings that follow the last IFX in the chain will be used Master effects Master EQ The master effects and master EQ cannot be used in Sam pling mode AUDIO INPUT effect settings In Program Combination Sequencer Song Play and Media modes you can apply the TRITON Extreme s effects to an external audio source connected to the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 or S P DIF IN jacks In these modes you can use the insert effects master effects and master EQ Use Input COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY MEDIA to make settings for the external input from the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 and S P DIF IN jacks Normally you will make these settings in the Global mode P0 Basic Setup Input Sampling page but you can also make them from Combination Program Sequencer or Media modes In these modes you can apply the TRITON Extreme s effects to the external audio signals from each jack and sam
181. een two specified values over the specified length of time This is used to pitch bend after touch and control change data etc 45 Recording exclusive events Exclusive messages received from an external MIDI device or the parameter changes produced when you edit a track parameter or effect parameter can be realtime recorded on any track You can adjust the realtime control lers the arpeggiator make changes to the program vol ume pan mute settings and adjust the tone all in realtime During playback the exclusive messages you recorded will control the track parameters and effect parameters of the song and can be sent to external MIDI devices WA You can use the page menu command Put Effect Set ting to Track to insert an exclusive event containing the parameter settings for an insert effect or master effect into the desired location of a track so that these settings will automatically switch during playback amp GM XG and GS exclusive messages can be recorded on a track but the TRITON Extreme s tone generator will not respond to these messages Recording internal parameter changes As an example here s how to record internal parameter changes using the preset template song Acid Jazz In this example we ll use an empty track to record param eter changes for the insert effects IFX1 IFX2 assigned to track 1 drums amp In order to record system exclusive messages the Global P1 M
182. eferred to as alter nate modulation Intensity is a parameter that sets the degree speed or depth to which AMS will control alternate modulation Combinations of modulations that are frequently used in synthesizer performance such as using the joystick to vary the pitch are also provided as special parameters separate from alternate modulation TRITON Extreme provides 29 types of alternate modula tion In single mode you can use 29 alternate modulation desti nations of 29 types and in double mode you can use 55 alternate modulation destinations of 29 types There are 42 AMS sources However depending on the type of modulation some sources cannot be selected For details on alternate modulation and AMS refer to PG p271 Suggestions on using alternate modulation When making settings for alternate modulation think of the effect that you wish to produce what type of modula tion will be necessary to produce that effect and what parameter of the oscillator filter or amplifier needs to be controlled Then select a source AMS and set the Intensity If you proceed logically in this way you will achieve the desired effect For example if you want to control a guitar like sound so that it appears to be approaching feedback when the joy stick is moved away you will make settings so that the joystick controls filter modulation or the resonance level Auto Song Setup function This function autom
183. either location P8 Edit Insert Select insert effects and make settings for them Program banks Effect Specify the oscillator routing send levels to the Bank Prog No Explanation A D H M 000 127 Preloaded programs insert effects master effects and independent out puts make settings for Valve Force P9 Edit Master Select master effects and make settings for them Effect Make settings for the master EQ and Valve Force 000 127 User initial programs 000 127 MOSS programs l 000 127 A RO For details on how to access each mode and page refer to Basic operation p 13 Bank F is available only if the EXB MOSS option is GM2 capital programs 9 9 VNL GM2 variation programs g d VNL GM2 drum programs note installed The page structure and parameter structure Bsc Pogra mS of bank F programs are different than for the pro user initial programs grams of other banks Refer to the EXB MOSS t For details on the factory set programs refer to VNL owner s manual amp You can select programs from bank F only if the EXB MI All transmission and reception of MIDI data in Pro MOSS option is installed gram mode is performed on the global MIDI channel The global MIDI channel is set in Global P1 MIDI PO Play is where you select and play programs make simple adjustments using the Performance Editor and MIDI Channel pgs ee ee ce You can perform sampling resampl
184. elect the source that you want to sample The sound being sent to the bus you select here will be sampled L R The sound being sent to the L R bus will be sam pled Indiv 1 2 The sound being sent to the Individual 1 2 bus will be sampled For examples of these settings refer to the various examples of sampling p 67 70 75 82 83 QS p 19 22 SAMPLING P Recording Input Analog SAMPLING Input1 Level 127_ BUS IFX Indiv Select L R Input2 Level 127 BUSCIFX Indiv Select Off Pan R127 Recording Setup Input Setup aia gt Trigger P Threshold Level 30 dB Recording Level d6 Input Prefe Memory Setup Jl rence Jl Status Tritt ww 65 66 2 Use Trigger to specify how sampling will begin The available trigger methods will differ depending on the mode Sampling mode Sampling START SW Note On Threshold Program Combination modes Sampling START SW Note On Sequencer mode Sampling START SW Note On Threshold Sequencer START SW Here we will describe the Sampling START SW and Note On that can be used in all modes For details on trigger methods suitable for various purposes refer to the various examples of sampling on p 80 82 83 QS p 18 22 or PG p 5 41 63 and 115 Sampling START SW When you press the SAM PLING REC key you will enter sampling standby mode and sampling will begin when you press the SAMPLING START STOP key
185. electric piano and guitar performances SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 63 001 01 000 Meter 444 J 108 pb Man DIST INTRO Track 8 Lead Synth Reso Hi RPPR DI Pri C Danky P oora Diaa jaa D kizel Posa D saz iaa T DJsiza Standare Fretless Pro DyniFu Stereo iPercussiiTsunami Espress As described in steps 1 set song S001 VERSE to 008 8 measures making it an eight measure song Then mute all tracks other than tracks 1 3 When you play back you will hear only the drums bass and elec tric piano As described in steps set song S002 CHORUS to 008 8 measures making it an eight measure song 4 Changing the key transposing modulating Here s how to change the key of a song 4 Select song S002 CHORUS 2 Select the Sequencer P5 Track Edit page 3 Use Track Select to select T02 as the track whose pitch will be changed 4 Specify the measures for which the key will be changed Select From Measure and use the VALUE controllers to set this to 001 Next select To End of Measure and specify 008 SEQUENCER P5 Track Edit Track Edit 001 01 000 Meter 444 J 108 gt Manu P5002 CHORUS gt Track 2 Bass Reso Hi O RPPR From Measure pal To End of Measure aluks 6 Select the page menu command Shift Erase Note A dialog box will appear If you did not specify the range of measures in step 4 set From Measure To Measure
186. eme tr 5 5 OR CD MUSIC CEG een Is go O OORO Soo r a USB a B S PDIF AUDIO OUTPUT AC power supply F i INDIVIDUAL MAIN 4 3 2 1 R L MONO Microdrive card 9 Installing options ri I i i i i i i CompactFlash Power cable Included Option EXB MOSS 6 Inserting and PIM removing CF card to an AC outlet slot media USB cable DAT etc DIGITAL IN CD R RW hard disk removable disks etc Computer 7 Connecting a USB device Powered monitors Mixer etc PHONES 15 16 1 Connecting the power cable Turn off the power of the TRITON Extreme 2 Plug the included power cable into the AC power supply connector located on the back of the TRITON Extreme 3 Connect the other end of the power cable to an AC outlet amp Use only the power cable that is included with the TRITON Extreme Using another power cable may cause malfunctions amp Make sure that your AC outlet is the correct voltage for your instrument 2 Analog audio output connections Connect a set of amplified monitor speakers or your audio system to the TRITON Extreme amp If you play back the TRITON Extreme through your stereo audio system be aware that high volumes may damage your speakers Be careful not to raise the vol ume excessively Connecting the AUDIO OUTPU
187. emo Song S000 S003 Data for the EXB MOSS will be loaded into Program Bank F000 127 Combination Bank E000 063 and song S003 Demo song data will be erased when the power is turned off 127 128 Loading the EXB MOSS data After installing the EXB MOSS you will need to load the data for it The TRITON Extreme contains preload data and demo song data for the EXB MOSS There are two ways to do this you can load all of the TRI TON Extreme s preload data or you can load the mini mum amount of data while erasing as little as possible of the current data If you load all data all of the preload data will be erased but you ll need to perform only a sin gle load operation If you load only the minimum data the rest of your current data will be preserved but you ll need to perform several load operations Loading all data 1 Execute loading as described in Restoring the fac tory settings If you are loading for the first time you ll probably want to set Kind to All Preload PCG and Demo Song so that the song data is loaded as well If the EXB MOSS is installed data for the EXB MOSS will be loaded automatically 2 After you ve executed the load operation use Sequencer mode to listen to the EXB MOSS demo song WA For details on the data that is loaded refer to the pre ceding page Loading only the minimum data 4 Perform steps 1 and 2 described in Restoring the factory settings
188. en SW2 indicates JS Y amp Ribbon Lock This means that the SW2 key is assigned to control the Lock function for the joystick Y direction and the ribbon controller PG p 279 The key will operate in Toggle mode If you move the joystick in the Y direction press the SW2 key to turn on the Lock function then operate the ribbon controller and finally release both control lers the sound you modified by the two controllers will be maintained WO In many programs and combinations the SW2 key is assigned to control the Lock function for the joy stick Y direction and the ribbon controller W The Lock function can also be applied to aftertouch If the SW1 or SW2 switch is assigned to After Touch Lock the effect produced by pressing down on the keyboard can be held by turning on the SW1 or SW2 switch note For details on the SW1 and SW2 switch functions refer to PG p 279 REALTIME CONTROLS 1 2 3 4 These knobs can be used to control the filter cutoff fre quency and resonance the amp and filter EG volume portamento time pan pitch LFO or the send levels to the master effects etc You can also use these knobs to control the Valve Force parameters Press the REALTIME CONTROLS key to switch the function of the realtime controllers Each time you press the key A mode B mode or Valve Force will be alternately selected and the correspond ing LED will light VALVE Q FORCE ON OFF LI
189. encer or be a trigger and tap tempo to advance the cue list step PG p 281 You can specify the function that will be performed by an assignable pedal the optional XVP 10 or EXP 2 con nected to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack e This is set by Foot Pedal Assign This pedal can be used to control master volume alternate modulation or effect dynamic modulation portamento pitch change speed volume the pan following an insert effect pan volume or send levels to the master effects PG p 282 fe You can use this as a source for alternate modulation or effect dynamic modulation and use it to control program parameters or effect parameters In this case set Foot Switch Assign to Foot SW CC 82 and Foot Pedal Assign to Foot Pedal CC 04 Here we will show how to make settings that allow an assignable switch to change programs or combinations Press the Foot Switch Assign popup button and press either Program Up or Program Down Program Up will cause the next higher program num ber to be selected each time you press the foot switch Program Down will cause the next lower program number to be selected each time you press the foot switch 2 Set the Foot Switch Polarity to the polarity of the foot switch you have connected If you have connected a Korg PS 1 pedal switch set this to C KORG Standard If the polarity is not set correctly the pedal will not function appropriately 3 Eithe
190. ency of the master EQ PG p 269 Effect settings in Combination Song and Song Play modes In Combination Sequencer and Song Play modes you can specify the routing of each timbre track to the insert effects and master effects These settings are made in the same way in each of these modes We will be using the example of Combination mode in our explanation here Routing Q In Combination P8 Edit Insert FX select the Routing page COMBINATION mene ie Ex isteres Compressor joniz HFX2 St Graphic 7EQ On Tres stereo anger Par HFxd Stereo Phaser On HFxo st BPM Delay On ings Strings Strings Strings Strings iKeyb oar i IFX Indiv PIT BUS Select i ph exa p isP espe LR 2 Select IFX Indiv Out BUS Select Here you can specify the bus insert effect to which the output of each timbre will be sent The routing insert effects and chain settings are shown graphically in the upper part of the display screen In this example T01 timbre 1 uses IFX1 and 2 T02 uses IFX2 T03 uses IFX3 and 4 T02 and T05 use IFX4 and T06 and T07 use IFX5 Selection of each effect type the on off setting and chain settings are made in the Insert Effect page 3 Send1 Send2 specifies the send level from each timbre to the master effects This can be set only if IFX Indiv Out BUS Select is set to L R or Off amp The actual send level is determined by multiplying this by the Send 1
191. eps and This is an efficient way to record multiple samples QS p 20 69 70 Applying an insert effect to a sample and resampling it The process of applying an insert effect etc to a sampled sound and then sampling it once again is called resam pling 1 In the PO Recording Recording page assign the sam ple that you want to resample to Sample Select When the power is first turned on the assigned sample will be set to Orig Key C2 2 Press the page menu button and choose Auto Sam pling Setup from the menu A dialog box will appear 3 Choose Auto Resample through IFX and select the effect that you want to use Auto Sampling Setup Initialize C REC Audio Input Auto Resample through IFX 4 Press the OK button to execute the command Sampling settings will be made automatically SAMPLING P Recording Input gt BEEP SAMPLING Input Level 127 BUS IFX Indiv Select Off Input2 Level 127 BUSCIFX Indiv Select Off Pan R127 Recording Setup z Source BUS L R Trigger Sampling START SW Metronome Precount Off J 120 Resample gt Auto Key C2 _ Prefe Memory rence JI Status SAMPLING P Recording Ms gt GGG NewMS GG L Tria Recording Level CdBI Tee Index 001 61 H Bere OrigKey C2 Topkey B2 Range C 1 B2 _ Create REC Sample Setu Save to gt RAM Bank P RAM1 Sa
192. er Move your finger to the left and right on the ribbon con troller to apply an effect Normally this is used to control pitch volume or filter etc note You can use the Lock function of SW1 or SW2 keys to hold the effect even after you release your finger from the ribbon controller For the procedure refer to The Lock function on the following page WA You can use the ribbon controller as a source for alter nate modulation or effect dynamic modulation to control program parameters or effect parameters SW1 SW2 Dama E J You can use these keys as sources for alternate modulation or effect dynamic modulation to control program parame ters or effect parameters These switches can also be used to switch the octave to turn portamento on off or to lock the position of the rib bon controller or after touch lock function 21 22 You can specify the way in which the SW1 and SW2 keys will operate either Toggle when the assigned func tion will be switched between on and off each time the key is pressed or Momentary when the assigned function will be active on only as long as you hold down the switch note In Program mode the function of the SW1 and SW2 keys can be checked in the PO Play Perfor mance Edit page WA When you write a program or combination the on off status of the SW1 and SW2 keys is saved A For details on making these settings refer
193. er supply voltage 5V only is supported 16 Mbyte 1 Gbyte e MD Microdrive Power supply voltage 5V only is supported 1 Gbyte ema USB storage media HD hard disk e RM removable disk Magneto Optical MS DOS format FAT16 and FAT32 are supported for HD and RM Capacity recognized FAT32 up to 2 Tbytes 2 000 Gbytes FAT16 up to 4 Gbytes e CDR CD R RW UDF format is supported UDF format CD R RW can be written and read Packet writing support PG p 330 CD DA audio data can be recorded played and ISO9660 level 1 format can be loaded note Requirements for external USB storage media that can be recognized by the TRITON Extreme are described on PG p 325 WA For details on connecting the USB A B connectors refer to PG p 325 Built in MD Built in CF Micro drive Flash Set Save Load Operations that the TRITON Extreme can perform on media Save Load Media mode Internal memory and sample memory RAM data can be saved loaded For details on the files that can be saved or loaded refer to the table on PG p 175 Loading or saving a divided file is supported for media connected to the USB A connector Sampling resampling Program Combination Sequencer Sampling modes If Save to MEDIA sampled resampled Wave files will be written to media Wave file playback Sequencer Media modes Wave files can be played Wave file editing Media mode Wave files can be edited SMF direct playback Song
194. er than 4 Gbyte use FAT32 format to format it note Use FAT16 to format CompactFlash or Microdrive media of 4 Gbytes or less 9 Press the OK button to format or press the Cancel button if you decide to cancel When you press the OK button a message will ask you for confirmation Press the OK button once again to execute the Format operation amp You must format a CD R RW disc before you can use it for packet writing You do not need to format a CD R RW disc that you will use to create an audio CD If a CD R RW disc has previously been used by another device you must format it amp You must use the TRITON Extreme to format the media The TRITON Extreme will not correctly recog nize media that has been formatted by another device Setting the calendar function Here s how to set the date and time for the TRITON Extreme s internal calendar The date and time are recorded when you save data Use the page menu com mand Set Date Time Media Utility page to make these settings RI You will need make these settings after you purchase the TRITON Extreme and after you replace the calen dar backup battery In the 0 3 Utility page select the page menu com mand Set Date Time The following dialog box will appear Set Date Time Year 2003 Month 9 Day Hour a7 Minute pa Second 66 2 Use the VALUE controllers to set Year Month Day Hour Minute and
195. ern After the pattern has played for the length specified it will return to the beginning This setting can also be changed during or after editing For this example set it to 08 WA For the preload arpeggio patterns U000 A B U488 User simply changing the Length can signif icantly change the character of the pattern Try chang ing the length and listening to the result TD Make settings for the Tempo Resolution Octave Sort Latch Key Sync and Key board parameters These are program parameters but can be set from here as well amp If after moving here from Program mode you modify these parameters and wish to keep your changes return to Program mode and write the program These parameters are not saved by Write Arpeggio Pattern For this example make the settings shown in the LCD screen on step 8 In Arpeggio Pattern Setup specify how the arpeggio will be developed These settings can be changed during or after editing PG p 171 9 Select the Pattern Edit page Pattern Edit GLOBAL P6 User Arpeggio Pitch Offset 00 Gate O50 Pived Nois No 6 Velocity 664 Flam 66 A pattern consists of Steps and Tones e Step A user arpeggio pattern can have a maximum of 48 steps The arpeggiator will play from the first step in steps equal to the timing value specified by Resolution The vertical lines of the grid shown in the center of
196. ernal signal input via the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 and S P DIF IN can be made in Input COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY MEDIA set in Global PO 0 3a or in the corresponding mode In these modes the external input sound from each jack can be processed by the TRITON Extreme s effects and sampled or the TRITON Extreme can be used as a 4 in AUDIO INPUT 1 2 and S P DIF IN L R 6 out effect processor The TRITON Extreme can also be used as a vocoder effect 093 Vocoder that uses external mic input to control internal sounds pend Master Effect 1 2 Return Oscillator Filter Amplifier J Insert Effect 1 5 3 Master EQ Pare L MONO R AUDIO INPUT 1 2 S P DIF IN L R amp When effects are applied to the external input sound from the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 and S P DIE IN jacks certain effect types or parameter settings may cause oscillation to occur If this occurs adjust the input level output level or effect parameters Please be aware of this particularly when using an effect that has a high gain 103 104 Routing settings and effect set tings The insert effects master effects and master EQ have the same structure in all modes but the routing settings will determine how the oscillators of a program or the timbres of a combination or track of a song will be sent to each insert effect or master effect In the pages that follow we will explain how you can make routing settings and effect settings i
197. es AA Index 001 Index 002 Index 003 Index 004 0000 0001 0002 0003 Sample A Sample B Sample C Sample D Multisample Program OSC Single Double Sample __ DrumKit Program OSC Drums Digital analog convertor DAC VALVE FORCE Placement Final Digital signal Analog signal OLUN Multisample 000 999 RAM internal memory WAVE File 63 64 Preparations for sampling amp The multisample and sample data in the sample memory RAM is not backed up when the power is turned off If you wish to keep this data you must save it onto a media before turning off the power When the power is first turned on memory will not contain any multisample or sample data You must first load previously saved data before you can play back or edit any sample data p 121 1 Connecting an input device and making Input settings Connecting an input device Here s how to connect an external audio source On the TRITON Extreme you can input audio signals to the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks or the S P DIF IN jack Connect the audio source that you want to input e Input from the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks Connect a mic guitar or CD player etc to the rear panel AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks Set the AUDIO INPUT MIC LINE switch as appro priate for the device you are inputting If a mic is connected set this to the MIC p
198. escribed here If you have edited these parameters in Program or Combination mode you must return to that mode to write them Using a page menu command to write To write global settings the various settings in Glo bal P0 P4 press the page menu command Write Global Setting in Global P0 P4 The Write Global Setting dialog box will appear Write Global Setting To write user drum kits press the page menu com mand Write Drum Kits in Global P5 The Write Drum Kits dialog box will appear Write Drum Kits To write user arpeggio patterns press the page menu command Write Arpeggio Patterns in Global P6 The Write Arpeggio Patterns dialog box will appear Write Arpeggio Patterns fe The same dialog box will also appear if in each of the above pages you hold down the ENTER key and press the 0 key 2 To execute the Write operation press the OK button To cancel press the Cancel button When you press the OK button the display will ask Are you sure Press the OK button once again to write the data Using the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key to write In the following pages press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key A dialog box will appear Global settings Global P0 P4 User drum kits Global P5 User arpeggio patterns Global P6 The example shown is for Update Arpeggio Patterns Update Arpeggio Patterns Are you sure 2 To execute the Write o
199. ese settings can be made independently for each program Send Return Oscillator Filter Amplifier Insert Effect 1 5 manent Master EQ Parent L MONO R In Combination mode Sequencer mode and Song Play mode insert effects can be used to help create the sound of each timbre track The master effects are used to apply overall spatial processing and the master EQ is used to make overall adjustments in tone You can make these settings independently for each com bination in Combination mode independently for each song in Sequencer mode and in Song Play mode for the entire mode Return Master Effect 1 2 L MONO R Timbre 1 Track 1 Timbre 2 Track 2 Timbre 8 Track 16 In Sampling mode you can sample while applying insert effects to the audio coming in via AUDIO INPUT 1 2 or S P DIF IN jacks Settings in Sampling mode are made in Input SAMPLING Sampling PO Input Setup These settings are valid only for Sampling mode You can also sample while applying an insert effect to the samples assigned to a multisample AUDIO INPUT 1 2 aad S P DIF IN L R Sample_ Insert Effect 1 5 H Insert Effect 1 5 Resampling The external input from the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 or S P DIF IN jacks is also valid in modes other than Sampling mode In Program Combination Sequencer and Song Play modes you can use the insert effects master effects and master EQ Settings for ext
200. eshold or the SEQUENCER START STOP key The available methods will depend on the mode Threshold allows you to initiate sampling when the input signal exceeds the threshold level you specify In Sampling mode you can also specify a pre trigger setting e The analog audio inputs support mic and line level signals Digital audio input via S P DIF IN supports the 48 kHz sample rate e You can digitally sample i e rip audio data from an audio CD in a CD R RW drive connected to the USB A connector e Sampled data can be converted automatically or manually using an easy operation into a program and used with the TRITON Extreme s HI synthesis system In Sampling mode use Convert MS To Program In Program Combination or Sequencer mode use Select Bank amp Smp No Once a multisample sample has been converted into a program you can make filter amp and effect settings and play it as a program Such a program can also be used in Combination mode or Sequencer mode Samples you record can also be used as drum samples in a drum kit Sampling in Program Combination and Sequencer modes e A performance in Program Combination or Sequencer modes can be resampled internally with all audio remaining in digital form This lets you resample a performance that uses the TRITON Extreme s filters effects arpeggiator and sequencer etc e External audio sources from the various input jacks can be sampled A perfor
201. est audio quality will be obtained at a level slightly lower than when the ADC OVERLOAD indication appears i e the highest level that does not cause an input overload Press the SAMPLING REC key The level meter allows you to check the volume of the input If the display indicates CLIP use the VALUE con troller to lower the Recording Level slider located in the right of the display from the 0 0 position to an appropriate level When you have finished making adjustments once again press the SAMPLING REC key Also stop the playback of your audio source Press the SAMPLING REC key to enter record ready mode di Play back your audio source At the moment you want to start sampling press the SAMPLING START STOP key Sampling will start It is a good idea to allow a bit of extra time before you start and after you stop sampling 2 At the moment that you wish to stop sampling press the SAMPLING START STOP key Sampling will stop A 140 BPM drum phrase has now been sampled The sample will automatically be assigned to Sample Sample select WA Sampling will stop automatically if the remaining amount of memory reaches zero 3 Listen to the sound that was sampled You can play the OrigKey note to hear the sound that was sampled fe After you have verified the sound assign a name to the sample p 115 e g LOOP1 140 BPM Up to 14 characters can be input as the n
202. et to 02 it will not sound T8 is set to Gch but since Status is Off it will not sound e Any MIDI channel that is assigned to a timbre will trigger the arpeggiator In this case these will be MIDI Channel 02 and Gch global MIDI channel When the arpeggiator is on playing the keyboard will trigger arpeggiator A which is assigned to T8 Gch T7 will be sounded by arpeggiator A Since the Status of T8 is Off it will not sound e Since the Status of T8 is Off it will not sound regardless of whether the arpeggiator is on or off It is a dummy timbre that causes T7 to sound only when the arpeggiator is on Combination J056 In The Pocket Select and play combination J056 In The Pocket Before you play make sure that the global MIDI channel Global P1 MIDI MIDI Channel is set to 01 Arpeggiator A is assigned to T7 and T8 and arpeggiator B is assigned to T5 When you play the keyboard the T7 program J068 HipHop Kit will be sounded by the arpeggio pattern U444 User Dr In The Pocket The T5 program M034 Chord Trigger will be sounded by the arpeggio pattern U123 A B Syn Echo The B Bottom Key and Top Key Combination P7 Edit Arp Scan Zone page are set so that arpeggiators B will operate only for the G3 note and above Arpeggiator B is assigned to T8 as well but this setting is so that the T7 program J068 HipHop Kit will sound only when the arpeggiator is on Re
203. etails on connecting a device to the USB A or B connector refer to PG p 325 amp These types of media are not included You will need to purchase them separately Refer to p 137 Setting up media If you are using a CompactFlash or Microdrive card insert it into the TRITON Extreme s CF card slot For details on handling CompactFlash and Microdrive media refer to p 125 amp You must turn off the power before inserting media into the CF card slot Failing to do so may cause your data to be damaged amp Be sure to insert the media in the correct orientation Press the media all the way into the CF card slot If you are using a USB hard disk removable disk or CD R RW drive use a USB cable to connect your device s USB connector to the TRITON Extreme s USB A connector i The TRITON Extreme s USB A B connectors support hot plugging you can connect or disconnect the USB cable while the power is on However in order to do so your USB device must also support hot plugging 2 Turn on the power amp Do not insert or remove CF slot media while the power is on Doing so may cause the stored data to be damaged 3 If you are using a USB hard disk removable disk or CD R RW drive turn on the power of your USB device and use a USB cable to connect it to the TRI TON Extreme s USB A connector ZS The above step assumes that your USB device sup ports hot plugging If you are using a device that does not su
204. evel 12dB oct Frequency Resonance When Resonance is set to a higher value the overtones in the region of the cutoff frequency will be boosted as shown in the diagram below giving a distinctive charac ter to the sound When resonance is applied Low Pass Low resonance value High resonance value Filter Mod page PROGRAM P3 Edit Filter Keyboard Track Key Low FE Key High G9 Intensity to A 99 Ramp High 06 Intensity to B 58 Filter Mod E Ramp Low 11 Filter EG Velocity to A 36 Intensity to A 00 AMS gt Ribbon CC 16 Velocity to B 86 Intensity to B 66 Ant to A 86 to B 86 Filter A B Modulation Filter A AMS1 Yelocity AMS2 After Touch Intensity 86 AMS2 US CC a1 Intensity 30 Filter B AMS1 US x Intensity 20 Intensity 00 Filteri Filteri Filter1 Filter1 Filter2 Filter2 Filter2 Filter2 k Mod Mfo Mod EG Mod Jiifo Mod EG J Controllers and the filter EG can be used to modulate the filter cutoff frequency that was specified in the Filter1 page By using a controller to vary the tone or by using an EG to create time varying changes you can add a rich variety of tonal change to the sound Keyboard Track This varies the cutoff frequency according to the position of the key on the keyboard that you play e When Ramp Low is set to a positive value the cutoff frequency will rise as you
205. evel 3 LSB MSB 00 00 Pitch bend range 01 00 Fine tune 02 00 Coarse tune 4 In addition to Korg exclusive messages Inquiry GM System On Master Volume Master Balance Master Fine Tune and Master Coarse Tune are supported Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO x No 140 Consult your local Korg distributor for more information on MIDI IMPLEMENTATION Index N umerics 10 s Hold 4 13 21 32 24 dB oct low pass filter with reso nance 27 A After Touch 22 Alternate Modulation 30 Amp Amp EG 29 Amp Level 28 Amp Mod 29 Keyboard Track 29 LFO 29 Amp EG 29 Amplifier 23 28 AMS Alternate Modulation Source 26 28 30 Arpeggiator 2 5 23 30 33 37 50 56 80 88 90 94 96 130 134 ASSIGNABLE PEDAL 7 16 23 90 ASSIGNABLE SWITCH 7 16 23 44 54 90 Audio CD 5 71 72 74 123 136 AUDIOINPUT 6 16 64 103 107 111 132 Audio input output Analog 6 16 64 Digital 6 16 64 Auto 12 dB On 67 Auto punch in 44 Auto Song Setup 30 38 58 Auto pan 26 28 29 Bank 4 14 122 Combination 31 32 34 35 Program 19 20 24 Sampling 66 BANK key 4 Base key 77 130 Beep 90 131 Bit resolution 62 BPM 36 76 78 108 BUS Select 6 67 72 93 104 105 106 109 110 C Calendar function 120 Cancel button 9 Category 8 20 24 32 34 41 93 104 114 CD R RW 117 123 135 Check box 9 Combination 10 13 31
206. eyboard must be set to the global MIDI channel Your playing on the keyboard is transmitted on the global MIDI channel and will sound any timbre that matches this channel Normally you will set this to Gch When this is set to Gch the MIDI channel of the timbre will always match the global MIDI channel even if you change the global MIDI channel amp On some preloaded combinations that use the arpeg giator timbres assigned to the arpeggiator may not have a Status of INT and MIDI Ch of Gch The reason for this is that these settings are for tim bres that sound only when the arpeggiator is on This is a very useful technique for creating combinations that use the arpeggiator Refer to Arpeggiator set tings in Combination and Sequencer modes p 96 PG p 49 and study the relationship between arpeg giator assignments Status and MIDI Channel Bank Select when status EX2 This setting is valid when Status is set to EX2 It speci fies that Bank Select messages will be transmitted from TRITON Extreme OSC page T 1 L 61 C Grand Piano 1 E E 4 Keyboar Strings Brass Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Reyboar Force osc Mode RoE oD Peo D Pro P Pro P rol ro PRG E ia lisbon bausibeatsedlige niatiebeinaciesee i osc Select c on oe om wD eip m oe BTH Force OSC Mode Normally you will set this to PRG the oscillator will play as set by the program settings
207. f a sample You can select either Sustaining suitable for sustain type instruments such as strings or vocals or Slice suitable for rhythm loops on decay type instruments such drums Stereo samples are supported e The Crossfade Loop function is an important looping tool that helps smooth out irregularities in long loops which contain complex material By executing Crossfade Loop you can eliminate this problem and create natural sounding loops e The Link with Crossfade function allows you to join two samples into a single sample You can also crossfade the overlapping portion of the samples at this time so that the volume changes gradually producing a natural sounding transition e The BPM Adjust function playback pitch adjust lets you adjust the playback pitch of each index so that the loop frequency matches the desired BPM value e You can use resampling auto to automatically apply effects to a sample and create a new sample How Sampling mode is organized This section describes how sampling on the TRITON Extreme is organized see the lower diagram on the fol lowing page Sampling frequency and bit resolution As shown in the diagram sampling reads the level of the analog signal at fixed intervals along the time axis and stores the levels in memory as digital data Level Analog waveform Time 48kHz 48 000 times every second 0 0208 mS cycle Sampled digital 16bit waveform Time 65 536 levels of
208. f measures you have recorded 4 Select song S000 INTRO 2 Select the Sequencer P5 Track Edit Track Edit page In the P5 Track Edit page press the MENU key to access the page jump page Press the P5 Track Edit SEQUENCER P5 Track Edit Track Edit aa 001 01 00O Meter 444 J 108 Maw b S000 INTRO Track 8 Lead Synth Binal J RpPR From Measure 661 To End of Measure 868 3 Access the page menu This contains various commands for editing tracks and measures Press the Set Song Length A dialog box will appear Set Song Length Length EEE E Overwrite WAY Name T NEWFILE Input the number of measures for the song For this example select 008 8 measures and press the OK but ton The performance data from measures 1 8 will remain and the data of subsequent measures will be deleted When you press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to play the song playback will stop at the end of the 8th measure amp If you are using Track Play Loop check whether the measures specified for Loop Start Measure and Loop End Measure would be deleted If they would be deleted use Move Measure PG p 83 etc to move the data into the playback area before you execute this operation 51 52 4 Mute tracks Press the EXIT key to select P0 Play REC and access the Program T01 08 T09 16 page Mute all tracks other than tracks 3 and 4 When you play back you will hear only the
209. fects MIDI control changes and Valve Force in realtime p 22 QS p 6 REALTIME CONTROLS key This key selects either A B or Valve Force mode for the realtime controllers The selected mode will light VALVE FORCE ON OFF key Switches the Valve Force function on off When on this key will light 1 knob 2 knob 3 knob 4 knob In A mode the function of each knob is fixed 1 is the low pass filter cutoff frequency 2 is the filter resonance level or the cutoff frequency of the high pass filter 3 is the filter EG intensity and 4 is the filter amp release time In B mode each knob will control the function that was assigned to it in the Program Combination Sequencer Song Play or Sampling modes The Valve Force functions of the knobs are fixed knob 1 controls the input level to Valve Force knob 2 controls the mix level of the Valve Force analog ultra low boost cir cuit knob 3 controls input gain to the vacuum tube and knob 4 controls the output level from Valve Force amp Depending on the sound you are using you may hear noise if you turn the Valve Force knobs or edit Valve Force parameters while sound is being produced 6 Mode keys Use these keys to enter the desired mode When you press a key the key will light and you will enter the mode whose key you pressed p 10 CO MBI key Combination mode will be selected PROG key Program mode will be selected SEQ ke
210. fer to the preceding section Combination D062 Old Vox Organ Linking the arpeggiator to the combination If you want the arpeggiator settings of a combination to become active when that combination is selected check Combination for Auto Arpeggiator Global P0 Basic Setup Basic page 97 98 Creating an user arpeggio pattern About user arpeggio patterns The patterns that can be selected on the TRITON Extreme s arpeggiator are called arpeggio patterns There are two types of arpeggio patterns preset arpeggio patterns and user arpeggio patterns Preset arpeggio patterns There are five patterns UP DOWN ALT1 ALT2 and RANDOM The operation of these patterns is fixed and cannot be edited User arpeggio patterns There are 507 patterns U000 A B U506 User which can develop chords or phrases in a wide variety of ways based on the pitches that you play on the keyboard or the timing at which you play them In Global P6 User Arpeggio Pattern setup you can mod ify these user arpeggio patterns or create a new user arpeggio pattern from an initialized condition Edited user arpeggio patterns can be written to internal memory areas U000 A B U506 User p 116 In Media mode user arpeggio patterns can also saved to media Editing a user arpeggio pattern amp If you want to edit a user arpeggio pattern you must first make sure that memory protect is unchecked ep 115 If you e
211. first turned on the sounds you sample will automatically be looped P0 Recording Preference page Auto Loop On On To edit the loop and other playback address settings for the sample use the P2 Loop Edit page Select the sample for which you wish to make loop settings To select the sample use the Sample Select or Index parameters of P2 Loop Edit page or of the PO Recording Recording page p 69 amp If you use Sample Select to select the sample be aware that the assignment to the index will also change 2 In the P2 Loop Edit page use the Loop check box to turn loop playback on off for the sample Looping will be turned on if the box is checked This will operate between the addresses you specify in step Loop On Start gt End LoopS End LoopS gt End is repeated Loop Off Start End SAMPLING P2 Loop Edit Start EEEEEEE J Loop _ Rev LJ 1206 ry LoopS 6624952 O Loop Lock Loop Tune 00 K3 200M gt maromi SD To play the sample press the key to which the sample is assigned the key range that is highlighted in Key board amp Index End AASAAAA _ Use Zero rtd is A sample waveform that was sampled with Sample Mode set to Stereo will be displayed in two levels The upper level is the L channel and the lower level is the R channel 3 Specify the start address in Start the loop start address in LoopS Loop Start a
212. following settings to allow monitoring Input Analog Input1 BUS IFX Indiv Select L R Level 127 Pan L000 Input2 BUS IFX Indiv Select L R Level 127 Pan R127 Volume 127 Use Track to select the track and press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to begin playback amp If you re using a drive that does not have audio out put jacks or a headphone jack you won t be able to monitor the sound Saving a track list that you have completed or par tially edited amp The track list will be lost when the power is turned off If you want to keep this data you must save it C In the Save page select the directory in which you want to save the track list 2 Select the page menu command Save Audio CD Track List to access the dialog box 3 Press the OK button to save the data or press the Cancel button to cancel without saving Editing a Wave file Media Edit WAVE You can edit Wave files stored on media This is a convenient way to edit large files to a size that can be loaded into the TRITON Extreme s sample mem ory RAM e In the Load Save Utility or Make Audio CD page select the Wave file you want to edit and then access this Edit WAVE page You cannot edit a Wave file that exceeds 230 400 000 samples 80 minutes at a 48 kHz sample rate ee The sample rates of Wave files that can be edited are the same as the sample rates supported for KSF
213. for your keyboard perfor mance 1 p 96 PG p 149 Settings for the entire TRITON Extreme Global mode How Global mode is structured In Global mode you can make overall settings that apply to the entire TRITON Extreme such as master tune key transpose effect global switch global MIDI channel and system clock In addition you can create user drum kits user arpeggio patterns and scales make settings for the damper pedal and assignable foot switches pedals and specify category names for programs and combinations Song Play mode page structure PO Basic Setup Basic settings for the entire TRITON Extreme Audio input settings for use outside of Sampling mode P1 MIDI MIDI related settings for the entire TRITON Extreme P2 Controller Controller settings for the pedals etc con nected to the rear panel P3 User Scale User registered scale settings Specify 16 octave scales and one all note scale P4 Category Name Edit category names for programs and com binations P5 Drum Kit Edit drum kits P6 User Arpeggio Edit user arpeggio patterns WA For details on how to access each mode and page refer to Basic operation p 13 amp The edits you perform in Global mode will be pre served until the power is turned off but will not be preserved after the power is turned off unless you first save your settings Three types of data are han dled in Global mode user drum kit settings Global P5
214. function that detects the attack of the kick or snare etc in a rhythm loop sample a sample consisting of a looped pattern of drums etc and automatically divides it into separate instrumental sounds Each of the divided instrumental sounds is made into a sample of its own and then automatically expanded into a multisam ple and program Pattern playback data for the Sequencer mode using the divided samples is also created automati cally The time slices sample can be used in the following ways by the song of Sequencer mode e Multiple rhythm loop samples of differing tempo can be matched to the same tempo without changing their pitch e You can change the tempo in realtime without affecting the pitch As an example we will describe how a rhythm loop sam ple can be time sliced in Sampling mode and then how the rhythm loop sample can be played in Sequencer mode You will need to provide rhythm loop samples of drums etc You can either record these on the TRITON Extreme or load them in Media mode Initially you should try this using a one measure pattern in 4 4 time with a fairly sim ple beat and record the pattern as a mono rhythm loop sample For this example we will use a 120 BPM rhythm loop sample Select Sample Select 120 BPM rhythm loop sample note Play back the sample and verify that the beats that you want to loop are played cleanly If they are not played cleanly make the appropriate settings for the
215. g 2 Turning the power off Set the front panel VOLUME slider and the volume of your powered monitor or stereo amp to zero 2 Turn off the power of your powered monitor or stereo amp 3 Press the TRITON Extreme s POWER switch to turn off the power amp Never turn off the power while data is being written into internal memory amp If the power is turned off while processing is being performed memory write operations will not be completed correctly If this occurs TRITON Extreme will automatically initialize its internal memory so that it will operate correctly This is not a malfunction While data is being written the LCD screen will indi cate Now writing into internal memory Data is written into internal memory by the following opera tions e Writing updating a Program Combination Global Setting Drum Kits or Arpeggio Patterns e Loading Program Combination Global Setting Drum Kit or Arpeggio Patterns data in Media mode e Receiving a MIDI data dump for Program Combination Global Setting Drum Kit or Arpeggio Patterns e When using Sampling mode page menu commands Move Sample Move MS Convert To Program Time Slice etc to simultaneously modify programs or drum kits e When sampling to RAM in Program Combination or Sequencer mode if you simultaneously convert the sample to a program amp Never turn off the power while the CompactFlash etc media is
216. gaaa Loop Rev _ 1248 LoopS 6666666 _ Loop Lock Loop Tune 6 End 0092438 O Use Zero rni iiy PME By making the following settings you will be able to resample at the optimal level If 12 dB is not checked Recording Level 0 0 dB P0 Recording Recording page Auto 12 dB On Off unchecked PO Recording Preference page If 12 dB is checked Recording Level 12 dB dB P0 Recording Recording page Auto 12 dB On Off checked PO Recording Preference page 6 In the P8 Insert Effect Routing page you can see that BUS IFX Select is set to IFX1 SAMPLING P8 Insert Effect Ow IFXI No Effect Of IFX2 No Effect OFF IFX3 No Effect Off No Effect OFF F85 Chain BUS Select IF X Indi Out Assign BUSCIFX Select gt GERM Routing Insert IFs IFX IFX IFX IFX FR 1 2 3 d ca 7 In the P8 Insert Effect Insert FX page set IFX1 to 052 Reverb Hall and turn IFX On Off ON SAMPLING P8 Insert Effect Insert FX E a COB au G6 Q G6 C064 C064 7 C064 IFX5 g D 000 No Effect cota Nid EE Press the C2 key and verify that reverb is applied Press the SAMPLING REC key and then the SAM PLING START STOP key The sample assigned to C2 will play automatically and resampling will begin When the sample finishes playing resampling will end The sample that was created by resampling will au
217. ge End If you press the ENTER key three or more times Range Start and Range End will respectively be set to the next to last point at which you pressed the key and the last point at which you pressed the key WA You can use the method described above when the edit cell is located at other than Range Start or Range End If the edit cell is located at Range Start or Range End the setting will be reset each time you press the ENTER key 71 72 A If the edit cell is located at Range Start or Range End this region will play back When you finish making settings press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to stop playback of the audio CD D Verify the region that will be ripped Select either Region Start or Region End the dis play will be highlighted and press the SEQUENCER START STOP key The CD will play from Range Start to Range End and then stop 5 If you want to adjust the location use the VALUE controllers to modify the Range Start or Range End settings or move the cursor to a parameter other than Range Start and Range End and repeat step 6 to make the setting once again If you want to move the track playback start location to the beginning of the track press the LOCATE key When you have finished setting Range Start and Range End select the page menu command Desti nation A dialog box
218. generator The MIDI channel of the external tone generator must match the MIDI Chan nel of the track that is set to EXT EX2 or BTH With a setting of BTH both the external tone generator and TRI TON Extreme s tone generator will sound and be con trolled Ce ES a ye ee Pe LA Drums iBass Keyboar mor te owa Guitar P Guitar P Strings E E E ll Bier Bye Bes Dee Perie rere ere Sei eet SETETE pans Gvsvenneses AE MIDI Channel Se 6i 02 03 a4 05 06 a as i SUNURAN i ee Bank Select when Status EX2 ERE i ei i ee poa jee ne dee doaa jee jiao i Coxa eei oio eei oei aeai geji AasssssasssassassnalaasasacoaasaassasadhanassaasanasaacaaahaassaaasaasaacaasadhasasaaasaansassaaahassaasaaasaaaaassaMhaacsaacsaasaansasalassassaaasassaaaaad If you wish to use the Sequencer mode of the instrument as a 16 track multi timbral tone generator select INT or BTH PG p 72 Synchronizing the sequencer with an external MIDI device The record playback tempo of TRITON Extreme s sequencer can be synchronized to an external MIDI device such as a sequencer or rhythm machine 1 PG p 296 Sa mpling O pen Sampling System Features of sampling on the TRITON Extreme e The TRITON Extreme features our Open Sampling System that lets you use sampling resampling not only in Sampling mode but also in Program Combination and Sequencer modes with functionality optimized for the specific mode that you ar
219. ggiator 95 KMP 113 118 KSC 113 118 KSF 113 118 L L MONO R jacks 6 16 Layer 34 36 LCD screen 4 8 Contrast 7 129 131 Level AUDIO INPUT 6 Drum Kit 92 Multisample 25 LFO 26 28 29 108 141 142 Load Demo song 127 EXB MOSS 128 Factory settings 127 File 121 Jukebox List 87 Template Song 47 LOCATE 5 42 130 Lock function 22 Loop Sample 73 74 Loop All Track 44 Low Pass amp High Pass 27 Low pass filter 27 Low Pass Resonance 27 M Manual punch in 43 Master Effect MFX 30 37 105 106 Master EQ MEQ 105 106 Media 11 13 67 86 113 116 135 Memory protect 115 MENU key 4 13 Metronome 43 58 68 81 MIC LINE switch 6 64 74 81 Microdrive 125 MID 113 MIDI 7 17 45 60 85 135 MIDI Channel 19 35 41 MIDI clock 102 MIDI filter 36 Minus one play 88 Mode 4 10 13 Monitor 6 16 42 68 71 80 125 134 Monophonic 24 35 Multi multitrack recording 44 Multisample 1 24 63 69 78 92 Mute 42 86 N Note Number 23 0 OK button 9 Open Sampling System 2 Option 17 139 Oscillator 12 23 24 Oscillator Mode 12 24 25 Overdub 43 Overwrite 43 p Page 8 13 Page jump menu 9 13 Page menu button 9 Page menu command 9 Pan AUDIO INPUT 107 Combination 34 Program 26 28 29 104 Sampling 75 Sequencer 41 Parameter 13 Pattern Arpeggio pattern 94 98 Pattern Sequencer 40 43 49 50 55 78 PCG 113 118 Performance Editor 23 Pin 8 Pitch 8
220. ght QS p iii and if you accept the terms press the OK button to continue with settings If you do not accept the terms press the Cancel button to cancel the setting Obey Copyright Rules Are you sure MA For the best sound quality adjust the level as high as possible without making the ADC OVERLOAD warning appear 4 For Input1 and Input2 set BUS IFX Indiv Select to specify the destination to which the external audio signal you selected in Input will be sent L R Send to the L R bus IFX1 IFX5 Send to the corresponding insert effect 1 2 3 Tube 4 Tube 1 2 3 4 Tube Send to the jINDI VIDUAL 1 4 1 2 or 3 4 bus es Use Level to adjust the signal level Normally you will set this to 127 Use Pan to specify the stereo posi tion In the Input section COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY MEDIA you can specify the send levels Send1 MFX1 and Send2 MFX2 to master effects 1 and 2 These settings can be made if BUS IFX Indiv Select is L R or Off amp Send1 MFX1 and Send2 MFX2 cannot be set in Sampling mode e The input from the AUDIO INPUT 1 jack is set by Input1 and the input from the AUDIO INPUT 2 jack is set by Input2 e The L channel of the input from the S P DIF IN jack is set by Input1 and the R channel is set by Input2 Example Send the signal from the AUDIO INPUT 1 jack in mono to the L R bus Inputl BUS IFX Indiv
221. ginal programs When the TRITON Extreme is shipped from the fac tory user memory contains 1 344 high quality pro grams that cover a wide range of needs When the EXB MOSS option is installed 128 programs for use with the Korg MOSS tone generator will also be avail able e The TRITON Extreme provides 144 user drum kits as well as 9 ROM drum kits compatible with GM2 The factory settings contain 50 preloaded drum kits that cover a wide range of musical styles You can create your own drum kits by assigning each key to any one of the 1 175 drum samples or to an orig inal sample that you sampled or loaded in from media For the sound assigned to each key you can make filter and amp settings and even route the sound to effects or individual audio outputs e You can easily create programs using multisamples or samples that you yourself sampled resampled or loaded in Media mode You can then use these programs in combinations and songs You can also use samples as drum instruments in a drum kit Combinations e The TRITON Extreme provides 1 536 user combinations Each combination can combine up to eight layered split velocity switched programs together with settings for effects the Valve Force circuit and the two arpeggiators Combinations let you create very complex sounds that could not be produced by a program alone You can also use an external sound module as part of a combination When the TRITON Extreme is shipped user memory
222. gs WA Set the Auto 12 dB On parameter If you check Auto 12 dB On the sample playback level will automatically be increased by 12 dB after sampling The recording level and Auto 12 dB On In Sampling mode you can set this parameter in the PO Recording Preference page SAMPLING P Recording Preference EEk i Create Zone Preference Position E Right to Selected Index Zone Range 12 Keys Original Key Position Bottom REC Sample Preference Auto Loop On __ Auto 12dB On Metronome Setup BUS Output Select gt L R Level 127 king Setup Jl rence M Status In Program Combination and Sequencer modes you can set this parameter using the Sampling page menu command Select Bank amp Smpl No MEDIA The sample will be written to the media If you select MEDIA you can also select the writing destination drive In all modes this is specified by the page menu com mand Select Directory Select Directory Name T TAKENOGG Take No 00 fWAVES Media Select WX CF NEW VOLUME In the Media Select field select the drive Use the Open and Up buttons to move between levels of the directory hierarchy to select the desired directory Press the Done button to finalize the settings i If you sampled to the media as a WAVE file the Auto 12 dB On setting will be ignored The play back level of the WAVE file is set by WAVE File Play
223. h mode and page refer to Basic operation p 13 Saving on media Media Save For details on the data that can be saved on storage media Types of data that can be saved p 113 The Media mode Save page is where you save data to media amp Song data and cue lists in the TRITON Extreme s Sequencer mode as well as multisamples and sam ples cannot be written into internal memory This data will disappear when the power is turned off If you want to keep this data save it to the media described below You can also save other types of data to media When you ve come up with settings you like it s a good idea to save them so that even if you subsequently edit those settings you ll always be able to reload the previous settings if desired Media you can use for saving and loading A card inserted in the CF card slot e CompactFlash Type I Type II Only power supply voltage 5V is supported 16 Mbyte 1 Gbyte e Microdrive Only power supply voltage 5V is supported 1 Gbyte External USB storage media e Hard disk e Removable disk Hard disks and removable disks in MS DOS format FAT16 or FAT32 are supported Capacity recognized FAT32 up to 2 terabytes 2 000 Gbytes FAT16 up to 4 Gbytes e CD R RW This supports UDF format UDF format CD R RW discs can be written or read Packet writing is sup ported PG p 330 You can also record play CD DA audio CD and load ISO 9660 level 1 format data For d
224. he combination to be copied must have been written to memory with the ARPEGGIA TOR ON OFF key turned on Press the OK button to execute the copy Notice that when you execute this command the PLAY REC MUTE setting of each track will be set automatically In the Sequencer P0 Play REC Preference page the Multi REC check box will be checked SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 68 A 001 01 00Q Meter 4 4 J 53 pb Manu S000 NEW SONG preset TRACK 01 a R ae al i ems If you are using the arpeggiator press the ARPEGGIA TOR ON OFF key to turn it off and then turn it on again 3 Begin recording Press the LOCATE key to set the location to 001 01 000 Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key and then press the SEQUENCER START STOP key If you play a B3 note or lower during the pre count before recording the arpeggio pattern will start from the beginning at the moment that recording begins Record your performance 4 When you are finished performing press the SEQUENCER START STOP key If you made a mistake or want to re record you can use the Compare function press the COMPARE key to re record as many times as you want The Multi REC check box will be unchecked when you use Compare so you will need to check it again Caution and other functions in Sequencer mode TRITON Extreme song data and its compatbility The following two types of song data can be lo
225. he following exclusive messages can be realtime recorded e Exclusive messages received from an external MIDI device e Parameter changes in Sequencer mode PG p 101 e Master Volume universal exclusive messages assigned to the foot pedal or a knob Using Put Effect Setting to Track to switch effects The page menu command Put Effect Setting to Track places effect settings into a track as exclusive events As an example we will use the preset template song Acid Jazz to explain how to use the Put Effect Setting to Track page menu command In this example we will switch the insert effect for Track 03 Elec Piano from 023 Stereo Phaser to 020 Stereo Flanger at the beginning of measure 9 We will explain two ways in which you can do this method 1 and method 2 amp This command works by inserting MIDI parameter change system exclusive messages directly into a sequencer track Because this requires a number of messages to be read and processed it can take a little time for the effect to change You may find it neces sary to anticipate where you want the effect change to take place and insert the change slightly earlier Also notes that are already sounding as the transition takes place may not play smoothly amp Only effect type and effect parameter events can be inserted You must use realtime recording to record effect on off settings or bus settings 1 Inserting effect settings at the beginn
226. he upper left of the LCD screen will indicate the selected bank For example to select bank B press the BANK B key The B key lights and the upper left of the LCD screen indicates Bank B Selecting a combination by bank When you press the Combination Select popup button a list of the combinations in each bank will appear allow ing you to choose one of these combinations Refer to the corresponding example for programs on p 20 Selecting a combination by category When you press the Category popup button a list of com bination categories such as keyboard organ bass or drums will appear allowing you to select a combination from a specified category With the factory settings the combinations are organized into sixteen categories Refer to the corresponding example for programs on p 20 Using 10 s HOLD when selecting a combination When you press the 10 s HOLD key to turn on the 10 s HOLD function the LCD screen will indicate ia the ten s digit of the combination number will be held and you will able to switch combinations simply by pressing a single numeric key In this case only the one s place of the number will change You can use the A V keys to switch the ten s place Refer to the corresponding example for programs on p 21 Selecting a combination using a footswitch You can assign the Combination Up Down function to an on off type foot switch such as the optional PS 1 con
227. hen the Status of a track is set to BTH EXT or EXT2 the sequencer of TRITON Extreme can play external tone generators Playback can be synchronized with an external MIDI device TRITON Extreme s AMS Alternate Modulation capability lets you use control changes for realtime control of the parameters of the programs used in a program Its MIDI Sync abilities let you synchronize the LFO speed to changes in the tempo Dmod Dynamic Modulation functionality lets you control effect parameters in realtime You can also use MIDI Sync to synchronize the LFO speed or delay time to changes in the tempo You can assign names not only to the song but also to each pattern and track Combination and Program settings can be copied to a song Sequencer data such as a song or cue list that you cre ate can be saved in TRITON Extreme s native format or transmitted as a MIDI data dump A song you created can be converted into SMF Stan dard MIDI File data SMF songs can also be loaded The PLAY MUTE REC and SOLO On Off let you instantly play mute any desired track on the fly You can rewind or fast forward while listening to the sound The LOCATE key lets you move quickly to a desired location Multisamples you create can be played back together with internal programs in Sequencer mode The Time Slice function of Sampling mode lets you divide a rhythm loop sample and create performance data that corresponds to the di
228. here are two types of patterns preset patterns and user patterns e Preset patterns Patterns suitable for drum tracks are preset in internal memory and can be selected for any song e User patterns Each song can have up to 100 patterns When using a pattern in a different song use the Utility menu commands Copy Pattern or Copy From Song etc to copy the pattern The pattern length can be specified in units of a measure Each pattern consists of musical data for one track It is not possible to create patterns that contain multiple tracks These patterns can be used as track musical data by being placed in a track page menu command Put to Track or copied to a track page menu command Copy to Track Alternatively you can use a pattern with the RPPR func tion of a song Cue List A cue list allows you to playback multiple songs in suc cession The TRITON Extreme allows you to create 20 cue lists Each cue list allows you to connect a maximum of 99 songs in any order and to specify the number of times that each song will repeat The page menu command Convert to Song lets you convert the two or more songs in a cue list into a single song This allows you to use a cue list to create the back ing then convert the cue list into a song and add solo phrases on unused tracks Pattern UOO U99 RPPR Setup P6 Master Effect E 1 2 P9 I I I I Placement Final Master y AUDIO OUTPUT
229. i Ls i Cue list Fy 1 song 000 199 EE 1 user pattern 00 99 es AKAI format Program file Ay AKAI format Sample file Partition 1 user arpeggio 1 user arpeggio pattern ia r m 121 122 6 Navigate to the directory that contains the file you want to load and select the SNG file Press the Open button to move to a lower level or press the Up button to move to a higher level The selected SNG file will be highlighted 6 Press the page menu button to access the page menu and choose Load Selected A dialog box will appear Load NEWFILE SNG Load NEWFILE PCG too Load NEWFILE KSC too PCG Contents gt All Select SNG Allocation C Append Clear Select KSC Allocation O Append Clear The contents and settings of the dialog box will differ depending on the type of file that you are loading 7 Check the Load PCG too check box When you execute loading the PCG file will be loaded along with the SNG file Check the Load KSC too check box When you execute loading the KSC file will be loaded along with the SNG file Use PCG Contents to specify the data that you want to load If you want to load all the data in the PCG file select All Use Select SNG Allocation to specify the destina tion to which the song data will be loaded Append will load the song into the song number that follows the song
230. ight and allows you to produce com plex sounds that could not be created by an individual program You can choose combinations from rewritable banks A E and H N which contain a total of 1 536 combina tions Sample or resample For example you can sample an external audio source while listening to the performance of the arpeggiators or resample a performance you play using a combina tion Edit a combination Make settings for volume pan layer split etc for each timbre program and make settings for effects valve force and the two arpeggiators PROGRAM Insert Master Effect Pee Multisample H Drum Kit Valve Force Cixi Multisample L IFX 2 MFX 2 erren fureni AMP1 IFX 3 IFX 4 Multisample H IFX 5 Valve Force Multisample L Arpeggiator PITCH2 IFILTER2 AMP2 COMBINATION TIMBRE 1 PROGRAM TIMBRE 2 _ Procram TIMBRE 3 _ Procram TIMBRE 4 C Procram TIMBRE 5 PRrocram TIMBRE 6 TIMBRE 7 _ PRrocram TIMBRE 8 _ PRrocram e eee ee e Insert Master Effect Valve Force C Fx mFx1 C Fx2 _ MFx2_ C IFx4 MEQ Fx5 Valve Force Arpeggiator A d Arpeggiator B d Q H SEQUENCER SONG PLAY Insert Master Effect TRACK 1 PROGRAM TRACK 9 PROGRAM Valve Force TRACK 2 PROGRAM TRACK 10 Program C_IFX1 __MFX1_ PI PI IFX 2 MFX
231. iler or other device Programs combinations global settings user drum kits and user arpeggio patterns Songs cue lists ZS For details on MIDI data dump refer to PG p 163 About preloaded data and preset data Preloaded data refers to the data that is loaded in the TRITON Extreme when it is shipped from the factory You are free to rewrite this data and with the exception of the demo songs the data will be written to the location listed in Writing to internal memory All of this data is stored in the TRITON Extreme s ROM Preset data is data that cannot be rewritten by the Write operation This includes the following data Program banks A D H M 000 127 N 000 063 Combination banks A D H M 000 127 User drum kits 000 A B 045 I 128 User 131 User User arpeggio patterns U000 A B U488 User Demo songs S000 S002 Program banks G g 1 g 9 g d 001 128 Preset drum kits 144 GM 152 GM Preset arpeggio patterns P000 P004 Preset template songs P00 P15 Preset patterns P000 P149 113 114 Writing to internal memory Writing a program or combination The programs or combinations that you create by using the Performance Editor or by editing parameters in the various Edit pages can be saved in the internal memory of the TRITON Extreme This action is referred to as writing a program or writing a combination If you want your edited data to be preserved after the power
232. ill not appear 3 In the LCD screen press the desired page You will jump to the selected page and it will appear in the display As an example here press P1 Edit Basic e Asa reminder the page that was selected before you pressed the MENU key will have its top right corner bent over e You can also jump to the corresponding page by pressing a numeric key 0 9 PO P9 correspond to numeric keys 0 9 e By holding down the MENU key and pressing a numeric key 0 9 you can jump directly to the corresponding page without displaying the page jump menu PROGRAM P1 Edit Basic Program Basic EEk Oscillator Mode Yoice Assign Mode O Single Poly O Single Trigger Double i ELedals O Drums O Hold Scale Type gt Equal Temperament Key P C Random OSC Velo Contro Basic M Basic Jl Zone ler 4 WA When you press the EXIT key you will return to PO from any page 4 Press one of the tabs located at the bottom of the page As an example here press the OSC Basic tab which is the second from the left PROGRAM P1 Edit Basic OSC1 Multisample High Piano _ S 0ffset _ Rev Lvl 127 Octave 8 21 gt EEEESGEeeena Transpose 00 Low P Piano _ S offset _ Rev Lvl 127 Tune 9000 P 992 A Piano BD mf L Delay 2GGms OSC2 Multisample High Piano _ S 0ffset _ Rev Lvl 127 Octave 8 8 P 991 A Piano BD ff R Low P Piano _ S 0ffset _ Rev L l 127 Tune
233. ing Program Combination and Sequencer modes pressing this key after pressing the SAMPLING REC key will either cause sampling to begin or it will access the sample ready mode In the Sampling P1 Sample Edit page pressing this key will sound the selected sample This key is also used to play back a WAVE file from the media This function can be used in the directory window of various Media mode pages in the Media mode Make Audio CD page and in the Select Directory page menu dialog box of the Program Combination Sequencer and Sampling modes 16 Valve cover A 12AU7 ECC82 vacuum tube a k a valve is built in amp The valve cover may break if subjected to impact Be particularly careful not to subject it to direct impact since this may also break the vacuum tube If the valve cover breaks have it repaired immediately since failing to do so may cause the vacuum tube or other parts to malfunction 17 Sample memory RAM slot cover You can open this cover and install SIMM boards to expand the sample memory RAM A maximum of three 32 Mbyte SIMM boards can be installed as sample mem ory RAM PG p 321 18 Headphone jack A set of headphones can be connected here stereo 1 4 jack This allows stereo monitoring of the same signal as the OUTPUT L MONO and R jacks Rear panel 1 AC power supply connector Connect the included power supply cable here After connecting the power supply cable t
234. ing in Program In the P1 Edit Basic P9 Edit Master Effect pages you can mode p 80 QS p 22 You can also apply the TRI modify the sound by editing the various parameters of the TON Extreme s effects to an external audio input for program you selected in PO Play a wide range of possibilities p 107 111 Program structure and corresponding pages Controller P Basic P1 1 rogram Basic Setup Arpeggi OSC1 LFO1 P5 1 OSC1 LFO2 P5 2 ator P7 Master z Valve _ Effect r PH Force 1 Routing P8 1 1 2 P9 I P9 1 I I Placement I i Final y OSC Basic P1 2 3 Filter1 A B P3 1 Amp1 Level Pan P4 1 ingert Master 1 AUDIO OUTPUT 4 0SC1 2 A F T SPa EQ P9 L MONO R I I I OSC1 Pitch Mod P2 1 Filter1 Mod P3 2 Amp1 Mod P4 2 AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL T Insert Effect Fiter LFO Mod P3 3 Master Effect Individual Output Filter EG P3 4 Amp1 EG P4 3 Placement Insert Use Indiv 3 4 BUS Pitch EG P2 3 lt j Oscillator Pitch gt lt 4 _ Filter _ gt _ lt Amplifier gt lt 4____ _ _ _ Effect P1 1 and P2 2 etc indicate the page tab screens used when editing on the TRITON Exterme 19 20 Playing a program PO Play Here you can select and play progra
235. ing of the song and ata specified measure For the insert effect IFX3 used by track 3 we will use 023 Stereo Phaser for measures 1 through 8 as specified by the template song and then switch to 020 Stereo Flanger for measures 9 and following by using the page menu command Put Effect Setting to Track to insert MIDI parameter change system exclusive messages 1 Enter Sequencer mode and use Song Select to choose song S000 2 Use the page menu command Load Template Song to load Acid Jazz SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 68 661 01 960 Meter 4 4 J 108 gt Manu EIS 000 Acid Jazz ck 3 Elec Piano esol i Bi flac A Eiras Graan laa Dusza Pki Dresi wa 3 Use Track Select to select Track 03 Elec Piano and record a performance as desired QS p 26 4 In Sequencer P8 Insert Effect choose page menu command Put Effect Setting to Track to open the dialog box Put Effect Setting MIDI Exclusive to Track Effect gt EE To Song 868 Track 83 Measure 661 Beat Tick 01 000 6 Specify the effect for which you will insert an exclu sive message and specify the location at which it will be inserted Effect IFX3 To Song 000 Track 03 Measure 001 Beat Tick 01 000 6 Press the OK button T Specify the effect that you will use for measure 9 and the measures that follow In the Sequencer P8 Insert Effect Insert FX
236. is turned off you must write it There are two ways to write a program or combination amp Before you write data into memory you must turn off the memory protect setting in Global mode Memory protect amp A combination does not contain the actual program data for each timbre but simply remembers the num ber of the program used by each timbre If you edit a program that is used by a combination or exchange it with a different program number the sound of the combination will also change Using a page menu command to write 1 Select the page menu command Write Program or Write Combination The Write Program Write Combination dialog box will appear ff You can also access the same dialog box by holding down the ENTER key and pressing the 0 key The screen shown is for Program mode Write Program ABO BD Grand Concert Category 00 Keyboard 2 Check the program combination name displayed in the upper line the writing source 3 If you wish to change the name of the program com bination press the text edit button The text dialog box will appear Input the name of the program combination Assigning a name Rename After you have input the name press the OK button to return to the Write Program Write Combination dialog box 4 In Category specify the category of the program combination In the case of a program the category you specify here will be used
237. is turned on but the LCD screen does not display normally or an error message is displayed There is no sound when you play the keyboard and the TRITON Extreme does not function normally L This type of problem may occur if a data writing operation to internal memory was not completed correctly for example if the power of the TRITON Extreme was turned off while a program or other data was being written If this occurs use the following procedure to initialize the TRITON Extreme s internal memory Turn off the power 2 Hold down the MENU key and the 9 key and turn on the power The TRITON Extreme will be initialized and data will be written into internal memory While the data is being written the LCD screen will indicate Now writ ing into internal memory After initialization all user data will be empty and you will need to re load the preload data Execute the Glo bal mode page menu command Load Preload Demo Data to load the data p 127 Can t operate the LCD screen correctly In Global PO Basic Setup execute the Touch Panel Calibration page menu command to adjust the sensitivity of the touch panel PG p 157 _ If it is not possible to select this command from the page menu enter Global mode PO press the MENU key and then press the 0 or EXIT key to access this and then hold down the ENTER key and press numeric key 3 to display the dialog box Can t switch modes o
238. ist1 4 Use the text edit button to enter a name for the juke box list p 115 5 Press the OK button The jukebox list will be saved to the media Loading procedure 1 In the Jukebox page select a jukebox list filename extension JKB 2 Press the Load Jukebox List page menu command The jukebox list will be loaded into the TRITON Extreme 87 88 Playing along with SMF data Minus one play You can enjoy minus one play by playing back SMF data muting a specific part and playing that part your self Playback the SMF data identify the track whose part you wish to play and stop playback p 86 2 In PO Prog Mix select the Prog 1 8 tab or Prog 9 16 tab 3 Use Play Track Select to select the track for the part that you want to play from the keyboard When you play the keyboard the program of the selected track will be heard SONG PLAY P Prog Mix Program 161 68 001 61 600 Meter 4 4 J 129 _ Jukebox File gt AAA SONG_GB1 Name SONG_ 81 Plau gt Eee eae GGG1 Acoustic Piano 4 Press the PLAY MUTE button to set the track selected in step 3 to MUTE If you want the musical data of the track to playback in addition to your own playing on the keyboard set Play Mute to PLAY 6 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to begin playback and play along on the keyboard with the song Arpeggiator You can use the arpeggiator
239. ked it will correspond to the pitch of the first note you play For steps 01 08 make settings for Pitch Offset Gate Velocity and Flam Pitch Offset This offsets the pitch of the arpeggio note in semitones up or down You can input the same tone for each step and change the Pitch Offset value for each to create a melody using a single tone Melody pattern Gate Specifies the length of the arpeggio note for each step With a setting of Legato the note will con tinue sounding either until the next note of the same tone or until the end of the pattern With a setting of Off the note will not sound Velocity Specifies the strength of the note With a setting of Key the note will sound at the strength with which it was actually played amp The Gate and Velocity settings you make here will be valid if the Gate and Velocity parameters Program P7 Edit Arpeggiator Arpeg Setup page of the program selected in Program mode are set to Step If these parameters have a setting other than Step the Gate and Velocity that were specified for each individual step will be ignored and all notes of the arpeggio will sound according to the settings in Program P7 Edit Arpeggiator Be sure to verify the settings of the program amp Set the Gate and Velocity by using the ARPEG GIATOR GATE and VELOCITY knobs to the cen ter positio
240. l AUDIO INPUT jack Analog signal _ Ripping Analog signal S P DIF IN jack gt DAC gt Valve Force b Placement Analog signal Insert Use Indiv 3 4 BUS Used by combinations and songs ualll Program RAM SIMM memory 16 MB expandable to 96 MB Sample 0000 3999 tive pitch ranges to avoid any unnatural sounds during playback All of the instrumental sounds in the TRITON Extreme s internal preset ROM multisamples are constructed in this way For example you might record one sample per octave and assign each of these samples to an index key board area By assigning multiple samples such as phrase samples or rhythm loops to a multisample and arranging them across the keyboard you can play multiple samples simulta neously Since a different phrase could be assigned to each key you can perform just as though you were using a pad type sampler Alternatively these samples could be assigned at one octave intervals and played as phrase variations with different playback pitches The TRITON Extreme can hold a maximum of 1 000 mul tisamples in its internal memory A multisample can be selected as the oscillator for a pro gram and played as a program In a combination they can be combined with preset programs and used in a multi They can be used with the arpeggiator to produce interesting results for example by using the arpeggiator to automatically play sound effects or spoken sampl
241. l need to edit the samples note If you want to edit hold down the ENTER key and select the Index that is assigned to the note that you want to edit This portion of the waveform display will be highlighted Then you can make adjustments by adjusting Start or End and by using Divide to separate or Link to combine amp PG p 128 6 Press the Save button The Save Samples amp MS dialog box will appear Here you can save the time sliced samples and the multisample At this time set the items in the Save With area to spec ify the conversion destination for the program that will use the samples and multisample and for the perfor mance data track or pattern that will be used in Sequencer mode to recreate the rhythm loop sample e If you want to create the performance data in a track Turn Program and Seq Event On checked Program E101 Track On Song 000 Track 01 Meter 4 4 Start Measure 001 Time 008 Save Samples amp MS Beat 64 Source BPM 126 Time Stretch i Ratio 100 00 New BPM 120 YJ Program E101 InitialProgiE101 v Seq Event Track C Pattern Song 908 Track 81 Meter 4 4 Times HA Start Measure 881 Press the Save button to save the data You will return to the dialog box of step e If you want to create the performance data in a pattern In order to audition the performance data as it would be if created as a pattern press the
242. lated settings P1 MIDI eeeeeeees 90 Pedal and other controller settings P2 Controller 90 Creating original scales P3 User Scale 91 Drum kit settings P5 Drum Kit sssesesessesesesseresesseseses 92 Arpeggiator settings P7 Edit Arpeggiator 0 94 Effect and Valve Force settingS 000 103 Routing settings and effect settings 104 Valve Force SEMINE Sonne I 109 Loading and saving data creating audio CDs and editing Wave files Media mode etc ssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna L L3 Types of data that can be saved ou eee eens 113 Writing to internal MEMOTY cece eeeeeeeeeeeee 114 The pages of Media mode fenstecvrat natincatioebeosemaye 116 Saving on media Media Save oo eee eee eeseeeeeeeees 117 File copying deleting and formatting Media TUUES Jeips tot obtained nA 119 Loading data Media Load se ssssessesesesseseseeseseseeses 121 Use sampled Wave files to create an audio CD and play it Media Make Audio CD Play Audio CD 123 Editing a Wave file Media Edit WAVE 125 Viewing information about media Media Media MiO spiria sus ain ansnesncasuetebaceneensaseaces eatsarns 125 Handling CompactFlash and Microdrive media 125 Restoring the factory SettingS s02L27 Restoring the factory settings cee eee eeeeeeees 127 Loading the EXB MOSS Gata wesiastwntciicness 128 O ther FUNCTIONS sssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn L2Q Setting
243. lay sound will disap pear The input level to the effect can be controlled by the joystick As you move the joystick away from yourself the delay sound will gradually increase PROGRAM P8 Edit Insert Effect L C R BPM Delay BPM 126 L Delay Base Note Jf C Delay Base Note J IFX1 a Time Over gt Level 20 Level 26 Level 20 Times x3 Times x1 R Delay Base Note J Times x1 Feedback C Delay 10 Sre orf Amt 8 High Damp 8 a Low Damp 5 5 Input Level Dmod 188 src PER Spread 56 Wet Dry 58 50 Sre off Amt 8 4 FX 1 2 3 d 5 Using Dmod to modify the feedback level from SW 1 key In P1 Edit Basic select the Controller Setup page and set the function of SW1 to SW1 Mod CC 80 Toggle 6 Return to P8 Set Feedback Src to SW 1 CC 80 7 Set Amt to 30 PROGRAM P8 Edit Insert Effect L C R BPM Delay BPM 126 L Delay Base Note C Delay Base Note R Delay Base Note Feedback C Delay High Damp IFX1 a Time Over gt Level 20 Level 26 Times x1 Level 20 sre Sw 1 CC 80 Amt EE Low Damp a Times x3 Times x1 Input Level Dmod 166 Spread 50 Wet Dry s s Sre off Amt 0 Ai a When you move the joystick away from yourself and press the SW1 key the feedback level will increase and the delay sound will continue for a longer time The Amt setting specifies the feedback le
244. led While watching the level meter adjust Recording Level as high as possible without allowing CLIP to appear p 65 _ If you are inputting to the S P DIF IN jack are the level of the output device and the Recording Level set appropriately If CLIP appears adjust the Recording Level slider Is the system clock set correctly If cyclic click noise is occurring check that you have selected the System Clock that is being input PG p 158 Noise or oscillation is heard When using an effect on the external audio source being input from AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 oscillation may occur depending on the type of effect or on the parameter settings Please adjust the input level output level and effect parameters You need to be particularly careful when using a high gain effect After a sample edit has been executed or after a stereo sample has been recorded a small noise may be heard This has no effect on the audio data that was edited or sampled _ When using the BPM MIDI Sync function to control the delay time of an effect noise may occur in the delay sound This noise is due to discontinuities in the delay sound and is not a malfunction Some effects such as 015 St Analog Record generate noise intentionally It is also possible to create oscillation using a 24 dB oct LPF filter with resonance These are not malfunctions If you use Valve Force with
245. lues when the song or RPPR function finishes playing the pattern or when playback is halted 00 zero 00 eo 00 zero Using the arpeggiator for pattern recording If the arpeggiator is set to operate for the track that is selected for Track Select you can turn on the ARPEG GIATOR ON OFF key and record the performance of the arpeggiator into the pattern For details on arpeggiator settings refer to p 96 and PG p 93 Song editing methods A variety of editing operations can be performed on a song Song editing In addition to copying and renaming a song other opera tions such as Delete can be performed from the Utility menu commands in pages such as Sequencer PO Play REC PG p 58 Track editing You can move insert delete individual events of data such as the notes and control changes in a MIDI track and copy move insert delete specified measures or tracks Use the Sequencer P5 Track Edit Track Edit page menu commands to perform these editing operations PG p 79 Pattern editing Using the page menu commands of the Sequencer P6 Pat tern RPPR Pattern page you can use event editing to modify the recorded data or insert new data and execute commands to delete copy or bounce patterns PG p 89 RO The explanations in the sections that follow are based on an example of editing a song Create a song of sev eral measures as described in QS p 24 We will describe various examples of editing operati
246. lve Force If you want to send a multisample through Valve Force and resample the result refer to the example of applying an insert effect p 70 In step p 70 set BUS IFX Select to 3 Tube 4 Tube or 3 4 Tube and then resample SAMPLING P8 Insert Effect Routing aa IF81 No Effect OFF IFx2 No Effect OF IFXS No Effect OF HFxd No Effect OFF FXS Chain BUS Select IF X Indiv Out ae BUSCIFX Select gt 3 4 i Insert IF IF IF IF IF Fx 1 2 3 d a Valve Force settings for AUDIO INPUT In Program Combination Sequencer Song Play and Media modes you can send an external audio input from the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 or S P DIF IN jacks through Valve Force and output the result This is specified by the Input COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY MEDIA the setting is common to each of these modes p 107 step As an example here we will explain the settings for Pro gram mode Press the VALVE FORCE ON OFF key to turn Valve Force on The key will light Placement 2 Access the Program P9 Master Effect VALVE page 3 Use Placement to specify the placement of the Valve Force circuit p 109 step In Out amp You can t use Valve Force on the L R output from S P DIF nor when resampling the L R output in the various modes 4 Specify the input output destination for the Valve Force circuit If Placement Final The external audio source input to the L R
247. mally you will leave this set to 001 01 000 to return you to the beginning of the song Monitoring just a specific track Muting just a specific track Solo Mute functions The TRITON Extreme provides a Solo function that lets you listen to only specific tracks and a Mute function that can silence specific tracks These functions can be used in various ways For example you can intentionally mute or solo specific tracks or listen only to the rhythm section of the previously recorded tracks while you record new tracks Let s try out the Mute and Solo functions C Load a song As described on QS p 2 load the demo songs and select any song 2 Access the Sequencer P0 Play REC Program T01 08 T09 16 page Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key 3 Press track 1 PLAY MUTE REC The display will change from PLAY to MUTE and the playback of track 1 will no longer be heard In this way the mute function allows you to silence a speci fied track until the track is un muted Press track 2 PLAY MUTE REC The display will change and the playback of track 2 will also be muted To cancel muting press PLAY MUTE REC once again 4 Press track 1 SOLO ON OFF The display will change from SOLO OFF to SOLO ON and this time only the performance of track 1 will be heard To play back only a specified track by itself in this way is known as soloing the track turn ing S
248. mance played on the TRITON Extreme can be mixed with the external audio source and sampled or you can sample just the external audio source while monitoring the performance played on the TRITON Extreme The master effects can also be applied to the signal being sampled e In Sequencer mode when you sample an external audio source while listening to the playback of the song note data will be automatically created in the track This In Track Sampling function lets you sample vocals or guitar while you play the sequencer just as if you were recording on a multi track recorder e Song playback in Sequencer mode can be resampled to media You can use Media mode to edit the song order and burn your songs to an audio CD in a CD R RW drive connected to the USB A connector 61 62 Editing in Sampling mode e In Sampling mode the sample data you sampled or loaded from various media including WAVE and AIFF formats can be assigned to an index zone to create a multisample e The waveform can be viewed in the LCD screen and edited by a variety of waveform editing commands that include rate convert down sampling and reverse playback e Start loop start and end addresses can be specified in units of a single sample Loop tune reverse playback and loop lock functions are also supported e The Use Zero function automatically searches for zero cross points making it easy to find the beginning or end of the waveform or
249. many as 999 measures per song e Up to 20 cue lists can be created A cue list is an arrangement of up to 99 songs that will be played as a chain You can specify the number of times that each song will repeat A cue list can also be converted into a single song e The arpeggiator function can be used during play back or recording e The RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording func tion can be used during playback or recording e Sixteen different template songs are built in and con tain program and effect settings suitable for various musical styles Up to sixteen original templates that you create can be saved as user template songs e Five stereo insert effects two master effects stereo master EQ and a Valve Force can be used for each song e Timing resolution is a maximum of J 192 e Sixteen tracks are provided for MIDI data and a mas ter track contains time signature and tempo data that controls the playback e A track play loop function lets you loop specified measures independently for each track e 150 preset patterns ideal for drum tracks are built in In addition you can create up to 100 user patterns for each song These patterns can be used as musical data within a song or can be played by the RPPR function e Various methods of recording are supported includ ing realtime recording in which your performance on the keyboard and controllers including MIDI control events MIDI exclusive messages is recorded jus
250. mber of repeats for each song e You can use a maximum of 20 cue lists 200 songs and 100 preset patterns One song can use as many as 100 patterns e The TRITON Extreme can be used as a 16 part multitimbral tone generator e Perform using the RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording function and adjust the various settings Song Play mode e SME Standard MIDI File data can be played back from a media and you can perform along with the playback e Make effect and valve force settings for use in Song Play mode e The arpeggiator can be used while you play along with the SMF playback e SME songs can be played back in succession You can use the jukebox function to playback songs in any specified order Sampling mode e Sample external audio sources i e record samples Insert effects valve force can be applied to the external input sound while you sample e Edit the waveform data you sampled or waveform data that you loaded in from media and set loop points etc e Edit multisamples consisting of two or more samples e A multisample can be converted into a program so that a multisample created in Sampling mode can be used in the Program Combination Sequencer or Song Play modes e Rip directly sample digital data from an audio CD in a CD R RW drive connected to the USB A connector You can also play back audio CDs Global mode Make settings that affect the entire TRITON Extreme such as master t
251. menu command Rename Drum Kit p 115 116 amp If you turn off the power before writing the data into memory your edits will be lost Memory in Global mode p 116 amp When you play the keyboard in Global mode the TRITON Extreme will sound as in the previous mode in which you were previously Be aware that if you moved from Sampling mode to Global mode in a state where the sample memory RAM contained no data such as immediately after the power is turned on playing the keyboard will not produce sound amp When you move from Sequencer to Global mode playing the keyboard will sound the program or arpeggiator that corresponds to the global MIDI channel set in Global P1 amp The settings that you edit in Global mode are pre served as long as the power remains on but will be lost if not written to memory before the power is turned off The data handled in Global mode can be classified into three types user drum kit settings Global P5 user arpeggio pattern settings Global P6 and all other global settings Global PO P4 Each of these three types of data can be written into the memory area This data can also be saved to various types of media in Media mode p 116 117 amp Global mode does not provide a Compare function that lets you make before and after comparisons of your editing Before editing user drum kits or user arpeggio patterns you may wish to use Copy Drum Kit or Copy Arpeggio P
252. mmand Copy From Song Copy Song From gt SGGB Acid Jazz All O Without Track Pattern Events A dialog box will appear Select the song that you want to copy i e the copy source If you select All all song settings and playback data will be copied from that song If you select Without Track Pattern Events set tings other than Play Loop and RPPR will be copied For this example select All Press the OK button to execute the copy As described in steps and create one more new song S002 and copy song S000 to it 2 Naming a song Here s how to assign a name to a song you created 1 Choose Song Select to select a song For this example select song 002 2 In the Sequencer PO Play REC Program T01 08 page select the page menu command Rename Song Rename Song SAZ T Acid Jazz A dialog box will appear Press the text edit button to access the text dialog box Press the Clear button and input CHORUS p 115 When you are finished inputting the name press the OK button Press the OK button once again to execute the Rename operation 3 As described in steps 1 and 2 assign a name of INTRO to S000 and VERSE to S001 3 Setting the number of measures in the song Here s how to specify the number of measures in the song By default this is set to 64 measures If you realtime record for more measures than this the song length will be the amount o
253. mp For cautions on the Save to No and Overwrite check boxes refer to About Overwrite PG p 119 The grid display The page menu command Grid overlays the waveform display with a grid based on the BPM tempo value This makes it easy to make loop settings that are synchronized to the tempo ZS In the same way the grid display can also be used in P1 Sample Edit page The grid can help you to edit the waveform in sync with the tempo 4 Select the page menu command Grid The following dialog box will appear On O off Resolution gt A Turn Grid On set the desired Resolution and press the OK button Dotted grid lines will appear Start gagaaaa Loop _ Rev _ 1246 Loop S 8668066 _ Loop Lock Loop Tune 00 i End 0046470 y Use Zero Grid BE 2 Set Grid to the desired BPM tempo value i In PO Input Setup you can use the tap tempo func tion to set the tempo Press the ENTER key several times while the sample plays and the corresponding tempo will be set for Metronome Precount Setting Grid to this value will make it easy to set the BPM setting 74 3 Set the end address so that it coincides with a dotted line of the grid This will cause the loop interval to be the same length as the BPM value The grid display will be based at LoopS Loop Start if looping is on If looping is off the grid will be based at
254. mple Time A min 14 714sec Sample Mode gt Stereo Record Input Prefe Memory ing Setup Jl rence Jl Status WA Lets take a look at the settings that were made auto matically Input1 BUS IFX Indiv Select Off Input 2 BUS IFX Indiv Select Off Input from the INPUT 1 2 jacks is turned off Source BUS L R The sound sent to the L R will be sampled Trigger Sampling START SW After you ve pressed the SAMPLING REC key to enter sampling ready mode resampling will begin when you press the SAMPLING START STOP key Resample Auto The sample assigned to the index will be resampled automatically Key C2 Use Key to specify the sample that will be resam pled Recording Level 12 0 This is the default setting for resampling Save to RAM The data will be written to sample memory RAM Sampling Mode Stereo The sound of the internal L R channels will be sam pled in stereo Auto 12dB On On The 12 dB setting will automatically be turned on for the samples you record BUS IFX Select IFX1 The output of the sample will be sent to IFX1 step amp Be aware that if you change the BUS setting from Off to L R or IFX1 5 the volume level sent to the AUDIO OUT L MONO and R jacks and the head phones may rise excessively 6 In P2 Loop Edit check the 12 dB setting SAMPLING P2 Loop Edit Start aga
255. mpled data will be written to media Mode Stereo The sound of the internal L R channels will be sam pled in stereo 83 84 6 Select the page menu command Select Directory and specify the destination to which the WAVE file will be written Select Directory Name T TAKENOGG y Take No 00 fWAVES gt CF NEW YOLUME Use media select and the Open and Up buttons to select the directory in which the WAVE file will be saved If you want to create a new directory access the Media mode Utility page and execute the page menu com mand Create Directory Press the text edit button to access the text edit dialog box and input a filename up to six characters Leave Take No checked The number at the right of Take No will be input as the last two characters of the filename This number will increment each time you sample ensuring that the filename will not be the same even if you sample repeatedly After you have made the settings press the Done but ton to close the dialog box D Set Sample Time to the length that you want to sample Set this to a length slightly greater than the length of the song Set the recording level Press the SAMPLING REC key amp It will take between several seconds to nearly a minute from the moment you press the SAMPLING REC key until the TRITON Extreme enters standby mode i e until the SAMPLING REC ke
256. ms You can use the Performance Editor to make simple edits and also make settings for the arpeggiator external audio input and sampling Selecting a program There are three ways to select a program For the proce dure refer to the appropriate page e Using the controls of the TRITON Extreme Selecting by bank program number Selecting by program category Selecting by using 10 s Hold e Using a connected switch e Receiving MIDI program change messages Selecting a program on the TRITON Extreme Selecting by bank program number Make sure that Program Select is selected If it is not selected access the PROGRAM P0 Play page and press the Program Select area to highlight it Category PROGRAM P Play popup button Category b 8 keyboard Performance Edit Program Select popup button HIFXIGGS St Graphic TEQ KnoblE Cutoff 2 090 Fianobody Damper Eknob2B KMod2 i Program 3 aknob3b Khoda i Select MF G16 Stereo Chorus d000 Ho Effect Knob KModd IMF He G52 Reverb Hall KIFS G88 Ho Effect Performance Editor bbb bbb Oetave Pitch Ose Amp Attack Decay IFs HF Stretch Balance Level Time Time Balance Balance 2 Use the VALUE controllers to select the program number that you wish to play You can use the following methods to select a program e Turn the VALUE dial e Press the A or V key e Use numeric keys 0 9 to specify the number and press the ENTER key 3
257. n it is not necessary to specify Set Length in the dialog box that appears The number of measures in the con verted song will be used Press the OK button and the Convert Cue List dialog box will appear Convert Cue List C98 to Song To Song PEASE 3 Press the OK button The cue list will be converted into a song Access the PO Play REC page select the song number that you specified as the conversion destination and check the results SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 63 Aa 661 61 6966 Meter 474 120 gt Auto S003 NEW CUELIST 00 P Trackas Lead Synth Reso ql Hi UO RPPR fate Sas zd Plnszel hens PI veal D kos7 D iPercussiiTsunami Espress LE H Creating and recording RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Record This section explains how to assign a pattern to RPPR and how to play and record QS p 3 Performing with the RPPR function Creating RPPR data C Create a new song p 50 8 p 2 Specify the program for each track For this example we will use a template song Use the Utility menu command Load Template Song to load P14 Hip Hop Rap It is not necessary to copy the pat terns QS p 24 3 Select the Sequencer P6 Pattern RPPR RPPR Setup page In this page the RPPR function is automatically turned on SEQUENCER P6 Pattern RPPR P 5004 Hip Hop Rap P Tracka Drums RPPR Setup aa J 996 JG6S HipHop Kit RPPR Setup KEY a A
258. n 12 o clock PROGRAM P Edit Arpeggiator Arpeg Setup Arpeggiator Tempo J 126 Arpeggiator Setup Pattern gt US 6 User ArpeggioPatSa6 Octave Resolution b Key Sync O Keyboard Gate Step Sort velocity Step UO Latch 000 1 To change the user arpeggio pattern name use the 8 peg810 p Rename Arpeggio Pattern page menu command p 115 2 If you wish to save the edited user arpeggio pattern to internal memory be sure to Write the user arpeggio pattern p 116 If you turn off the power without writing the edited contents will be lost 3 If you wish to save the state of the program at the same time return to Program mode and write the pro gram amp p 114 Other examples of creating a user arpeggio pattern Melody pattern Set Step No to 01 and press the 0 key Set Pitch Offset to 00 2 Set Step No to 02 and press the 0 key Set Pitch Offset to 10 3 Set Step No to 03 and press the 0 key Set Pitch Offset to 00 4 Set Step No to 04 and press the 0 key Set Pitch Offset to 00 6 Set Step No to 05 and press the 0 key Set Pitch Offset to 12 6 For Step No 06 do not enter a tone 99 100 T Set Step No to 07 and press the 0 key Set Pitch Offset to 00 Set Step No to 08 and press the 0 key Set Pitch Offset to
259. n each mode Effect settings for a program Routing C In Program P8 Edit Insert Effect select the Routing page PROGRAM P8 Edit Insert Effect Routing aa IFx1 Stereo Compressor On HFX2 No Effect OF FX3 No Effect OF HFxd No Effect SOF HFXS No Effect sO Chain H ee mh BUS Select IF X Indiv Out Assign all oscs to gt OSC MFX Send nr gayi Je Ss rv see eR Eve y ee Sens se oe amp cm gaari Jos ea St Po at te PFY Kaea FX 2 Use BUS Select IFX Indiv Out Assign to specify the bus insertion effect to which the output of the oscillator will be sent L R Send the output to the L R bus Instead it is sent to AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO and R after the Master EQ IFX1 5 The signal is sent to Insert Effects IFX 1 2 3 4 En 1 2 3 Tube 4 Tube 1 2 3 4 Tube The signal is sent to AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 Tube 4 Tube p 109 Off The output will not be sent to the L R bus IFX1 5 buses or 1 4 Tube buses Choose the Off setting if you want to connect the oscillator output to a master effect in series Use Send 1 to MEFX1 and Send 2 to MFX2 to adjust the send level OSC MFX Send specifies the send level from each oscillator to the master effects This can be set only when BUS Select IFX Indiv Out Assign is either L R or Off If BUS Select IFX Indiv Out Assign is set to IFX1 5 the send level to the master effects is set by Send
260. nctions correctly please adjust the polarity and the half damper sensitivity PG p 157 165 9 ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack An optional on off foot switch such as the Korg PS 1 foot switch can be connected here In Global mode you can specify the function of this switch For example you can use it as a modulation con troller to select programs or combinations to start stop the sequencer or to set the tap tempo p 90 PEDAL jack An optional Korg EXP 2 or XVP 10 expression pedal can be connected here Its function can be assigned in Global mode allowing you to use the pedal to control the volume etc p 90 10 Contrast adjustment knob This adjusts the contrast of the LCD screen The optimal setting will depend on the height or angle from which you view the screen display so please adjust as necessary 11 CF card slot You can insert a CompactFlash or Microdrive into this slot The power must be off when inserting or removing media For details on how to handle these types of media refer to p 125 Eject button After making sure that the TRITON Extreme s power is turned off press this button to remove the media If the media does not eject when you press this button do not attempt to remove the media by force Contact a nearby musical instrument dealer Names and functions of objects in the LCD screen The TRITON Extreme uses Korg s TouchView graphical user interface By touching objects displayed
261. nd the end address in End Select Start highlighted and use the VALUE dial or other VALUE controllers to modify the value The corresponding vertical line will move Set LoopS Loop Start and End in the same way In the exam ple shown below Start is set immediately before the first waveform LoopS Loop Start is set immedi ately before the second waveform and End is set as desired Start LoopS Loop Start End note By using the ZOOM button you can change the range that is displayed When S Start is highlighted zoom will be performed from the start address 73 e LoopS 0024952 _ Loop Lock Loop Tune 00 z00M gt End 9950000 V Use Zero ori 24 8PM wwe seeneeeneneeeeneeeeeeees annaanassaasaaasaacnassassaannaaaal RG If the Use Zero check box is checked only those addresses where the waveform data crosses the zero level will be found automatically when searching and can be set This lets you easily make address set tings where noise is less likely to occur when looping 4 If necessary use the page menu command Truncate to delete unwanted data that falls outside the start or loop start and end addresses Truncate Sample 66686 End 0045475 Range Start 6682665 Front amp End O Front O End Save to No 6661 O Overwrite Set the parameters and press the OK button to exe cute the operation PG p 119 a
262. ng of the recorded events may be slightly skewed If this occurs try setting Reso Realtime Quantize Resolution to a setting other than Hi Preference Aa When you are finished performing press the SEQUENCER START STOP key Recording will end and the sequencer will return to the location at which recording began If you made a mistake during your performance or would like to re record you can use the Compare func tion press the COMPARE key to re record as many times as you wish 9 If you want to record other tracks un check the Multi REC or RPPR check boxes as necessary In step uncheck the Multi REC check box to defeat multi track recording In step uncheck the RPPR check box to turn off the RPPR function 57 58 Recording the sound of a combi naton or program Here s how you can easily copy the settings of a combina tion or program and then record There are two ways to do this While playing in Program or Combination mode you can use the Auto Song Setup function to automatically set up a song using the current settings of the program or combination Or you can use the page menu command in Sequencer mode to copy the settings of a program or combination create the sequencer setup Auto Song Setup function The explanation of the Auto Song Setup function given here follows the procedure from Combination mode C Enter Combination mode COMBINATI
263. nt MIDI channel settings are routed to an IFX this setting specifies the channel that will control the effect Master effects Master EQ These settings can be made in the same way as in Effect settings for a program p 105 You can use the Ctrl Ch to control these effects dynamic modulation Dmod on the specified MIDI chan nel will control the master effects or master EQ Effect settings in Sampling mode In Sampling mode an external audio source connected to the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 or S P DIF IN jacks can be sam pled with insert effects applied You can also apply an insert effect to the samples assigned to a multisample and resample the result Routing Use Input SAMPLING to specify the external audio input and set the Sampling P0 Recording Input Setup page BUS IFX Indiv Select parame ter to specify the bus i e the insert effect to which the signal will be sent QS p 21 SAMPLING P Recording Input Analog SAMPLING Input Level 127 BUS IFX Indiv Select P REM Pan LAGG Input2 Level 127 BUS IFX Indiv Select Off input Setup 6 Recording Setup Source BUS gt L R Trigger Sampling START SW Metronome Precount gt Off J 126 Resample D Manual i k ing Setup M rence M Status IS The Input settings allow you to input simultaneously from each input source Recording Level d6 The bus the insert effect to which the samples assign
264. nter this mode from the Program mode your edit ing will apply to the arpeggio pattern specified for the selected program In Program mode select a program for which the arpeggio pattern you wish to edit is selected or a pro gram that you wish to use as a basis for editing the arpeggio pattern 2 Press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key to turn the arpeggiator on the key will light Even if you moved to Global mode from a program in which the arpeggiator was turned off you can use the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key to turn it on 3 Select the Global P6 User Arpeggio Pattern Setup page GLOBAL P6 User Arpeggio Arpeggiator Select A lt 3 Pattern Setup A Octave gt 1 Sort Resolution gt F O Latch Key Sync __ Keyboard O Fixed Note Arpeggio Pattern Setup Arpeggio Tone Mode Normal 4 Arpeggiator Select will automatically be set to A when you move here from Program mode 6 In Pattern select the arpeggio pattern that you wish to edit For this example select an empty user arpeggio pat tern amp If a blank pattern is selected playing the keyboard will not start an arpeggio Although preset arpeggio patterns P000 P004 can be selected they cannot be edited amp When you edit a user arpeggio pattern the changes will have an effect anytime that this pattern is used in Program Combination Song or Song Play modes 6 In Length specify the length of the patt
265. ntly If desired you may input simultaneously from all input sources amp If you want to make these settings in Global mode move to Global mode from the mode other than Sampling mode in which you will be inputting the external audio signals If you move from Sampling mode to Global mode the Input SAMPLING settings of Sampling mode will be maintained and it will not be possible to view the settings of this page These settings are ignored in Sampling mode Audio input settings for Sampling mode are made in a simi lar way in Sampling PO Recording Input Setup page Input SAMPLING amp When you apply effects to external input signals from the AUDIO IN 1 2 and S P DIF IN inputs oscillation may be heard depending on the type of effect and the parameter settings of the effect If this occurs adjust the input level output level and effect parameters Particular care should be taken when using high gain effects 2 Set the parameters for Input and 2 Input1 and 2 correspond to the following inputs Analog AUDIO INPUT 1 Input 2 Input2 Rch Input2 Level Sets the level of the input signal that you selected in Input COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY MEDIA Normally you will set this to 127 If the sound is distorted even though you lower this setting significantly it is possible that the sound is distorting before the AD converter Adjust the LEVEL knob or the output level of the external audio source
266. nu button and select the Load Selected page menu command The dialog box will appear Load a Combination Combination gt DG 24 Rock Organ To Combination gt EG Initial CombiEGoG 3 Use the Combination upper line to select the load source combination and use To Combina tion lower line to specify the destination combina tion For this example select E000 InitialCombiE000 4 Press the OK button to execute loading the loaded combination will be assigned to E000 Use sampled Wave files to create an audio CD and play it Media Make Audio CD Play Audio CD Songs you resampled in Sequencer mode p 83 or other Wave files can be arranged in any order you like and burned to CD located in a CD R RW drive connected to the USB A port to create an original audio CD amp Make sure that both media are detected by the TRI TON Extreme amp When writing data to CD R RW media the media containing the Wave files must have free space equal in size to the Wave files you are writing Before you execute this operation make sure that the drive con taining the Wave files contains enough free space RI When writing Wave files to a USB CD R RW drive to create an audio CD we recommend that you use a drive that supports Just Link Other drives are usable only at single speed 1x writing Depending on the performance of your drive there may be cases in which writing is not possible 1 Acce
267. o song S001 WinterVariations not play correctly This song uses the preloaded User Octave Scale 15 In Global PO Basic Setup execute the Load Preload Demo data page menu command to select the Global Setting 1 QS p 2 PG p 157 Playback does not start when you press the SEQUENCER START STO P key in Sequencer mode L Is the MIDI Clock Global P1 MIDI set to Internal PG p 162 Can t record in Sequencer mode L_ Is the Memory Protect Song check box Global P0 unchecked PG p 159 L_ Is the MIDI Clock Global P1 MIDI set to Internal PG p 162 The arpeggiator settings that were copied from a combination using Copy From Combi cannot be recorded in the same way as when they were played L Have you checked Multi REC Sequencer PO Play REC Preference PG p 67 _ Depending on the settings of the combination it may be necessary to adjust settings such as Track Select MIDI Channel Status and Arpeggiator Assign PG p 59 In the Copy from Combi dialog box check the Auto adjust Arp setting for Multi REC option before you execute the copy This will cause the settings to be adjusted automatically p 58 The settings that are made automatically by Auto adjust Arp setting for Multi REC will be executed according to the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key set ting of the combination If you want to turn on the arpeggiator in
268. o the TRITON Extreme connect the other end to an AC outlet p 16 2 PO W ER switch This switch turns the power on off p 18 3 AUDIO OUTPUT Connect these outputs to the input jacks of your amp or mixer In addition to the L MONO and R main stereo audio outputs the TRITON Extreme provides four indi vidual audio outputs The sound from each oscillator drum timbre track or insert effect can be freely routed to any output p 104 MAIN L MONO R These are unbalanced phone jacks These are the main audio output jacks By setting BUS Select to L R the output from an oscillator an insert effect an individual drum part or the metronome can be output to the MAIN L MONO and R jacks When making connections in stereo use L MONO and R When making connections in mono use the L MONO jack IN DIVIDUAL 1 2 3 4 These are unbalanced phone jacks These are individual independent audio output jacks By setting the BUS Select to 1 2 3 Tube 4 Tube 1 2 or 3 4 Tube an oscillator an insert effect an individual drum part or the metronome etc can be assigned to be output from the INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 4 jacks The output from the 1 2 3 4 jacks is not affected by the VOLUME slider 4 AUDIO INPUT These two audio inputs are used when recording a mono stereo sample from a mic or external audio source or when applying the TRITON Extreme s internal effects to an external audio source
269. ob max MIC 17 dBu LEVEL knob min 52 dBu LEVEL knob max Maximum level LINE 14 dBu LEVEL knob min 20 dBu LEVEL knob max MIC 7 dBu LEVEL knob min 43 dBu LEVEL knob max Source impedance 600 Q S P DIF Connector optical Format 24 bit S P DIF IEC60958 EIAJ CP 1201 Sample rate 48 kHz DAMPER half damper supported ASSIGNABLE SWITCH PEDAL USB A to Device USB B to Host connector Supports USB specification version 1 1 Support for Full speed 12 Mbps and Low speed 1 5 Mbps USB Mass Storage Class specification compliance Interface Class 8 Mass Storage Interface Subclass 2 SFF8020i 5 SFF8070i 6 SCSI Bulk transfer support Interface Protocol 0x50h Bulk Only Other MIDI IN OUT THRU LCD contrast knob CF card slot AC power inlet power switch Calendar backup battery Support for options EXB MOSS 72 pin SIMM memory slots x 3 for user sample memory Dimensions 88Keys 1452 x 420 x 144 mm Inches 57 17 x 16 54 x 5 67 W x D x H 76Keys 1316 x 360 x 117 mm Inches 51 81 x 14 17 x 4 61 61Keys 1109 x 360 x 117 mm Inches 43 66 x 14 17 x 4 61 88 Keys 28 5 kg 62 83lbs 76 Keys 16 9 kg 37 26lbs 61 Keys 14 4 kg 31 75lbs Power supply AC Local Voltage Included items Power cable CD ROM TNECD D00 Options Expansion boards EXB MOSS DSP Synthesizer Board System requirements for computer connection Windows Supported
270. ode Stereo The sound of the internal L R channels will be sam pled in stereo amp Be aware that if you change the BUS setting from Off to L R or IFX1 5 the volume level sent to the AUDIO OUT L MONO R jacks and to the head phones may rise excessively For this example change the settings as follows Pan C64 Trigger Threshold Level as desired Sample Time as desired SEQUENCER P Play REC Ow Input P Analog COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY MEDIA Input Level 127 Fee creased ah Pan C064 lt 73 Save ot RAM Mode gt Stereo Sample Time min 16 9235 sec 9 Set the recording level Play your guitar at the volume at which you will record If the display indicates ADC OVERLOAD AD converter input overload adjust the rear panel LEVEL knob toward MIN until the level is appropri ate Press the SAMPLING REC key When you play your guitar the level meter will indi cate the volume at which the guitar will be sampled If the display indicates CLIP use the VALUE con trollers to lower the Recording Level slider in the right of the display below 0 0 to an appropriate level This adjustment will not affect the output volume but will affect the data that will be sampled When you have finished making adjustments press the SAMPLING REC key Begin sampling Press the SAMPLING REC key and then the SAM PLING START STOP key to enter recording
271. of a program combination or song set BUS IFX Indiv Select to Off or set Level to 0 Similarly if you will not be using the S P DIF IN jack set these inputs to BUS IFX Indiv Select Off or set their Level to 0 If no audio cables are connected to the rear panel AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks the data that is input to the TRITON Extreme from the AD converter will be set to zero and no noise will be output 107 108 About dynamic modulation Dmod Dynamic modulation Dmod is a function that lets you use MIDI messages or the TRITON Extreme s controllers to control specific effect parameters in realtime BPM MIDI Sync is another function that controls effect parameters and is used to synchronize the LFO speed of modulation type effects or the delay time etc of delay type effects to the tempo of the arpeggiator or an external sequencer For details on each of these functions refer to PG p 276 278 Setting example We will show how you can use dynamic modulation to control an effect parameter in realtime As described in the procedure for Effect settings for a program p 104 set IFX1 to 049 L C R BPM Delay Verify that a delay sound is being output 2 Access the Program P8 Edit Insert Effect IFX1 page Using Dmod to change the delay level by moving the joystick away from yourself 3 Set Input Level Dmod to 100 4 Set Src to JS Y CC 01 The de
272. olo on WA If both Mute and Solo are used the Solo function will be given priority a Cc a a aE m T BE T Press track 2 SOLO ON OFF The display will change and only the playback of tracks 1 and 2 will be heard To switch Solo off press SOLO ON OFF once again Press SOLO ON OFF for both tracks 1 and 2 The display will change and the playback of tracks 1 and 2 will be muted If the Solo function is turned off for all tracks playback will be according to the PLAY MUTE REC settings a RO By using the page menu command Solo Selected Track you can listen to the sound of only the selected track This is convenient when you want to set track parameters or to make effect settings PG p 58 Recording methods This section describes the ways in which you can record on the TRITON Extreme Recording a track There are two ways to record to a MIDI track realtime recording and step recording You can choose from six types of realtime recording On MIDI tracks you can edit the recorded data in various ways You can use Event Editing to insert data and per form Track Edit operations such as Create Control data to insert data such as pitch bend aftertouch and control change Recording a pattern There are two ways to record a pattern realtime record ing and step recording For realtime recording only one recording type loop is available In addition yo
273. on respectively System Preference page Recalling the last selected mode and page at power on GLOBAL P Basic Setup System Preference Bank Map gt GM2 gt Memorize gt Internal System Preference EEk i _ Beep Enable Power On Mode System Clock WAVE File Play Level gt Normal Memory Protect O Program UO Combination O Song f Sampling The state of TRITON Extreme when the power is turned on will depend on the setting of Power On Mode If Power On Mode is Reset factory setting TRITON Extreme will automatically selects the Combination mode PO Play If Power On Mode is Memorize TRITON Extreme will power on using the same mode and page that were last selected when the power was turned off The Memorize setting will remember the mode and page that were last selected the combination number that was last selected in Combination mode and the program number that was last selected in Program mode If another mode is selected when the power is turned on you can press the COMBI key or PROG key to select the PO Play page with the last selected combination num ber or program number O Drum Kit _ Arpeggio User Pattern Sounding a beep when you press the LCD screen If the Beep Enable check box is checked a beep will sound when you press an object in the LCD screen Uncheck this item if you don t want a beep to sound Protecting the memory If one or m
274. on the TRITON Extreme is not recognized by an external device _ A CD R RW saved or copied on the TRITON Extreme using packet writing is not recognized on a computer If you install a UDF version 1 5 compatible UDF reader or packet writing software on your computer it will be possible to recognize the disc PG p 330 In the case of a CD R it may be possible to make the disc be recognized by executing the page menu com mand Convert to 509660 Format Media Utility page to convert the disc to 509660 format However depending on the state in which the disc was saved it may be converted into I509660 level 3 format and may still not be recognized In this case if you install ISO9660 level 3 compatible reader software or packet writing software on your computer it will be possible to recognize the disc PG p 330 _ A CD R RW that was saved or copied on the TRITON Extreme using packet writing is not recognized by the TRITON TRITON pro TRITON proX TRITON Rack These models do not support UDF version 1 5 and therefore will not recognize such a disc 135 In the case of a CD R it may be possible to make the disc be recognized by executing the page menu com mand Convert to I509660 Format Media Utility page to convert the disc to 509660 format However depending on the state in which the disc was saved it may be converted into I509660 level 3 format and may still not be recognized PG
275. ons on the song you create and will then assemble songs in a cue list The subsequent explanation assumes that the song you created is loaded into S000 1 Copying a song Here s how to copy a song This is convenient when you want to create different variations based on a song 1 Create a new song Access the Sequencer P0 Play REC Program T01 08 page Choose Song Select use the numeric keys to input the song number that you want to newly create and press the ENTER key For example press the 1 key and then the ENTER key A dialog box will appear Create new song this song No Set Length HZS Are you sure Decide on the number of measures input the number in Set Length and press the OK button SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 68 Mik A 001 01 000 Meter 4 4 J 120 P Mau 001 NEW SONG P Trackat TRACK 01 Reso gt Hi O RPPR T08 4668 6BD orana concert Bins 43 LEE re re Lae al Pa Pa dy Ii re Kesbosq Revboas Kesbosq Rerboal Recboadt Wesboaq Pesboay acassoaosososossanfososessansosasa ssdhosssasssssesassss Bank Program sesececesseasscscedhoassese eoveSeccesecorceesavecs Plow Pha D nase Dagaa D nase Dano Danae ee iBD Grandi BD Grand BD Grand BD Grand BD Grand BD Grand BD Grand BD Grandi Anew song will be created Next we will copy the song settings and playback data of another song into this newly created song 2 Select the page menu co
276. or Send 2 settings for oscilla tors 1 and 2 within the program selected by the tim bre If the program parameter Send 1 or Send 2 is set to 0 the resulting level will still be 0 even if you raise this send level If IFX Indiv Out BUS Select is set to IFX1 5 the send levels to the master effects are set by Send 1 and Send 2 Insert FX page following the insert effects Routing aa 105 106 Insert effects Select an effect for IFX1 IFX5 and set Pan CC 8 BUS Sel BUS Select Send 1 and Send 2 for the signal that has passed through each insert effect If the Chain check box is checked the settings that follow the last IFX in the chain will be used Send 1 and Send 2 adjust the amount of master effect that is applied to the signal that has passed through the IFX COMBINATION PS Edit Insert FX Insert FX Bank H Romance Layers Chain Insert Effect PantCt IFX1 E D 202 Stereo Compressor IFX2 IFX3 D 26 Stereo Flanger IFx4 IFX5 P 050 5t BPM Delay I FX 1 2 3 d 5 l You can edit these settings in the same way as for a pro gram p 104 but you can use MIDI to control dynamic modulation Dmod post IFX pan CC 8 Send1 and Send2 This is particularly useful in Sequencer mode An is shown at the right of Ch01 16 for channel numbers whose track is routed to IPX If multiple tracks with differ e
277. order in which you selected them If you want to add l l all the WAVE files in the directory press the Insert All KE Depending on the drive you are using it may not be button possible to write at the specified speed We recom mend that the first time you write you select Test to perform a writing test in order to determine the speed capabilities of your drive Test will not write data to the CD R RW media but will perform all When you have finished adding files to the list press the Exit button to close the dialog box Notice that the WAVE files have been added to the track list other processing just as when data is actually written Make Audio CD EER HE If an error occurs the display will indicate Error in Total 12 13 Free 74 51 writing to medium 44100Hz Press the OK button to execute the writing test irene ear After verifying that data can be written correctly at EREA 2 iiiad pone the specified speed select Write oe Execute finalize too specifies whether Finalization f will be executed after the audio tracks have been writ cut ten to the CD R RW media If finalization has been P cob Blank Disc Sampling START plays selected file executed the disc can be played back on a CD player toad J Save h raseollausetol wave E but it will no longer be possible to add more tracks In this page as well you can select a WAVE file and ZS If you only want to execute finalization execute press the
278. ording page is displayed In this example choose the Input Setup page WA If this is not displayed press the EXIT key and then press the InputSetup tab 3 Press the page menu button and choose Auto Sam pling Setup from the menu The dialog box will appear 4 Choose REC Audio Input Auto Sampling Setup O Initialize REC Audio Input C Auto Resample through IF Xx Source Audio gt Analog Saveto J RAM 6 Make the following settings for REC Audio Input Set Source Audio to Analog The external audio input source the analog audio output of an instrument or other device connected to the INPUT 1 2 jacks will be sampled Set Mono 1 Mono 2 Stereo to Stereo The input from the INPUT 1 2 jacks will be sent to the internal L R channels and sampled in stereo Set Save to to RAM The sampled data will be writ ten to sample memory RAM Set IFX to Off Insert effects will not be applied while sampling 6 Press the OK button to execute the command Preparations for sampling are now completed SAMPLING P Recording Input gt EEE SAMPLING Input 1 Level 127 BUSCIFX Indiv Select gt L R Pan L ga Input2 Level 127 _ BUS IFX Indiv Select L R Pan R127 Recording Setup Source Bus gt LZR Trigger Sampling START Sw Metronome Precount P Off J 126 Resample D Manual Prefe Memory rence Jl Status SAMPLING P Recording T
279. ore of the Memory Protect check boxes are checked operations such as writing loading or song recording will be prohibited for the corresponding type of memory Input Sampling page Making audio input settings for other than Sampling mode t Refer to p 107 and PG p 159 MIDI related settings P1 MIDI MIDI Setup MIDI Filter GLOBAL P1 MIDI MIDI Setup MIDI Channel gt Local Control On Convert Position PreMIDI Note Receive gt All MIDI Clock C Internal External MIDI External USB Receive Ext Realtime Commands MIDI Filter Enable Program Change Bank Change Combination Change Enable After Touch Enable Control Change Enable Exclusive t Refer to PG p 161 Pedal and other controller settings P2 Controller Specifying the function of the ASSIGN ABLE Switch and ASSIGNABLE Pedal GLOBAL P2 Controller Foot Switch Assign Foot Pedal Assign Damper Polarity gt KORG Standard Foot Switch Polarity P KORG Standard Sets the function of an assignable switch such as the optional Korg PS 1 connected to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack e This is set by Foot Switch Assign This switch can act as a source for alternate modulation or effect dynamic modulation or switch portamento on off control the sostenuto effect turn the soft pedal effect on off turn the arpeggiator on off select programs or combi nations up down start stop the sequencer punch in out on the sequ
280. ore you pressed the MENU key will have its top right corner bent over By pressing one of the pages shown you can move to that page You can also move to the corresponding page by pressing a numeric key 0 9 When you press the EXIT key PO will be displayed Other objects To modify the parameter value of an object shaped like a slider or knob press it to move the edit cell to that object and use the VALUE controllers to modify the value In addition there are also buttons similar to the OK button and Cancel button explained in dialog box which exe cute an operation when they are pressed and released such as the Done button Copy button and Insert button Toggle buttons This type of button will change its function or switch on off each time it is pressed PLAY MUTE REC button in Sequencer and Song Play mode EA aH SOLO ON OFF button in Sequencer and Ee Song Play mode ae rae button for Insert Effect and Mas er Effec 10 Overview of the TRITON Extreme s modes The TRITON Extreme has a large number of functions that let you play and edit programs and combinations record and play sequence data record and play back sam ples and manage data on media The largest unit used to organize these functions is called a mode The TRITON Extreme has seven modes Program mode e Select and play programs You can choose programs from rewritable banks A F and H N which contain a total of 1 66
281. ormally you will check this If this is not checked no drum sample will be assigned to that note number That note number will sound the drum sample assigned at its right but a semitone lower Use this setting when you want only to change the pitch such as with tom or cymbal sounds R Ifyou uncheck the Assign check box so that the drum sample at the right will be played at a pitch one semitone lower access the Program P2 Edit Pitch OSC1 Pitch Mod page and set Pitch Slope to 1 0 before you enter Global mode 6 Use High Drumsample Bank High Drumsam ple Low Drumsample Bank and Low Drumsam ple to specify the drum sample that will be assigned to this note number If you have selected a Low Drumsample use Velocity Sample SW Lo Hi to specify how velocity will switch between the High Drumsample and Low Drumsample If you set High Low Drumsample Bank to ROM you ll be able to select ROM drum samples If you set it to RAM you ll be able to select samples you sampled on the TRITON Extreme or loaded in Media mode RO About the ROM drum samples The TRITON Extreme contains 1 175 different drum samples in ROM When you press the popup button you will be able to select ROM drum samples from 15 categories For a list of the drum sample names refer to VNL D Use Velocity Sample SW Lo gt Hi to specify how velocity will switch between drumsamples The drumsam
282. osition If a guitar or analog audio device is connected set this to the LINE position E Guitars with active pickups can be input directly However if your guitar has a passive type pickup i e without a built in preamp the mismatch in impedance levels will make it difficult to sample at an appropriate level Such instruments should be routed through a preamp or effect unit before they are con nected MAX MIN 2 1 J MIC LINE LL EVEL E e Input from the S P DIF IN jack Connect the optical digital output jack of your DAT etc to the rear panel S P DIF IN jack OUT MAIN IN S P DIF 8 If you want to input from the S P DIF IN jack set the Global mode System Clock to S P DIF PG p 158 Input settings One set of Input settings are maintained by Sampling mode and a different set of Input settings are shared by Combination Program Sequencer Song Play and Media mode This latter set is saved as Global mode parameters Normally you will set these in Global mode however these same settings can also be made from the other modes These settings can be made in the following pages a Sampling Sampling PO Recording Input Setup Combination PO Play Sampling Sequencer Program PO Play Sampling Combination Program Song Play Sequencer PO Play REC Sampling Media Global PO Basic Setup Input Sampling Media Play Audio CD note Sampling can be performed in Sampling Combina tion
283. oss fade Specifies the range of notes that will be sounded by each timbre Each area that sounds a timbre is referred to as a Key Zone By setting key zones you can create a combi nation in which different programs sound in different areas of the keyboard By combining key zones specified for each timbre you can create layered or split combinations The upper and lower limits for the key zone of each tim bre are set by the Top Key and Bottom Key respec tively For example in the following diagram timbres 1 3 are set to create a layered and split combination This is specified by the key zone settings Timbres 2 and 3 create a layer Timbre 1 and timbres 2 3 are split between the B3 and C4 note numbers Timbre 1 Timbre 2 Timbre 3 Stins miii C 1 B3 C4 G9 As an example here we will explain how to create a com bination like the one shown above In the PO Play Program Select page or the P1 Edit Program Mixer page use the Program Select area to select the program that will be used for each timbre 1 3 Select a piano program for timbre 1 Select a brass program for timbre 2 Select a strings program for timbre 3 2 In the MIDI Ch page of P2 Edit Trk Param set Sta tus to INT for all the timbres that you wish to use and set MIDI Channel to either Gch or to match the global MIDI channel a G will be displayed after the channel number In the Key Zone pag
284. other than the page menu or when you press the EXIT key Dialog box The dialog box that appears will depend on the currently selected page menu command When selecting a program or combination number in a dialog box use the VALUE controllers p 14 to input the number To execute press the OK button To cancel without execut ing press the Cancel button The operation will occur when you press and release the button The dialog box will close The EXIT key corresponds to the Cancel but ton Done button and Exit button Write Combination Text edit button AEG T The Pian Category P Be Keyboard To Combination b AGG The Piano Cancel a OK button Cancel button amp After some commands are executed the previously locked page menu will be unlocked automatically and the page menu will be closed Text edit button When you press this button a text edit dialog box will appear Here you can rename text such as the name of a program combination or song etc p 115 Page jump menu COMBINATION Jump G PB Play P1 P2 P3 Edit Prog Mixer f Edit Trk Param Edit MIDI Filter P4 Edit Zone Ctr P P8 P9 Edit Arpeggiator Edit Insert Effect Edit Master Effect In Combination Program Sequencer Sampling Song Play or Global modes you can press the front panel MENU key to view a list of the pages in that mode As a reminder the page you were in bef
285. ou resampled with Auto 12 dB On turned off turn on 12 dB Sampling mode Loop Edit page for that sample _ The playback volume of a sample is different than the volume at which it was resampled or sampled If the sample playback is louder did you set Record ing Level above 0 0 If it is lower did you set Recording Level below 0 0 The Recording Level setting affects the level of the sample data that is recorded but it is not possible to monitor that level If the sample playback is louder is Auto 12 dB On turned on If the playback is softer is this setting turned off If you resampled the playback of a song or your play back performance using a program combination or sample or combined your performance with an exter nal audio source and sampled the result did you set Recording Level to approximately 12 0 dB and turn on the Auto 12 dB On setting p 67 If you sampled only an external audio source did you set Recording Level to approximately 0 0 and turn off Auto 12 dB On p 67 Song or CD playback stops temporarily when you sample L Is Auto Optimize RAM checked If this is checked RAM will be optimized automati cally when sampling ends meaning that the sound will stop when sampling ends If a song is being played in Sequencer mode or if a CD is being played back the playback will stop There is a time lag after
286. p 330 Can t write audio tracks Additional writing is not possible on a CD R RW disc that has been finalized Can t play back the disc on an audio CD player _ Did you finalize the disc If you want to finalize the disc after writing additional data check the Execute finalize too check box when executing the page menu command Write to CD Media Make Audio CD so that the disc will be final ized p 124 PG p 196 If you only want to finalize the disc select the page menu command Finalize Audio CD Media Make Audio CD and press the OK button to finalize the disc PG p 196 L Are you using CD R media Since some CD players are unable to play CD RW media we recommend that you use CD R media _ Have you tried using a different type of media Some CD R RW media cannot be played by some CD players You may be able to play back successfully by using a different type brand of CD R RW media WAVE files Playback level of the WAVE file is too high L Set WAVE File Play Level to Normal You should usually set WAVE file Play Level at Normal and set it to High 12 dB only if the S P DIF output is too low With the High 12 dB setting the output from AUDIO OUTPUT L MONO R and HEADPHONES will be louder PG p 158 WAVE file playback level is louder softer than the RAM samples L Adjust the WAVE File Play Level You should usually set WAVE File
287. p 64 107 111 The MIC LINE level select switch MIC LINE switch and the level adjustment knob LEVEL knob allow you to use a wide range of external audio sources ranging from mic level to line level AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks These are unbalanced phone jacks LEVEL knob This adjusts the input level of the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks MIC LIN E switch This switches the input level of the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks 5 S P DIF OUT MAIN jack This is an optical type S P DIF format IEC60958 ETAJ CP 1201 digital output jack It outputs a digital version of the same audio signal as the AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO and R jacks at sam pling rates of 48 kHz Use an optical cable to connect this to the optical digital input jack of a DAT or MD etc The VOLUME slider does not adjust the output level of this jack IN jack This is an optical S P DIF format IEC 60958 EIAJ CP 1201 digital input jack Digital audio at a sample rate of 48 kHz can be input here Use an optical cable to connect this jack to the optical digi tal output jack of a DAT or other device 6 USB USB A connector for connecting a CD R RW drive etc You can connect an external USB device to this connector Use this connector to connect storage media such as a hard disk MO or CD RW drive amp PG p 325 USB B connector for connecting to a computer You can connect your computer to this connec
288. page set IFX3 to 020 Stereo Flanger SEQUENCER P8 Insert Effect insert FX aa P Tracks Elec Piano K126 Pro Dyno EP Chain Insert Effect PantCC 8 BUS Sel Sendi Send2 IFX1 In the Sequencer P8 Insert Effect IFX3 page set the parameters as desired SEQUENCER P8 Insert Effect Stereo Flanger Delay Time msec aa LFO Waveform Triangle LFO Shape 50 LFO Phase degree 90 LFO Frequency Hz 6 56 sre gt Off Amt 6 68 BPM MIDI Sync Off BPM MIDI Base Note J Times x1 Ctrl Ch P cha3 Depth 6 Feedback 50 High Damp 5 5 ical 58 58 Sre p orf Amt 0 reels ra 9 In the Sequencer P8 Insert effect Insert FX page choose the page menu command Put Effect Setting to Track to open the dialog box Put Effect Setting MIDI Exclusive to Track Effect gt IFX3 To Song 668 Track 03 Measure HHE Beat Tick 61 000 Specify the effect for which you will insert an exclu sive message and specify the location at which it will be inserted Effect IFX3 To Song 000 Track 03 Measure 009 Beat Tick 01 000 1 Press the OK button Now when you play back the song the track 3 effect will switch to 020 Stereo Flanger from measure 9 47 48 2 If you press the COMPARE key the key will light and play back you will hear the state of the track prior to executing Put Effect Setting to Track Use the COMPARE
289. peration press the OK button To cancel press the Cancel button Memory in Global mode When the power is turned on the Global mode data is called from internal memory into the Global mode mem ory area Then when you modify the parameters in Global mode the data in the memory area will be modified If you wish to save this modified data in internal memory you must Write it When you write the data in the memory area will be writ ten into the global settings drum kits and arpeggio pat terns of internal memory If you turn off the power without writing the modified data in the memory area will be lost Editing will affect the data that has been called into the memory area lt lt Edit When you Write the Memory Area When the power is various Global mode turned on the settings settings will be saved in Write Power On are called into the internal memory memory area Internal Memory Global Setting pee The pages of Media mode Media mode page structure Load Load the selected file or directory into internal memory Save Save data from internal memory to media such as a media Utility Rename copy or delete a disk or file create new directories and set the date and time Make Audio CD Write Wave files to an audio CD Play Audio CD Play back an audio CD Edit WAVE Edit Wave files stored in media Media Information View information for the selected media WA For details on how to access eac
290. play lower on the keyboard making the sound brighter When set to a negative value the cutoff frequency will fall as you play lower on the keyboard making the sound darker e When Ramp High is set to a positive value the cutoff frequency will rise as you play higher on the keyboard making the sound brighter When set to a negative value the cutoff frequency will fall as you play higher on the keyboard making the sound darker e Intensity to A and Intensity to B adjust the effect that keyboard tracking will have on filters A and B PG p 18 27 28 Filter EG Adjusts the effect produced by the filter EG whose set tings are made in the EG page e Use the Velocity to A and Velocity to B settings to specify the effect of velocity on the filter EG e Use the Intensity to A and Intensity to B settings to specify the depth of the filter EG e Into A AMS Int to A and Into B AMS Int to B adjust the effect that AMS will have on the filter EG depth These three settings will determine the depth of the tonal change produced by the filter EG Filter A B Modulation Set this when you wish to produce tonal change by using controllers etc to vary the cutoff frequency Filter LFO Mod page Indicates settings that allow the LFO to produce cyclic changes in tone a wah effect Intensity to A LFO Int to A and Intensity to B LFO
291. ple Setup page of Global P5 Drum Kit GLOBAL P5 Drum Kit Sample Setup i Aa Drumkit 143 User Standard Kit 1 Key High Drumsample Bank gt R0mM _ S offset _ Rev Level 10 Transpose 1 High Drumsample D 2104 Tom 2 Hi _ Tune 00 Cutoff 00 Resonance 00 Attack Decay 61 Low Drumsample Low Drumsample Bank JA VY 5 0ffset O ev Level 0 Low Drumsample 2184 Tom 2 Hi Resonance Attack 00 Decay 06 3 In Drum Kit select the drum kit that you wish to edit If necessary use the page menu command Copy Drum Kit to copy settings from a preload drum kit or a GM drum kit amp GM drum kits 144 GM 152 GM cannot be selected here It is not possible to edit or write a GM drum kit If you wish to modify the settings of one of the drum kits 144 GM 152 GM you can use Copy Drum Kit to copy it to 000 A B 143 User and then edit the copy 4 Use Key to select the note number that you wish to edit The drum sample parameters for the selected note number will be displayed in the High Drumsample Low Drumsample and Voice Mixer pages To select a note number you can use the VALUE con trollers or you can hold down the ENTER key and press a note on the keyboard 6 Use the Assign check box to specify whether a drum sample will be assigned to the note number If this is checked a drum sample will be assigned to that note number N
292. ple that sounds when you perform will depend on the velocity keyboard playing strength of the incoming note This is called velocity drumsample switching If you set this to 001 only the High Drumsample will sound t This is the same type of function as the Velocity Multi sample Switching in a program High Multisample and Low Multisample p 24 Set the parameters of the drumsamples that you assigned Set the parameters for the High Drumsample and Low Drumsample You can set parameters such as volume level Level pitch Transpose Tune and tone Cutoff Res onance For details on each parameter refer to PG p 168 As necessary repeat steps 4 8 to set drumsample parameters for each note number If you wish to use the settings of another KEY select the page menu command Copy Key Setup Select the Voice Mixer page in Global P5 Drum Kit GLOBAL P5 Drum Kit Yoice Mixer EEk A Drumkit 143 User Standard Kit 1 ma Yoice Assign Mode sts UO Single Trigger Enable Note On Receive Exclusive Group 061 O Enable Note Off Receive Mixer BUS Select IF X7 Indiv 0ut Assign L R Pan ROS 4 Send1 to MFX1 000 Send2 to MFX2 817 k Setup dt Set the Exclusive Group The Exclusive Group setting is used when you wish to group drumsamples of the same type For example if the note number assigned to an open hi hat drumsample and a closed hi hat d
293. ple the result or use the TRITON Extreme as a 4 in AUDIO INPUT 1 2 S P DIF IN L R 6 out effect proces sor You can also use TRITON Extreme to as a vocoder 093 Vocoder in which internal sounds are controlled by an external mic input GLOBAL P Basic Setup Input Sampling Aa Input Analog COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY MEDIA Input Level 127 BUSCIFX Indiv Select L R Pan LOGG Send1 to MFX1 000 Send2 to MFX2 666 Input2 Level 127 BUS IFX Indiv Select gt M Pan R127 Send1 to MFX1 000 Send2 to MFX2 00A Sampling _ Auto Optimize RAM k Pref MSampling Routing In Program Combination Sequencer Song Play and Media modes i e in other than Sampling mode the routing of the external audio input signals from the vari ous jacks is specified by BUS IFX Indiv Select 1 Use Input COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY MEDIA to select the source that you want to input This setting can be made in any of the following pages If you want to save the edited settings into internal memory you must write them Use the Global mode page menu command Write Global Setting to write your settings Program Combination PO Play Sampling page Global PO Basic Setup Input Sampling page DA Input related settings are shared between all of the above modes For each input source that you select in Input COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY MEDIA a routing can be specified independe
294. pport hot plugging connect it with the power turned off Then turn on the power and exe cute the Utility page menu command Scan USB Device amp While the TRITON Extreme is accessing the USB device do not connect another USB device or discon nect the connected device Doing so may damage your data 4 Press the MEDIA key to enter Media mode Media Select 6 Use Media Select to select your media ZB If you are using a removable disk insert the media After you exchange media in your USB device press the LCD screen to make the TRITON Extreme detect the media When the media has been detected the LCD screen will display information about the media 6 If the media needs to be formatted execute the For mat operation Media requiring formatting is indicated as Unformat ted in Media Select For details on the formatting procedure refer to p 119 How to save data You can save the various types of data listed in Saving to various types of media p 113 but as an example here we will save the following data As an example we will explain how to save the following data e Internal memory programs combinations global settings user drum kits user arpeggio patterns e Songs cue lists e Multisamples and samples created in Sampling mode etc amp If you save this data to low capacity media you may need more than one disk 117 Prepare the media on which you want to save
295. program names in the center area to select a program The selected program will be highlighted 4 When you are satisfied with the selected program press the OK button to close the popup menu If you press the Cancel button the selection you made here will be discarded and you will return to the pro gram that had been selected before you opened the popup menu Selecting by category You can select programs from within a category such as keyboard organ bass and drums When shipped from the factory the preloaded programs are organized into sixteen categories C Press the Category popup button A tabbed Category Program Select popup menu will appear Category Program Select 15 Drums B029 Modern Rock Kit _ Bose Under Hard Kit In the illustration above category 15 Drums is selected The center area shows the programs con tained in that category 2 Press the tabs located to the left and right sides of the display to select a different category The name of the selected category will be displayed in full in the upper right 3 Press one of the program names in the center area to select a program The selected program will be highlighted 4 When you are satisfied with the selected program press the OK button to close the popup menu If you press the Cancel button your selection will be discarded and you will return to the program that had been selected when you opened the popup menu Using 1
296. provides a Pitch EG Filter EG and Amplifier EG which produce time varying changes in pitch tone and volume respectively note on Attack Level note off Y Break Level Release Level Y PEN Time Release Time secay Time Attack Time Slope Time Start Level LFO Low Frequency Oscillator For each oscillator TRITON Extreme provides two LFO s that can be used to apply cyclical change in pitch tone and volume Examples of this are vibrato cyclical change in pitch wah cyclical change in tone and tremolo or auto pan cyclical change in volume Filter settings P3 Edit Filter The filter allows you to diminish or emphasize specified frequency areas of the multisample selected for the oscil lator The tone of the sound will depend significantly on the filter settings TRITON Extreme provides Filter 1 for OSC1 and Filter 2 for OSC2 For each of these filters you can select from two types Low Pass Resonance or Low Pass amp High Pass Filter 2 can be used if Oscillator Mode is set to Double Filter characteristics This area of ia overtones will be diminished Overtones after passing through the filter Level ft pirrer Overtones included in the original multisample Level Frequency pitch Frequency pitch Filterl page PROGRAM P3 Edit Filter Filter Type O Low Pass Resonance aaa Low Pass amp High Pass Trim BE Filter A Freq
297. put can be routed through effects and or Valve Force During sampling you can apply effects or Valve Force use the TRITON Extreme as a 4 in 6 out effect processor or use a vocoder effect that combines the audio input with internal sounds e Six channels of audio output are provided For analog output you have the L MONO and R main stereo output as well as four independent audio out puts INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 and 4 Individual oscilla tors drums timbres tracks or the output of an insert effect can be freely routed to any of these outputs For digital output there s an S P DIF connector two channels L MONO and R that supports a sampling frequency of 48 kHz TouchView user interface As its user interface the TRITON Extreme features the TouchView system with a large 320 x 240 pixel LCD touch panel that lets you perform functions simply by touching the screen a revolutionary leap in operability and practicality USB connectors allow connection to a CD R RW drive and computer The TRITON Extreme provides a USB A connector and a USB B connector allowing you to save data on USB stor age media hard disks removable disks CD R RW drives You can back up data from media in the CF card slot to your computer or edit data on your computer and load it into the TRITON Extreme Front and rear panel Front panel 16 17 4 THON VOLUME Lctioti ojo Z EJ siala 85
298. r SMTi nthe MT RiGumoeiiiasind System Preference 3 Bank Map DER _ Beep Enable Power On Mode gt Memorize System Clock gt Internal WAVE File Play Level Normal Memory Protect _ Program __ Drum kit O Combination O Arpeggio User Pattern Sampling 4 Press the Memory Protect check box for the type of data you wish to write to internal memory so that the box is unchecked When the box is unchecked Mem ory Protect is off and data of this type may be written to internal memory 115 116 Writing global settings user drum kits and user arpeggio patterns The settings you edit in Global mode can be written into internal memory This is done using the operations Write Global Setting Write User Drum Kits and Write User Arpeggio Patterns If you wish to use these edited set tings after you turn the power off be sure to write the data first There are two ways to write global settings user drum kits and user arpeggio patterns amp Before you write a user drum kit or user arpeggio pattern the Global mode memory protect setting must be turned off Memory protect amp The user arpeggio pattern parameter settings Tempo Pattern Octave Resolution Sort Latch Key Sync and Keyboard are set inde pendently in the Program Combination and Song modes These settings are not saved when you per form the Write operation d
299. r and transfer data to and from the device Connect the TRITON Extreme s USB A connector to the USB connector of your external USB device If you connect the TRITON Extreme s USB B connector to your computer you will be able to transfer data to and from your computer You can also send and receive MIDI data to from your sequencer software or similar applica tion Connect the TRITON Extreme s USB B connector to the USB connector of your computer ts For details on connecting USB devices refer to PG p 325 8 Connections to MIDI equipment computers Connections to MIDI equipment The keyboard controllers and sequencer etc of TRITON Extreme can be used to control an external MIDI tone gen erator Conversely another MIDI keyboard or sequencer can control the tone generator of TRITON Extreme to pro duce sound Use MIDI cables to connect the MIDI connectors of TRITON Extreme with the MIDI connectors of your external device t PG p 288 MIDI applications Connecting MIDI devices computers Connections to a computer Your performance on the TRITON Extreme as well as controller and sequencer data can be sent to a computer connected via MIDI interface and the tone generator of TRITON Extreme can be played from the computer Use a MIDI interface to connect the MIDI connectors of TRITON Extreme to the MIDI connectors of your computer Connect the TRITON Extreme s USB B connector to
300. r Mode to Drums When this is set to Drums you will be able to cre ate a drum program This will select a drum kit instead of a multisample TRI TON Extreme provides 50 factory preset drum kits that are suitable for a wide variety of music VNL Here you can only select a drum kit To edit or create a drum kit use Global P5 Drum Kit p 92 The following multisamples or drum kits can be used for the oscillator e Preset multisamples see the table on the preceding page e Multisamples that you sampled RAM Programs can be created from multisamples samples that you sampled in Sampling mode etc or loaded from media in Media mode e Nine internal drum kits ROM e 144 user drum kits created in Global mode Drum samples can be freely assigned to each key to create a drum kit For the sound of each key you can make filter and amp settings and specify routing to the effects and to the individual audio outputs Velocity Zone page PROGRAM P1 Edit Basic OSC1 2 Yelocity Zone OSC1 Top 127 OSC1 Bottom 661 Yelocity Zone EEk A OSC2 Top 127 OSC2 Bottom H Basic Jl Basic Here you can specify the range of velocities for each oscil lator In the example shown above the velocity ranges are as follows e OSC1 will sound at all velocity values e OSC2 will sound only on strongly played notes 64 and above e You can use Velocity Multisample Switching in addition to this parameter High Multisampl
301. r is on the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key is on and running receiving a Song Start message will reset the arpeggiator to the beginning of the pattern This has no relation to the Key Sync setting e In Sequencer mode when the Key Sync setting is unchecked and the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key is on starting the arpeggiator by pressing notes during the pre count before recording will cause the arpeggiator to start and be recorded from the beginning of the arpeggio pattern at the moment that recording begins Synchronization with an external sequencer in Program Combination or Sequencer modes In Program Combination and Sequencer modes when J Tempo is EXT Global P1 MIDI MIDI Clock set to External MIDI or External USB the TRITON Extreme will synchronize to MIDI Clock and Start messages received from an external MIDI sequencer or similar device connected by a MIDI cable Synchronization to external MIDI clock e The arpeggiator will synchronize to the J Tempo based on the timing of the external MIDI clock Synchronization to the MIDI Start message e When the arpeggiator is on and operating receiving a MIDI Start message will cause the arpeggiator to reset to the beginning of the pattern This has no relation to the Key Sync setting amp In Song Play mode the TRITON Extreme will not synchronize to an external MIDI clock Effect and Valve Force settings The effect section of
302. r pages L Are you recording or playing a song Are you sampling Are you playing a CD Are you playing a WAVE file In Combination Sequencer or Song Play modes can t edit the value of Timbre Track parameters such as MIDI Channel or Status Some parameters cannot be edited during a note on condition i e while a note is held down on the keyboard or while the damper pedal is held down Are you using a damper pedal with a polarity that does not match the Damper Polarity setting Global P2 Controller Insome cases this problem can be solved be executing the page menu command Half Damper Calibration Global PO Basic Setup No beep is sounded when you touch the LCD screen Check the Beep Enable check box Global PO Basic Setup System Preference p 90 Audio input and output No sound Are connections made correctly to your amp mixer or headphones p 15 Is the connected amp or mixer powered on and is its volume raised L Is Local Control turned on In Global P1 MIDI check the Local Control On check box PG p 161 C Is the VOLUME slider raised p 3 _ If there is no sound from the OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 4 jacks make sure that BUS Select or BUS Select following the insert effect is set to 1 2 3 Tube 4 Tube 1 2 or 3 4 Tube p 104 If specific tracks in Sequencer mode or Song Play mode
303. r press the PROG key to enter Program P0 Play or press the COMBI key to enter Combination P0 Play When you press the foot switch the pro gram combination will change Creating original scales P3 User Scale Creating a scale and assigning it to a program etc GLOBAL P3 User Scale c D F G AF 00 06 00 00 66 C key D E F G 4 B 00 00 66 06 00 00 6 F 4 G 4 A 4 00 00 66 F4 G4 Ad B4 00 00 00 08 im You can create your own original scales You can create sixteen different User Octave Scales in which the pitch of each note of the octave is repeated for all octaves and one User All Note Scale in which the pitch of each of the 128 notes can be specified independently By adjusting the pitch of each key in the range of 99 you can raise or lower it by as much as approximately one semitone relative to the normal pitch The user scales you create here can be used by specifying the scale for a program for each timbre of a combination or for each track of a song Sequencer Song Play These settings are made by the Scale Use Prog s Scale parameters in the following pages Program P1 Edit Basic Program Basic Combination P2 Edit Trk Param Other Sequencer P2 Trk Param Other Song Play mode Song Play P1 Track Status Scale Here is how to set the scale type for each timbre in Sequencer mode 1 Create a user octave scale or a user all notes scale Sele
304. r stereo can be written to media in one sampling operation mono approximately 440 Mbytes stereo approxi mately 879 Mbytes 2 Access the Sequencer P0 Play REC Sampling page 3 Press the page menu button and choose Auto Sam pling Setup from the menu A dialog box will appear 4 Choose 2ch Mix to Media Auto Sampling HD Audio Setup 2ch Mix to Media O Initialize C Resample SEQ Play O In Track Sampling 5 Press the OK button to execute the command Preparations for In Track Sampling are now complete analo Input 1 Level 127 BUSCIFX Indiv Select Off Pan LOGG Send1 MFX1 00A Send2 MFX2 000 Input2 Level 127 BUSCIFX Indiv Select Off Pan R127 Send1 MFX1 09 Send2 MFX2 G08 Sampling Setup Source BUS D L R Save to gt MEDIA Mode P Stereo Sample Time GA min 66 666 sec k 1 8 9 16 1 3 3 16 1 8 3 16 rence J WA Let s take a look at the settings that were made Input 1 BUS IFX Indiv Select Off Input 2 BUS IFX Indiv Select Off Nothing will be input from the INPUT 1 2 jacks Source BUS L R The sound sent to the L R bus will be sampled Trigger Sequencer START SW After you press the SAMPLING REC key and the START STOP key to enter record ready mode recording will begin when you press the sequencer START STOP key Recording Level 12 0 This is the default setting for resampling Save to MEDIA The resa
305. r will be sampled Press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key to turn it on play the keyboard to start the arpeggio and play your guitar while adjusting the final volume Adjust the recording level as necessary using the Recording Level slider located at the right of the dis play amp If the balance between instruments is not to your lik ing use the LEVEL knob or the performance editor Amp Level to adjust the balance When you have finished making adjustments press the SAMPLING REC key Press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key to turn off the arpeggiator di Press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key to turn it on and then press the SAMPLING REC key to enter record ready mode When you press the SAMPLING START STOP key a count down will begin Play the keyboard during the count down After a four beat count down recording will start Play your guitar The arpeggiator will also start after the count down 2 Press the SAMPLING START STOP key to stop recording 3 Press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key to turn it off Listen to the sound that was sampled Press the Perf Edit tab to select the PO Play Perfor mance Edit page and select the convert destination program 81 82 Record an external audio input source while a song plays and create event data at the same time In Track Sampling function As an example here s how the sound of a guitar con nected to the AUDIO INPUT 1 jack can be
306. rameters displayed in the LCD screen are enclosed in double quotation marks Boldface type Parameter values are printed in boldface type Content that is of particular importance is also printed in boldface type Procedure steps 1 D Steps in a procedure are listed as 0 p 0 These indicate pages or parameter numbers to which you can refer Symbols amp EE 0 These symbols respectively indicate cautions advice and MIDI related explanations Example screen displays The values of the parameters shown in the example screens of this manual are only for explanatory pur poses and may not necessary match the values that appear in the LCD screen of your instrument MIDI related explanations CC is an abbreviation for Control Change Number In explanations of MIDI messages numbers in square brackets always indicate hexadecimal numbers Table of Contents About this Manual ccscscsccscscsccausceevassesasaeaealll Introduc on ssssssnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Maln Tea MITES errien e EAN 1 Feontand tear panel snis nA 3 Names and functions of objects in the LCD screen 8 Overview of the TRITON Extreme s modes 10 About polyphony enprene A 12 DaSIC OPET OI i E E O AN 13 Setup PERE ER ER REPRE ERERRPRRPRRRR 15 CONMECHONG oss en a atanucecni ana 15 Turning the power on off eraron naa 18 Playing and editing programs Program MOde csssscssessseessse
307. ran Recording Level d6 Recording EEk A e to gt RAM Bank gt Sample Time min 10 923 sec Sample Mode gt Stereo ing Setup Jl rence M Status ff Lets check the settings that were made Input 1 Level 127 Pan L000 BUS IFX Indiv Select L R Input 1 Level 127 Pan R127 BUS IFX Indiv Select L R These settings specify the input level from the INPUT 1 2 jacks the panning and select the L R bus as the destination Source BUS L R The sound sent to the L R bus will be sampled Trigger Sampling START SW After you press the SAMPLING REC key to enter sampling ready mode recording will begin when you press the SAMPLING START STOP key Recording Level 0 0 This is the default setting for recording an external input Save to RAM The sampled data will be written to sample memory RAM Mode Stereo The sound of the internal L R channels will be sam pled in stereo amp When you change the Bus setting from Off to L R or IFX the volume level of the AUDIO OUT L MONO and R jacks or the headphone volume may rise abruptly Please use caution Play back the audio source that you want to record If the display indicates ADC OVERLOAD AD converter input overload lower the level by turning the rear panel LEVEL knob to an appropriate posi tion Alternatively lower the level of the output source WA The b
308. rately reproduce the data you created we recommend that you check all of the boxes 9 Press the OK button to execute the Save operation If the data fits on one volume of media The data will be saved on the specified media and you will return to the Save page 118 If the data does not fit on one volume of media The No space available on medium dialog box will appear No space available on medium Do you want to make a divided file Press the OK button and the file will be divided and saved to multiple volumes of media for the Save pro cedure PG p 187 If you don t want to divide the file press the Cancel button and re save it to larger capac ity media When saving ends and you return to the Save page the LCD screen will show the file that was saved The data will be saved to the media and you will return to the Save page The amount of time required will depend on the amount of data If a file with the same name already exists on the media you will be asked whether you want to over write If you wish to overwrite press the OK button If you wish to save without overwriting press the Cancel button re do the operation from step and rename the data in step before saving it The LCD screen will show the files that were saved The various types of data are saved as the following files PCG file Programs combinations user drum kits user arpeggio patterns and global settings that
309. re valid for the other pages as well WA The selected multisample or sample can be played from the keyboard in any page allowing you to hear the results of your editing in each page For an example of sampling refer to QS p 18 On the following page we will explain sampling opera tions that are specific to Sampling mode and how to edit a multisample or sample Creating multisample indexes and sampling Here s how to create indexes for a multisample and how to assign a sample to each index Select the P0 Recording Recording page Index SAMPLING P Recording Recordin aa Multisample Select gt No Assign OrigKey C2 TopKey B2 Range C 1 B2 _ Create Sample Select REC Sample Setu Save to gt RAM Bank gt RAM1 Sample Time min 21 845 sec Sample Mode gt L Mono ing Setup M rence M Status 2 Select MS Multisample Select and create a multi sample To create anew multisample press the MS Multi sample Select popup button Then press a Multisam ple No in the list for which no name has been entered or use the numeric keys 0 9 to input a number and then press the ENTER key A dialog box will appear Create New Multisample 661 a Stereo If you want to create a stereo multisample check the Stereo box and press the OK button If you want to create a monaural multisample uncheck the Stereo box and press the OK b
310. rform overdub recording on a previously recorded track the newly recorded data will be added to the previously recorded data It is best to select this mode if you will be recording additional control data recording a drum pattern or recording the tempo in the master track With this mode data can be added without erasing the existing performance data M Use Track Select to select the track that you want to record 2 Set the Recording Mode to Over Dub pas Recordi ng Setup ae ay O Over Write O Auto Punch In M i Over Dub Loop All Tracks 2828 Masi C Manual Punch In Rerssve pata _ Multi REC 3 For the rest of the procedure refer to steps of Overwrite Manual punch in While the song is playing you can press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key or a connected pedal switch at the desired location to start or stop recording With this method the musical data previously on the track is overwritten by the newly recorded data M Use Track Select to select the track that you want to record 2 Set the Recording Mode to Manual Punch In pas Recordi ng Setup uaa O Over Write O Auto Punch In M C Over Dub C Loop All Tracks i igi Magi Manual Punch In f J Neiisve Dtg O Multi REC 43 44 3 In Location specify a location several measures earlier than the point at which you wish to begin recording 4 Press the SEQUENCER
311. rogram s Scale MIDI Filter Key Zone Velocity Zone Track Name Arpeggiator Assign IFX Indiv Out BUS Select Send1 MFX1 Send2 MFX2 Master track Time signature Tempo Musical data MIDI tracks 1 16 Note On Off Program Change including Bank Select Pitch Bend After Touch Poly After Control Change Pattern No System Exclusive When you change the setting during realtime recording this will be recorded as musical data This allows the starting settings to be modified dur ing the playback Sequencer structure and corresponding pages In Track Sampling Sample Sampling memory RAM Track 1 Parameter Musical in mn Parameter Musical i Track 2 Pemer Msa e OOOO O E inne Track 3 Parameter Musieal O SE in Tracks Eae le in Track 6 Parameter moa yy settings data in Tracks frags wes in settings data Master Routing P8 1 Insert Effect Master Effect Individual Outputs Make Audio cD te WAVE Stereo Media Resampling L R 2ch Mix Musical data MIDI RPN data can be used to change the starting settings during playback For details on control changes and RPN refer to PG p 285 295 i Of the above parameters those that can be edited during realtime recording can be recorded as exclu sive data Patterns T
312. rom the factory it form easy editing select and make settings for contains 1 344 programs excluding the GM2 variation eee ee ea Y iginal b P1 Edit Basic Set basic program parameters such as oscillator a OO ee e and multisample Set scale and controllers editing these factory set programs or by initializing a pro P2 Edit Pitch Settings related to the pitch including the pitch EG gram and starting from scratch You can also create pro P3 Edit Filter Settings related to the filter tone including the fil erams using RAM multisamples that you have sampled ter EG or loaded in Media mode In addition you can play a pro P4 Edit Amp Settings related to the amplifier volume including gram and resample your performance or sample an exter amp EG and pan nal audio source while listening to the sound of a For each of the two LFO s provided for each oscilla program tor select the LFO type and speed etc Settings in the pitch filter and amp pages will determine how Each of the rewritable banks A E and H N contain 128 deeply the LFO that you specify here is applied programs total 1 536 There are also non rewritable bank PGS G GM2 capital programs banks g 1 g 9 variation pro P7 Edit Settings for the arpeggiator Some of these are grams and bank g d drums When shipped banks A Arpeggiator shared with the arpeggiator settings of PO and you D and H N contain preloaded programs may edit them in
313. rpeggiator Setup T01 08 page and set the track 2 Arpeggiator Assign to A Make sure that A is checked for Arpeggiator Run Shift 00 SEQUENCER P Arpeggiator Setup T81 08 EEk A 601 61 600 Meter 474 J aga gt Manu gt 004 Hip Hop Rap PD Track 2 Bass Reso gt Hi YJ LV RPPR fume iBass Keyboar iGuitar PiOrgan Strings iLea Sun SE ccesiadenicavceesey ae ee alae Assign rere Select the Sequencer P7 Arpeggiator Arpeggiator A page and set Pattern to U038 A B SEQUENCER P Arpeggiator Arpeggiator A AA 001 61 00 Meter 4 4 J sa P Manu 15000 Hip Hop Rap DP Track 1 Drums Reso P Hi O RPPR Pattern Octave Sort O Key Sync Yelocity _ Latch Swing 000 Pris k_1 3 3 16 A B Zone _ Keyboard Set Gate and Velocity to Step Do not check Key Sync Press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key The key will light 3 In the Sequencer P0 Play REC Preference page check the Multi REC check box SEQUENCER P Play REC 001 01 000 Meter 444 J aga ph Maru S004 Hip Hop Rap pesia by re gt Track 2 Bass Recording Setup Over Write O Over Dub IASON RII HEE Manual Punch In f J W7 Multi REC Metronome Setup Sound Only REC BUS Output Select P L R Level 127 Precount Measure 2_ a la Pete If Recording Mode is set to Loop All Tracks it will not be possible to select Multi REC
314. rt button the copied step will be inserted 3 Set the last step to End If you set this to Continue to Step01 the cue list will play back repeatedly 4 In Repeat specify the number of times that the song for that step will be repeated For this example set Step 02 S001 VERSE to 02 6 Specify whether effect settings will also be switched when the song at each step is played back If you want to effect settings to change check the FX check box For this example check the FX check box for Step 01 which loads the effects 6 To play back at the tempo that was specified for each song set Tempo Mode to Auto If this is set to Manu Manual playback will use the tempo specified by J SEQUENCER P1 Cue List 6661 61 8O Meter 474 J gt ICO0 NEW CUELIST 00 P Trackas Lead Synth STEP G1 63 SONG 46G INTRO Step Measure Song bai racer gt Saga INTRO J1i24 Espress Lead a2 meges P 5001 YERSE bas moa2s P 602 CHORUS bad iMaazz P End bas When you press the SEQUENCER START STOP key playback will begin from the step that is speci fied as the Current Step SEQUENCER P1 Cue List 0010 01 Meter 4 4 J 108 Auto C00 NEW CUELIST 00 P Trackas Elec Piano K126 Pro Dyno EP STEP G2 63 SONG G61 VERSE Step Measure Repeat Load FX e Step The arrow will indicate the currently playing step indicates the currently
315. rumsample are set to the same exclusive group number the open hi hat and closed hi hat can not be sounded simulta neously ensuring that the hi hat performance will sound natural 2 Use BUS Select to specify the output routing Set this when you wish to send the output of the drum sample assigned to each note number to its own insert effect or AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL jack 1 4 For example you might send all snare sounds to IFX1 all kick sounds to IFX2 and the remaining sounds to L R You can also specify 1 2 3 4 1 2 or 3 4 so that spe cific drum samples will be sent to the AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 4 jacks The settings you make here are used if Use DKit Set ting Program P8 Edit Inert Effect Routing page is checked for the program that uses this drum kit PG p 30 207 3 Use Pan to specify the stereo output position The setting you make here is valid if the Use DKit Setting is checked Program P4 Edit Amp Amp1 Level Pan page for the program that uses this drum kit PG p 23 Use Send1 MFX1 and Send2 MFX2 to set the send levels to the master effects The settings you make here are valid if the Use DKit Setting is checked Program P8 Edit Insert Effect Routing page for the program that uses this drum kit 5 Use the page menu command Write Drum Kits to save the data If you wish to change the name of the drum kit before you save it use the page
316. s is the Enable Exclusive Global P1 MIDI item checked c PG p 162 L Does the TRITON Extreme support the types of messages that are being sent to it PG p 289 Media CompactFlash or Microdrive in the CF card slot Can t format the CompactFlash or Microdrive L Does the media meet the requirements for use on the TRITON Extreme amp p 137 _ Is the media inserted correctly Can t save load data on the CompactFlash or Microdrive _ Is the media inserted correctly _ Has the media been formatted External USB device An external USB connected drive is not recognized _ Has the drive been formatted p 119 _ Is the external device connected correctly PG p 325 _ Did you power on the USB device before powering on the TRITON Extreme L Use the page menu command Scan USB device Media Media Information to re mount the USB device When saving data to an external hard disk the Error in writing to medium message appears frequently _ Execute the page menu command Check Medium Media Utility page to detect and correct errors on the selected MS DOS format media PG p 192 CD R RW Can t write Was the drive subjected to physical shock or vibration while data is being written If you are unable to save data such as PCG or SNG files has the disc been formatted If you are writing audio tracks to create an audio CD it is not necessary to format the disc
317. s button a tabbed popup menu will appear allowing you to perform the following selections e Bank Program Select Bank Combination Select Select programs or combinations by bank e Multisample Select Select a multisample for a program oscillator by category ROM multisamples only e Category Effect Select Select an insert effect or master effect by category To close the tabbed popup menu press the OK button or Cancel button e Category popup button When you press this button a tabbed popup menu will appear allowing you to perform the following selections e Category Program Select Category Combination Select Select programs or combinations by category To close the tabbed popup menu press the OK button or Cancel button f Check box Each time you press a check box a check mark will be added or removed When checked the parameter will function when unchecked the parameter will not function g Radio buttons Press a radio button to select one value from two or more choices h Tab Press the tab to select a page i Page menu button When this button is pressed a list of page menu com mands will appear The page menu commands that appear will depend on the currently selected page You can also select up to ten page menu commands by holding down the ENTER key and pressing a numeric key 0 9 The page menu will close when you press the LCD screen at a location
318. s can be used However a maximum of 120 voices will be available if for example ROM or RAM is used for the High MS and Piano Synth is used for the Low MS and you use velocity switching to play the two tone generators Double Oscillator Mode Normally 30 voices can be used However if OSC1 is sounded by one tone generator and OSC2 is sounded by the other tone generator e g OSC1 ROM OSC2 Piano Synth a maximum of 60 voices can be used If OSC1 and OSC2 use one tone gener ator e g OSC1 ROM OSC2 ROM then a maximum of 30 voices can be used This can also be increased by velocity switch and velocity zone settings Combination Sequencer and Song Play modes Depending on the oscillator mode of the programs you are using the maximum number will vary between 60 voices and 120 voices Example For single mode programs that use ROM or RAM a total maximum of 60 voices For single mode programs that use Piano Synth a total maximum of 60 voices Total 120 voices For double mode programs that use ROM or RAM a total maximum of 30 voices For double mode programs that use Piano Synth a total maximum of 30 voices Total 60 voices Sampling mode Tone generator 1 is always used in Sampling mode Mono samples multisamples 60 voices Stereo samples multisamples 30 voices Basic operation 1 Selecting modes O In order to use a particular function on the TRITON Extreme you must first select the appropri
319. s method to record and then modify the results by using other types of realtime recording or event editing M Use Track Select to select the track that you want to record 2 Set the Recording Mode to Over Write Preference EEk i J 698 gt Manu SEQUENCER P Play REC 001 01 000 Meter 4 4 S000 NEW SONG Reso Hi RPPR P Tracka Drums Over Write O Auto Punch In O Over Dub C Loop All Tracks iiti Magi O Manual Punch In i 3 x3 Data Metronome Setup Sound Only REC Level 127 3 In Location specify the location at which you wish to begin recording 4 Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key and then press the SEQUENCER START STOP key If the Metronome Setup is still set to the default set tings the metronome will sound for a two measure pre count and then recording will begin Play the keyboard and move controllers such as the joystick to record your performance 6 When you finish playing press the SEQUENCER START STOP key Recording will end and the location will return to the point at which you begin recording If you press the PAUSE key instead of the SEQUENCER START STOP key recording will pause When you press the PAUSE once again recording will resume When you are finished press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to stop record ing Overdub With this method the newly recorded musical data is added to the existing data When you pe
320. samples and samples that were sampled with the Convert to item Seq Event checked in Select Bank amp Sample No PG p 63 This means that if you want to re do your sampling you can press the COMPARE key to return the multisample and samples to the state prior to sampling and unwanted samples will not remain amp The program will not be affected by the Compare and will not return to its prior state In general track and pattern event data can not be returned to its original state Comparing song parameters is possible only during song editing when executing a page menu command Operations for which Compare is not available e Editing song parameters e Page menu commands other than those listed above in Operations for which Compare is available Memory Protect Before you record a track or pattern or edit the musical data you will need to turn off the memory protect setting in Global mode p 90 About MIDI Track status status You can specify whether the TRITON Extreme s sequencer will sound the internal tone generator or an external tone generator When Track Status Status P2 Trk Param MIDI Ch T01 08 T09 16 is set to INT operating TRITON Extreme s keyboard and controllers will sound and con trol TRITON Extreme s own tone generator When Status is set to EXT EX2 or BTH operating TRI TON Extreme s keyboard and controllers will sound and control the external tone
321. scillator is being sent to IFX1 in Q making settings as shown in the diagram 4 would connect all five inser tion effects IFX1 IFX2 IFX3 IFX4 gt IFX5 in series so that these effects would be inserted into the output of the oscillator Make settings for Pan CC 8 BUS Sel BUS Select Send 1 and Send 2 for the sound after it has passed through the insert effects If the Chain check box is checked the settings that follow the last IFX will be used Pan Sets the pan This is valid only when BUS Sel is L R BUS Sel BUS Select Specifies the output destina tion Normally you will set this to L R If you wish to send the sound that has passed through the insert effects to AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 4 select 1 4 Tube 1 2 or 3 4 Tube For details on 3 Tube 4 Tube or 3 4 Tube refer to p 109 Send 1 Send 2 Sets the send levels to the master effects For this example set this to 127 9 Select the IFX1 5 pages and set the parameters for each of the selected effects For details on the parameters of each effect PG p 217 Master effects The input levels to the master effects are set by the Send 1 2 levels step or If Send 1 2 are zero the mas ter effects will not apply Send 1 corresponds to MFX1 and Send 2 corresponds to MFX2 In Program P9 Edit Master Effect select the Master FX page PROGRAM P
322. se Write Program Tex rsor qxt Curso Character Set yi gose Character Set E a xtreme 1 Selects the type of extreme ish Sumbol_ character a 2 3 4 5 s 2 Character buttons Hdd Shift button a a s a a 1 Switches between d AROMAMEIDOIG twercase a characters Delete button Deletes the character to the left of the cursor Cancel button OK button Cursor buttons Clear button Move the cursor to left or right Delete all characters orn 12s If you are satisfied with the Space button text that you input press the Insert a space at the OK button If you wish to cursor location discard your input and exit the text edit box press the Cancel button Memory protect To prevent programs combinations songs user drum kits and user arpeggio patterns from being overwritten accidentally the TRITON Extreme provides a Memory Protect setting that prohibits writing to memory Before you save edited data or load data from media use the following procedure to turn the memory protect off uncheck the appropriate check box You must also turn memory protect off before loading the above data from media or via a MIDI data dump or before recording in Sequencer mode Press the GLOBAL key to enter Global mode 2 After pressing the MENU key press either P0 Basic Setup or the 0 key 3 Press the System Pref tab The System Preference page will appea
323. sec utive or nearby numbers or use the same track SEQUENCER P6 Pattern RPPR gt 5004 Hip Hop Rap P Tracka Drums RPPR Setup EEk A J 090 J 6S HipHop Kit Assign Mode Manual C 1 to C2 Shutdown Keys Sune gt Beat Shift 00 Cto last assigned Lear JC Name J Setup Use the above method to assign several patterns from the range of P123 HipHop 3 HipHop P135 HipHop 15 HipHop Press the C 2 key The assigned pattern will play Take your finger off the C 2 key and press the D2 key The pattern will change and playback will begin At this time the pattern operation will depend on the Sync and Mode setting Set KEY to C 2 and set Sync to Measure Make the same setting for D2 Now press the notes consecutively Notice that the patterns operate in a different way With the Measure setting patterns will be handled in one measure units The second and subsequent pat terns will start in sync with the end of previously played pattern If you change the Mode setting to Once the entire pattern will playback to the end even if you release your finger from the keyboard immediately TS To stop playback either press the same key once again or press the C2 or lower key For details on Sync Mode and Shift refer to PG p 92 The assigned keys will be shown as a keyboard graphic in the LCD screen note Unassigned keys can be used
324. select the waveform multisample that determines the basic sound and specify its pitch This sound is then mod ified by the pitch settings Pitch P2 Edit Pitch filter set tings Filter P3 Edit Filter and amp settings Amplifier P4 Edit Amp to create the basic sound of the program This basic sound can then be modified further by using the insert effects P8 Edit Insert Effect settings master effects master EQ and Valve Force P9 Edit Master Effect settings to apply finishing touches When arpeggiator settings P7 Edit Arpeggiator and controller settings P1 Edit Basic Control Setup are added to this the final result is called a program The Compare function When P1 P9 are selected pressing the COMPARE key the key will light will recall the sound as it was written before you edited it Pressing COMPARE again the light goes dark returns you to the version you are editing If you edit while the COMPARE key is lit the key will again go dark and your previous unsaved edits will be lost 23 Oscillator settings P1 Edit Basic Basic settings for the oscillator are made in the P1 Edit Basic page The TRITON Extreme provides two oscilla tors and for each oscillator you can select a basic wave form multisample and set the pitch The multisamples provided by the TRITON Extreme include waveforms for musical instruments such as pianos as well as special waveforms unique to synthesiz
325. sertion effects master effects and indepen dent outputs P9 Edit Master FX Select master effects and make settings Make settings for the master EQ and Valve Force RO For details on how to access each mode and page refer to Basic operation p 13 WA If the EXB MOSS option is installed bank F programs will be available for you to select as a timbre in the combination For details on the parameters of bank F programs refer to the EXB MOSS owner s manual You can perform sampling resampling in Combina tion mode p 80 You can also apply the TRITON Extreme s effects to an external audio input for a wide range of possibilities p 107 111 Controller Setup P4 4 Arpeggi ator P7 El Master Effect Valve 1 2 P9 Force P9 Placement I I I I Final y Master AUDIO OUTPUT EQ P9 L MONO R AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 4 Placement Insert Use Indiv 3 4 BUS Valve I I I I I I I I I L I I P9 P1 1 and P2 2 etc indicate the page tab screens used when editing on the TRITON Exterme 31 32 Playing a combination PO Play Here you can select and play combinations You can select the program for each timbre 1 8 and set its status pan and level You can also make settings for the arpeggiator external audio input and sampling Selecting a combination You can select a combination in any of the following three ways e From th
326. sesnessseessneeees LY EPO STAM SERUC EU LO n NN OO 19 Playing a program P0 Play sisesisisscsssscsteivvcgecinsatinvonies 20 Propran COMING itive a EA eames 23 Oscillator settings P1 Edit Basic e eee eens 24 Pitch settmes 22s Edit Rite oeieo 26 Filter sethines P3 Bait Puteri a incsdaices aceue areca 27 Amplifier settings P4 Edit AMmp cece 28 LFO settings P5 Edit Common LFO eee 29 Arpeggiator settings P7 Edit Arpeggiator 0 30 Insert Effect settings P8 Edit Insert Effect 0 0 00 30 Master Effect and Valve Force settings POP dit Master ENEC laginen OE R 30 More about Alternate Modulation c cece 30 Auto SONS Setup TUMCH OM enean a 30 Playing and editing combinations Combination Mode sssssssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnn OL Combination StrUCtUTE posin inana aina 31 Playing a combination P0 Play 0 0 0 eee 32 COMPU ALON editing sc isessdeesdeisevesienaccdigeseerecstansancaremncvinds 33 Timbre 1 8 program pan and volume Pls Edit Programn Mixe encrena 34 Settings for status MIDI channel and pitch parameters PZ GUA CO Pardina an A 35 MIDI filter settings P3 Edit MIDI Filter 36 Layer split and velocity switch settings Controller settings F4 Edit Zone CU dedaissncosussevsntanceswosveneceansies 36 Arpeggiator settings P7 Edit Arp 0 0 0 cece 37 Insert Effect settings P8 Edit Insert FX 37 Master Effect and Valve Force settings PO Baile Masten EA aeea a K OS 37 Aut
327. shed with a number of operations i e creating indexes for the multisample and assigning a sample to each index editing operations such as deleting copying and inserting indexes and detailed settings such as sample level and pitch for each index Multisample editing is performed in P3 Multisample ZB Basic settings such as creating indexes and assigning samples can also be made in the PO Recording Recording page Editing the indices To change the number or order of the indexes use the Insert Cut Copy and Create buttons 4 Select the P3 Multisample SAMPLING P3 Multisample Multisample Setup Index G61 B82 __ Constant Pitch Sample gt AAAI One Two AAAI Top Key B2 Range C 1 B2 00 Pitch 00 00 BPM Adj in Page Menu 2 Use Multisample MS to select the multisample that you wish to edit 3 Select the Index You can also select an index by holding down the ENTER key and playing a note on the keyboard 4 Press the buttons to modify the number or order of the indices and edit them To delete the selected index press the Cut button The Insert button is used in conjunction with the Cut and Copy buttons The contents of the index that was Cut or Copied will be inserted 77 78 The Create button has the same function as the Create button in P0 Recording Creating multisample indexes and sampling 1 p 69 Modifying the settings of an index M Make
328. songs so that the settings will be consistent Copy Song S66 INTRO DA Without Track Pattern Events amp After your cue list is finished and you convert it into a song the track settings program pan volume etc of each step will be converted into playback data and will be reproduced but if the MIDI channel settings from song to song do not match it may not be possi ble to convert the playback state of the cue list into a song Using a foot switch to switch the Step You can use a foot switch to switch the Step If you set Repeat to FS a foot switch connected to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack will control the timing at which the song stops repeating Set Foot Switch Assign Global P2 Controller page to Cue Repeat Control 2 Converting a cue list into a song Although it is not possible to record additional material onto tracks in a cue list you can convert a cue list to a song and then record solos etc on vacant tracks You will also need to convert a cue list to a song if you wish to save it on a media as SMF data Select the page menu command Convert to Song A dialog box will appear 2 In To Song specify the destination song number for the converted data The cue list name will automatically be assigned as the song name of the converted data For details and cau tions regarding Convert to Song refer to PG p 70 If you select a new song as the conversion destinatio
329. ss and hold this key the key will light and the playback will rewind This key will not function during recording FF gt gt key In Sequencer mode this key will fast forward the song or cue list When you press and hold this key the key will light and the playback will fast forward This key will not function during recording LO CATE key In Sequencer mode this key will advance or rewind the song or cuelist playback to a specified point In Song Play mode this key moves to the specified playback location within the SMF data SEQ UEN CER REC WRITE key In Sequencer mode pressing this key will make the key light and if you then press the SEQUENCER START STOP key recording will begin p 43 In Program Combination and Global modes pressing this key will open a dialog box and if you then press the OK button the edited contents will be written p 114 116 In Program or Combination mode you can hold down the ENTER key and press this key to turn on the Auto Song Setup function p 58 SEQ UEN CER START STO P key This is the start stop key for song or cue list recording and playback in Sequencer mode and SMF playback in Song Play mode During recording and playback the key will blink at the current tempo These keys are also used to play an audio CD in the USB connected CD R RW drive SEQUENCER START STOP key Play Stop FF gt gt key Fast forward lt lt REW key Rewind PAUS
330. ss the Media mode Make Audio CD page In the default state the WAVE File area will show only End Make Audio CD EEk 2 To the track list add the WAVE files that you want to write to the CD Select End it will be highlighted and press the Insert button The Insert Track dialog box will appear Insert Track SONGSGG1 WAY 53 6M 61 12 2661 15 00 00 sf ae SONGBG2 WAY S7 1M 61 12 2061 15 00 31 7M 01712 2001 15 00 00 f ef a SONGRBGS WAY gt CF NEW YOLUME Sampling START STOP plays selected file Use media select and the Open and Up buttons to access the directory that contains the WAVE file and select the WAVE file that you want to add to the list If you want to audition the file you can press the SAM PLING START STOP key to play back the sample amp If you have selected a WAVE file with a sampling fre quency other than 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz it will not be possible to press the Insert button amp WAVE files at a sampling frequency of 48 kHz will be converted to 44 1 kHz when they are written to an audio CD when you execute Write to CD 123 124 To add the file press the Insert button amp Be aware that if you use a faster writing speed in a You can continue adding files until you press the Exit SLOWED syste Writing crois will ocgur button The files will be added to the track list in the Use Mode to specify the writing method
331. ssign Mode Manual C 1 to C2 Shutdown Keys Sync gt Beat Pattern p Preset gt P121 HipHop 1 HipHop Track P Trackat Drums k Edit Name 4 Use KEY to select the key to which the pattern will be assigned Select C 2 This can also be selected by holding down the ENTER key and playing a note C2 and lower keys are used to stop playback and can not be assigned 6 Check the Assign check box 6 Set Pattern Bank to the Preset pattern type and set Pattern Select to pattern P121 HipHop 1 HipHop T Set Track to Track01 Drums The selected pattern will be played according to the settings program etc of the track you select here Shift 00 cto last assigned Assign patterns to other keys For KEY press the A key to select D2 Press the Revert button The settings for Assign Pattern Pattern Bank Pattern Select and Track will be set to the values that were specified earlier in steps 0 paz RPPR Setup KEY assign Mode Manual cee Mode b C 1 to C2 Shutdown Keys Sync gt Measure Pattern User P UG R amp B Sufflet Track P Tracki Drums P00 Pop amp Balad 1 Std Preset Pattern P00 P149 Choose Pattern Select and press the A key to select P122 HipHop 2 HipHop iS By using Revert in this way you can work effi ciently when the patterns to be assigned have con
332. st write it p 114 You can write combinations to the 1 536 combination memory areas internal memory of banks A E and H N You can also save and manage combinations on various types of media p 117 Suggestions for editing procedure First use P1 Edit Program Mixer to select the program for each timbre and then use P4 Edit Zone Ctrl to spec ify the range in which each program will sound layer split velocity switch etc Then adjust the volume of each timbre and set various other parameters To add finishing touches to the sound you can assign insert effect settings in P8 Edit Insert FX and master effect master EQ and Valve Force settings in P9 Edit Master FX that are different from the effect settings of Program mode In addition you can make arpeggiator settings in P7 Edit Arp and controller settings in P4 Edit Zone Ctrl to create the finished combination WA By using the page menu command Solo Selected Timbre you can listen to the selected timbre only This is a convenient way to audition the individual sounds of timbres that are layered PG p 39 Layer split and velocity switch Within a combination you can use key position and veloc ity to determine which program will sound The programs assigned to each timbre can sound in three ways as part of a layer a split or a velocity switch A combination can be set to use any one of these methods or to use two or more of these methods 3
333. standby mode Press the LOCATE key to reset the song playback location to the beginning of the song and press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to play back If you want to verify the location press the Prog 9 16 tab to access the Program T09 16 page Begin playing at the point where you want to record Sampling will begin when the Threshold Level vol ume is exceeded di At the point where you want to stop sampling press the SEQUENCER START STOP key Song playback and sampling will end Sampling will also stop if the specified Sample Time is reached Event data and a program will be assigned to the track you specified in Select Bank amp Smpl No 2 Press the LOCATE key to return to the beginning of the song and press the SEQUENCER START STOP key Notice that the sampled audio is played back along with the song RWA For details on how the Compare function works for In Track Sampling refer to p 60 Resampling a song to create a Wave file Here s how you can resample your song to media es A Wave file you resampled to media can be burned to a CD R RW drive connected to the USB A connector to create an audio CD refer to p 123 WA For details on the types of media you can use refer to p 137 C In Sequencer mode select the song from which you want to create a WAVE file Either create a song or use Media mode to load a pre viously created song amp A maximum of 80 minutes for either mono o
334. stereo position for each timbre A setting of C064 will reproduce the oscillator pan setting of the program Adjusting this parameter will move the sound to left or right while preserving the pan relation ship between the oscillators A setting of L001 is far left and R127 is far right Volume Adjusts the volume of each timbre Create the overall sound by adjusting the volume balance between timbres The Volume setting is an important aspect of creating the sound and this setting will have a significant effect on the overall impression produced by the Combination Settings for status MIDI channel and pitch parameters P2 Edit Irk Param MIDI Ch page COMBINATION P2 Edit Trk Param MIDI Ch Z Bank E BAA Initial CombiEGaa T 1 LOG1 C Grand Piano 1 r E ec le Brass Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Reyboar Status me De Den Be Dp sr Be P er Be fev SPT i MIDI Channel mm orc atc 04 i 05 Status Here you can specify the MIDI status of the internal tone generator assigned to each timbre Normally when play ing the internal tone generator of TRITON Extreme you will set this to INT Set this to Off for timbres that you are not using With settings of Off EXT or EX2 TRITON Extreme will not sound With settings of EXT or EX2 you can control an external tone generator connected via MIDI PG p 38 43 MIDI Channel Timbres that you wish to play from TRITON Extreme s k
335. t as you play and step recording in which the timing length and velocity of each note can be specified in the LCD as you input the pitches from the keyboard e The musical data and control events that you recorded can be edited in various ways including event edit ing and many other edit commands e Exclusive messages including XG and GS format data received from an external MIDI device or parameter changes you create by editing track param eters can now be recorded in realtime on any track You can also use the page menu command Put Effect Setting MIDI Exclusive to Track to record effect parameter settings into the desired location During playback you can send this data to an external MIDI device or use it to control song track parameters or effect parameters Standard MIDI Files SMF con taining system exclusive messages can be loaded in from disk preserving the exclusive data Tone Adjust parameter let you make temporary adjustments to the sound of the program used by a track while leaving the original program unchanged While creating a song you can use this capability to make changes in realtime by for example softening the tone of the bass sound or sharpening the attack of the strings without having to return to Program mode and edit the program itself When the Status of a track is set to INT or BTH an external sequencer can be used to play TRITON Extreme as a multi timbral tone generator W
336. t to the Set Location page menu command From the powered off state turn on the power while holding down the MENU key and EXIT key e Automatically executes Load All Preload PCG and Demo Songs A message of Now writing into internal memory will appear in the LCD screen while the data is being loaded From the powered off state turn on the power while holding down the MENU key and 9 key Warning This operation will cause all user data saved to the internal memory to be lost e Initializes the TRITON Extreme and writes data into internal memory A message of Now writing into internal memory will appear in the LCD screen while the data is being loaded After initialization you will need to load the preload data Execute the Global mode page menu command Load Preload Demo Data to load the data p 127 Appendices Troubleshooting If you experience problems refer to the relevant item and take the appropriate measures Power supply Power does not turn on _ Is the power cable connected to an outlet p 16 C Is the POWER switch turned on Turn on the rear panel POWER switch p 18 LCD screen The power is turned on but nothing is shown in the LCD screen The TRITON Extreme functions normally when you play the keyboard or perform other operations L Use the rear panel Contrast adjustment knob to adjust the contrast of the LCD screen p 7 The power
337. te them PG p 108 188 Is the Trigger setting correct PG p 5 41 63 115 In Sampling mode if you are resampling with Resample set to Auto has the sample to be resampled been assigned to the keyboard and selected for Key p 70 PG p 113 L Is the Source BUS setting correct If you want to listen to the performance of the internal tone generator while sampling only the external input sound i e when using the In Track Sampling func tion you will normally set this to Indiv 1 2 For other types of sampling or resampling set this to L R p 65 PG p 4 41 63 115 _ If a message of Buffer underrun error occurred is displayed frequently when you are sampling to hard disk execute the page menu command Check Medium Media Utility page to find and correct any errors on the selected MS DOS format media PG p 193 A stereo sample can t be played in stereo L Is the multisample stereo Execute the page menu command MS Mono To Ste reo to convert the multisample to stereo PG p 110 _ Is the sample name assigned correctly PG p 106 133 134 Volume of a recorded sample is too low too high _ A sample that you resampled with Recording Level set at approximately 12 0 dB plays back at a lower volume than the volume at which you resampled it Did you turn on the Auto 12 dB On setting when you resampled p 67 If y
338. ted RAM area but the sound will stop for a time when sam pling ends If a song is being played back in Sequencer mode the playback will stop If you are playing back a song or if you are repeatedly recording multiple samples in various locations while lis tening to audio input from a CD etc you can sample with Auto Optimize RAM unchecked and then execute the page menu command Optimize RAM found in the Sampling page of Program Combination or Sequencer modes and in PO P4 of Sampling mode to optimize the RAM when the remaining amount of memory begins to decrease The remaining amount of sample memory RAM can be checked in Sampling mode P0 Memory Status Examples of sampling settings Resampling only the sound of the TRITON Extreme e g arpeggiator and or keyboard performance Input Analog Input1 BUS Select Off Input2 BUS Select Off Source BUS L R Recording Level 12 0 Auto 12dB On On checked PG p 6 64 Resampling the sound of the TRITON Extreme arpeggiator and or keyboard performance together with the input sound from the AUDIO INPUT 1 jack Input Analog Input1 BUS Select L R Pan C064 or as desired Input2 BUS Select Off Source BUS L R Recording Level 12 0 Auto 12dB On On checked PG p 6 64 67 68 Sampling only the stereo input sound from the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks while you listen
339. tem will be subject to editing The parameter value of the edit cell can be modified using the VALUE controllers p 14 or by using a popup but ton in the LCD screen For parameters that accept a note number or a velocity value you can also hold down the ENTER key and play a note on the keyboard to enter the note number or velocity value c Popup button 1 P When this button is pressed a popup menu will appear showing the parameter values that are available for selec tion To input the parameter value press the desired value in the popup menu When a popup menu is displayed operating a VALUE controller p 14 will close the popup menu If the popup menu is unlocked Pin it will close if you touch a location outside the popup menu Popup menu Pin Scroll bar Pin This switches the popup menu display between locked and unlocked When locked the pin will be shown closed and the popup menu will remain displayed even after you press a parameter value When unlocked the pin will be shown opened and the popup menu will close immediately when you press a parameter value Scroll bar Use this when you wish to see parameter values that extend beyond what can be displayed in the screen at one time Press here to scroll to left or right Press here and slide to left Press here to scroll to or right to scroll to the the corresponding desired location location d Popup button 2 D When you press thi
340. ten Program Bank J K F Combination Bank E 000 063 Drum Kit 000 A B 015 A B Arpeggio Pattern U000 A B U199 A B Demo Songs S000 S003 note The EXB MOSS data will be loaded into Program Bank F000 127 and Combination Bank E000 063 O ther functions Setting the function of SW1 and SW 2 You can specify the function of the SW1 and SW2 keys PG p 279 The function of the SW1 and SW2 keys can be specified independently for each program each combination and each song These functions can also be set independently for the entire mode in Sampling mode and Song Play mode You can specify the function that will be performed by the SW1 and SW2 keys and can also select between Toggle when the function will be switched on off each time the SW1 or SW2 key is pressed and Momentary when the function will be on only while you continue holding the SW1 or SW2 key These settings are made by Panel Switch Assign in the fol lowing pages An example of settings in a program PROGRAM P1 Edit Basic Panel Switch As sw PEE sw 2 sw2 mod cc 81 P Toggle P Toggle Realtime Control Knobs B Assign Knob 1 B P F A Attack gt Knob Mod 2 gt Knob Mod 3 gt Knob Mod 4 Controller Setup Aa CC 73 CC 19 CC 20 CC 21 Knob 2 B Knob 3 B Knob 4 B Basic M Basic Jl Zone ll RA When you write a program or combination the on off status of the SW1 and SW2
341. ten into memory This means that if you turn the power of and then on once again pro grams or combinations that use such multisamples or samples will not sound as intended To reproduce such programs or combinations the necessary multi samples or samples must be saved on media and then reloaded amp Data that you edit in Sequencer Song Play or Sam pling cannot be saved in internal memory by the Write operation Saving to various types of media The following data can be saved to various types of media e PCG file Programs combinations global settings user drum kits user arpeggio patterns The data that was checked in the check boxes of the Save dialog box will be saved e SNG file Song and cue list data e KSC KMP KSF files Lists of sample and multisamples KSC file multi samples KMP file samples KSF file MID file Saves a Sequencer mode song in Standard MIDI File SMF format EXL file System exclusive data from an external device that was saved on the TRITON Extreme This allows the TRI TON Extreme to be used as a data filer JKB file Jukebox lists are saved in Song Play mode p 87 All other types of file are saved in Media mode WAV and AIF files A sample you recorded can be exported written as a WAVE file or AIFF file KCD file Audio track list MIDI data dump The following types of data can be transmitted as a MIDI data dump and saved on an external data f
342. ter position 12 o clock Dual arpeggiator editing Here we will use a combination as an example in our explanation The same procedure applies when editing an arpeggio pattern in Sequencer and Song Play modes If you have entered this mode from the Combination mode the arpeggio pattern selected by the combination will be affected by your editing In Combination mode select a combination that uses the arpeggio pattern you wish to edit For this example select a combination to which both arpeggiators A and B are assigned 2 Press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key to turn on the arpeggiator the key will light Even if the arpeggiator had been turned off when you moved here you can use the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key to turn it on However if Arpeggiator Run A or B are not checked and if Arpeggiator Assign is set to off then the arpeggiator will not operate 3 Select the Global P6 User Arpeggio Pattern Setup page 4 If you moved here from Combination mode use the Arpeggio Select A and B to select the arpeggiator that you wish to edit If this is A your editing will apply to the parameters and user arpeggio pattern of arpeggiator A If this is B your editing will apply to the parameters and user arpeggio pattern of arpeggiator B 6 Switch between arpeggiators A and B and edit their respective user arpeggio patterns If you wish to stop one of the arpeggiators return to Combination mode and in
343. the keyboard or controllers of the TRITON Extreme will play and control the TRITON Extreme s internal tone genera tor When the Status of a track is set to EXT or BTH the data played back by that track and the data produced by operating the keyboard or controllers of the TRITON Extreme will play and control an external tone generator The MIDI channel of the external tone generator must match the MIDI channel of the TRITON Extreme track that is set to EXT or BTH With a setting of BTH the external tone generator and the TRITON Extreme s own tone generator will be played and controlled simulta neously PG p 146 Keyboar Drums Keyboar Keyboar iKeyboarii Keyboar Keyboar Keboan e E E Dyer Dwr De D INT DL Per Pe Der a R asasoses Use Program s Scale srooon sesssasossssssssoeossossossosossssss n E T TTT Synchronization with external devices In Song Play mode the TRITON Extreme will be the mas ter the controlling device regardless of the MIDI Clock setting Global P1 MIDI MIDI Clock Effects and Valve Force You can use the TRITON Extreme s insert effects master effects and Valve Force in the same way as in Sequencer mode p 105 107 110 111 PG p 151 Controller Arpeggi Setup ator P2 P7 Valve Force P9 Master Effect 1 2 P9 I I I a Placement Final Master y AUDIO OUTPUT oe L MONO R AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 2 gt
344. the Amp EG and LFO produce time varying and cyclic changes in volume and how the controllers etc will affect the volume Amp 1 applies to OSC1 and Amp2 applies to OSC2 Amp2 can be used if Oscillator Mode is set to Double For example the volume of a piano note begins at a high volume the instant you play the note and then decreases gradually The volume of an organ note remains constant as long as you continue pressing the key The volume of a note on a violin or wind instrument can be varied during the note by the musician i e by regulating the amount of pressure on the bow or the force of the breath Volume Piano Volume Organ Volume remains constant Volume decays gradually until note is released Time Time Amp1 Level Pan page PROGRAM P4 Edit Amp Level Amp Level ams D Off Intensity 00 S Mod EG vl PanJl_ Mod EG Amp Level Adjusts the volume of the sound that has passed through the oscillator filter and amp Pan Specifies the pan stereo position after the signal has passed through the oscillator filter and amp Normally you will set this to C064 If Oscillator Mode is Double and you wish to create a sense of stereo set the Amp1 Level Pan page and Amp2 Level Pan page parameter Pan to left and right for oscillators 1 and 2 respectively With a setting of Random the pan will change randomly each time you play a note on TRITON Extreme producing an interesting
345. the INPUT 1 2 jacks will be sampled Set Mono 1 Mono 2 Stereo to Stereo The sound will be sampled in stereo Set To to the track you want to use for In Track Sam pling A MIDI note for triggering the sample will be recorded in the track you specify Set Program to the convert destination program number When sampling is completed a new multi sample will be automatically created converted to a program and assigned as the program for the track 7 Press the OK button to execute the command Preparations for In Track Sampling are now com pleted SEQUENCER P Play REC Sampling w Input P Anatog COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY MEDIA Input Level 127 leo ep ae Pan Laga isi Save to gt RAM Mode gt Stereo Sample Time A min 14 923 sec WA Let s take a look at the settings that were made Input 1 Level 127 Pan L000 BUS IFX Indiv Select 1 2 These settings specify the input level from the INPUT 1 jack and the panning and select the 1 2 bus as the destination Source BUS Indiv 1 2 The sound sent to the 1 2 bus will be sampled Trigger Sampling START SW After you press the SAMPLING REC key to enter sampling ready mode recording will begin when you press the SAMPLING START STOP key Recording Level 0 0 This is the default setting for recording an external input Save to RAM The sampled data will be written to sample memory RAM M
346. the curve that is appropriate for your own playing dynamics playing style and the effect that you wish to obtain PG p 155 Velocity Curve selects the velocity curve and After Touch Curve selects the aftertouch curve Bypassing the effects You can bypass the insert effects and master effects for the entire TRITON Extreme For example if you ve connected the TRITON Extreme s outputs to an external mixer and are using an external effect processor to apply reverb or chorus to the sound along with other audio sources you can turn off the TRITON Extreme s master effects If the Effect Global SW IFX 1 5 Off MFX1 Off and MFX2 Off items are checked the insert effects master effect 1 and master effect 2 will respectively be bypassed 89 90 Linking the arpeggiator to programs and combinations You can specify whether the arpeggiator settings written into a program or combination will also be selected when you select a program or combination or whether the cur rent arpeggiator settings will be retained even if you switch programs or combinations When shipped from the factory the former setting is selected Choose the latter setting if you want to keep the same arpeggio pattern running while you switch only the program or combination If the Auto Arpeggiator Program or Combination box is checked the arpeggio settings will also change when you select a program or combinati
347. the internal tone generator or an external tone generator MIDI Channel specifies the MIDI channel for each track If the track Status is set to INT playing the track data or operating the TRITON Extreme s keyboard or con trollers will cause the TRITON Extreme s internal tone generator to be played If Status is set to EXT EX2 or BTH playing the track data or operating the TRITON Extreme s keyboard or controllers will cause an external tone generator to be sounded and controlled The MIDI channel of the external tone generator must be set to match the MIDI Channel of TRITON Extreme tracks that are set to EXT EX2 or BTH If Status is set to BTH both the external tone genera tor and the TRITON Extreme s own tone generator will be sounded and controlled i kes 16 1 3 41 42 If you are using the TRITON Extreme s Sequencer mode as a 16 track multi timbral tone generator set this parameter to INT or BTH amp Status PG p 72 In general you should set MIDI Channel to different channels 1 16 for each track Tracks that are sent to the same MIDI channel will sound simultaneously when either is recorded or played SEQUENCER P2 Trk Param MIDI Ch 161 65 001 01 00Q Meter 4 4 J 998 pb Manu bjIS000 NEW SONG Dh Track 1 Drums Reso PH Hi m RPPR k 1 6 3 16 1 3 39 16 1 8 3 16 1 8 4 Adjust the effect settings Make settings for each effect in Sequencer
348. this time but your adjustment will affect the data that will be sam pled If CLIP is displayed lower the Recording Level located at the right of the display to an appropriate level SAMPLING P Recording Input Analog SAMPLING Input 1 Level 127 BUSCIFX Indiv Select gt L R Pan Loge Input2 Level 127 BUSCIFX Indiv Select gt GM iPan R127 Recording Setup Input Prefe Memory Setup Jl rence Jl Status We recommend that you set the Recording Level as shown below depending on whether you are sampling only an external input source or resampling the play back of a song or a performance played on a program combination or sample At this time you can also set Auto 12 dB On p 67 so that the recorded sample will play back at an appropriate level When sampling only an external input source Recording Level 0 0 dB Auto 12 dB On off unchecked When resampling sampling the playback of a song or your keyboard performance using a program combi nation or sample or When simultaneously resampling and sampling an external audio source Recording Level 12 0 dB Auto 12 dB On on checked p 67 The recording level and Auto 12 dB On 3 When you have finished making adjustments press the SAMPLING REC key 3 Specifying the recording method Recording Setup Sampling Setup C In Source BUS s
349. to matically be assigned to Sample Select Press the C2 key and verify that reverb is applied amp In Sampling mode the P8 Insert Effect Routing page BUS IFX Select parameter will automatically be set to L R when resampling ends This prevents an insert effect from being applied in duplicate when you monitor the results of resampling through an insert effect If you want to apply an insert effect once again re select IFX1 EA As an alternative to automatically resampling as described above Resample Auto you can simply sample the sounds that you play from the keyboard Resample Manual In Sample Select assign the sample that you will resample and set Resample to Manual Set Trig ger to Note On and set Sample Mode to Stereo as desired Then set the bus and effect as described in steps 2 and press the SAMPLING REC and then the START STOP key and then press the C2 key to start resampling When you want to stop resampling press the SAMPLING START STOP key Ripping Data from an audio CD in a CD ROM or CD R RW drive connected to the USB A connector can be loaded into the TRITON Extreme as sample data You can do this in either of two ways you can play back the audio CD and capture the sound via the AUDIO INPUT or you can load rip it directly as digital data amp If you are using a CD ROM or CD R RW drive con nected to the USB A connector us
350. to input the setting Hold down the ENTER key and play the note that you wish to enter as a value The note number or velocity value will be input When the Global P5 Drum Kit page is displayed you can hold down the ENTER key and play a note to recall the settings that have been assigned to that note In Sampling mode you can hold down the ENTER key and play a note to recall the index that is assigned to that note Connections amp Connections must be made with the power turned off Please be aware that careless operation may dam age your speaker system or cause malfunctions 3 Analog audio input connections CD player if l a passive type guitar a guitar analog record player etc without an internal preamp is connected it will not be possible to sample at an appropriate level due to the impedance mismatch Such instruments must be AUDIO OUTPUT connected via a preamp or effect AUX OUT etc Mic 5 Connecting pedals DAMPER ASSIGNABLE MIDI OUT a MIDI cable Power Switch MIDI IN a AUD INPUT win w ASSIGNABLE u PER SWITCH PEDAL TRITON OOO 5b Wa MAIN IN 2 1 w R L MONO 0 O00000 e POWER ON p ACV A CENIA id Al SZ ae ne B Extr
351. to monitor the sound being sampled connect AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO R and INDIVIDUAL 1 to your mixer and use headphones etc to monitor the output of the mixer Press the PROG key to enter Program mode and select the K020 Processed Kit program 2 Turn on the arpeggiator ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key is lit and play the keyboard to make sure that a drum phrase is sounded Press the Arpeggio tab and make sure that Latch is checked Also adjust the arpeggiator tempo J as desired 3 Press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key to turn off the arpeggiator 4 Connect your guitar to the rear panel AUDIO INPUT 1 jack Set the AUDIO INPUT MIC LINE switch to the LINE position and set the LEVEL knob to approximately the center position 2000000 1 MAX MIN bg O O7 LINE LEVEL amp If you are using a guitar with passive pickups i e without an internal pre amp the mismatch of impedance levels will make it difficult to sample at an appropriate level You should route the signal from the guitar through a pre amp or effect unit 6 Use Auto Sampling Setup to make settings We ll start by making settings to sample a drum phrase Make settings as described in Resampling an arpeggiated phrase in Program mode QS p 22 steps 3 9 6 Modify the settings so that the input signal from the AUDIO INPUT 1 jack will be sent to the L channel
352. to the results OSC Basic page PROGRAM P1 Edit Basic OSC1 Multisample High Piano _ S 0ffset _ Rev Lvl 127 Octave 8 8 gt EERE Transpose 00 Low P Piano _ S Offset _ Rev Lvl 127 Tune 9000 P 202 4 Piano BD mf L Delay G000ms OS5C2 Multisample zzz OSC Basic aa High Piano _ S 0ffset J Rev LY 127 ctave 0 81 p 291 amp Piano BD ff R Low P Piano _ 5 0ffset _ Rev Lvl 127 Tune 6608 i Transpose 88 P 993 4 Piano BD mf R Delay 8808ms Yelocity M Sample SW Lo gt Hi O5C1 686 O5C2 686 Velo Contro Zone ller In this page you can select the multisample for each oscil lator The TRITON Extreme contains 962 different multi samples VNL Data sampled on the TRITON Extreme can also be used as a multisample Selecting a multisample The multisample will determine the basic character of the program Use High MS Bank to select the multisample bank and use High Multisample to select the multisam ple You can select preset multisamples if High MS Bank is set to other than RAM If High MS Bank is RAM you can select multisam ples that were sampled on the TRITON Extreme or loaded in from media Select from 000 999 for High multisample Multisample bank ms Sank wore no Epara 000 424 TRITON Classic preset multisam ples 000 999 RAM multisamples created in Sampling mode or loaded in Media mode Piano
353. to the sound of the TRITON Extreme arpeggiator etc Input Analog Input1 BUS Select 1 2 Pan L000 Input2 BUS Select 1 2 Pan R127 Source BUS Indiv 1 2 Recording Level 0 0 Auto 12dB On Off unchecked PG p 6 64 In this case the sound that is input to AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 will be output only to AUDIO OUTPUT INDI VIDUAL 1 and 2 Using the metronome It is convenient to use the metronome when you want to play a program or combination at a specific tempo and sample your performance To access the metronome settings use the Program or Combination P0 Play Sampling page menu command Metronome Setup We recommend that you set BUS OUTPUT Select to either 3 or 4 and connect the INDI VIDUAL 3 or 4 jack to your mixer so that the metronome can be monitored via your mixer Automatically setting up for the desired sampling method Auto Sampling Setup In each mode Auto Sampling Setup automatically makes the appropriate settings for the sampling related parame ters so you don t have to perform steps 1 4 described above For example in Program mode you can use this to make the necessary settings for resampling your playing on a program or to make settings for sampling only an external audio source while you monitor your playing on a program However these automatic settings assume typical situations so you ll need to adjust the parameters to meet your si
354. tor This lets you use your computer to access data on the TRITON Extreme s CompactFlash Microdrive card This connec tion also lets you send and receive MIDI data between the TRITON Extreme and your computer PG p 325 W hat is USB USB stands for Universal Serial Bus and is an interface for transferring data between a computer a keyboard and or peripheral devices 7 MIDI MIDI THRU connector Musical data and sound settings etc that are received at the MIDI IN connector are re transmitted without change from the MIDI THRU connector You can use this to connect multiple MIDI devices PG p 288 MIDI OUT connector Musical data and sound settings etc are transmitted from this connector Use this to control another MIDI device connected via this port to the TRITON Extreme PG p 288 MIDI IN connector Musical data and sound settings etc are received at this connector Use this to play the TRITON Extreme from another MIDI device connected to this port PG p 288 a _ 1 500 88 506 de 1 R IMON C ra o O 7220 00 or AUDIO INPI LLAT OUTPUT MUSIC WORKSTATION SAMPL MIC LINE 8 DAMPER jack An optional switch type pedal such as the Korg DS 1H damper pedal can be connected here If a DS 1H is connected it will function as a half damper pedal If another switch type pedal is connected it will function as a damper switch In order to ensure that the pedal fu
355. treme The expla nations are organized by mode and page Explanations and other information on the effects and their parameters are also provided for each effect Refer to this guide when an unfamiliar parameter appears in the display or when you need to know more about a particular function Voice Name List This lists the multisamples and drumsamples that are built into the TRITON Extreme and the factory preset combinations programs drum kits and user arpeggio patterns Refer to these lists when you wish to know more about the preloaded sounds Conventions in this manual References to the TRITON Extreme The TRITON Extreme is available in 88 key 76 key and 61 key models but all three models are referred to without distinction in this manual as the TRITON Extreme Illustrations of the front and rear panels in this manual show the 61 key model but the illustra tions apply equally to the 88 key and 76 key models Abbreviations for the manuals QS OG PG VNL EM The names of the manuals are abbreviated as follows OS Quick Start OG Operation Guide PG Parameter Guide VNL Voice Name List EM EXB MOSS Owner s Manual included with the EXB MOSS option Keys and knobs References to the keys dials and knobs on the TRI TON Extreme s panel are enclosed in square brackets References to buttons or tabs indicate objects in the LCD display screen Parameters in the LCD display screen Pa
356. tro Intro A A B Chorus 02 s001 A 02 03 S002 B 01 Chorus A A B Chorus Chorus er o5 S001 A 02 06 S002 B 01 07 S003 Chorus 02 08 S001 A Solo 01 09 S003 Chorus 03 10 S004 Ending 02 1 Creating a cue list Each unit in a cue list is called a step and each step con tains a song number and the number of repeats Here we will use a cue list to combine the previously cre ated songs S000 INTRO S001 VERSE and S002 CHO RUS 1 Select Sequencer P1 Cue List With the default settings song S000 will be selected for Step 01 and End will be selected for Step 02 SEQUENCER P1 Cue List 6601 61 G6G Meter 4 4 J 120 icoo NEW CUELIST 00 P Trackas Lead Synth J124 Espress Lead STEP 41 61 SONG G6G INTRO Length 488 Step Measure So Repeat Load FX bai meaa P 5990 INTRO ag paz magas P End pas bad pes 2 Add a song to the Step area Select the Song for Step 02 and press the Insert button A song will be added to step 02 Use the VALUE controller to select S001 VERSE In the same way select the Step 03 Song and press the Insert button to add a song to Step 03 Set this to S002 CHORUS If you press Cut button the selected step will be deleted If you press the Insert button the deleted step will be inserted If you press the Copy button the selected step will be copied If you press the Inse
357. tuation This function is available in the following pages Mode Page Sampling Sampling PO Recording Combination PO Play Sampling Program PO Play Sampling Sequencer PO Play REC Sampling For examples of the settings refer to p 80 82 83 QS p 18 22 For a detailed explanation refer to PG p 7 42 64 112 Sampling and editing in Sampling mode In Sampling mode you can record samples and edit sam ple data that you sampled or loaded from media includ ing WAVE and AIFF formats You can also assign the edited samples to indexes zones to create a multisample Sampling mode page structure PO Recording Record samples Select the sample or multi sample to record make various recording settings and AUDIO INPUT settings View the memory status Perform waveform editing etc on samples that were sampled or loaded in Media mode Set sample playback parameters Start Loop Start End Address Loop on off and Reverse on off Editing operations such as Time Slice and Time Stretch assignments zone and original key etc ee C es WA For details on how to access each mode and page refer to Basic operation p 13 P1 Sample Edit P2 Loop Edit P3 Multisample WA Sampling can be performed in any page PO P8 of Sampling mode by using the REC WRITE key and the START STOP key Recording related settings such as input level are made by the parameters of PO Recording and these settings a
358. tup MIDI Channel gt EY Local Control on Convert Position PreMIDI Note Receive gt All MIDI Clock O Internal External MIDI External USB Receive Ext Realtime Commands MIDI Filter Enable Program Change Bank Change Combination Change Enable After Touch Enable Control Change UO Enable Exclusive 3 Create a new song and in the Sequencer P0 Play REC Preference page check the Multi REC check box Set the Recording Mode to Over Write Eee R ecor di ng Se tup ee Over Write O Over Dub Miki 7 vee PES Yd ele os fo osinean Art Pracka of isi TO JAUN REI or ars Eiir wee d gasse 4 Select the PO Play REC Program T01 08 T09 16 page For the tracks that you are not recording set PLAY MUTE REC to PLAY or MUTE 6 In P2 Trk Param MIDI Ch page MIDI Channel specify the MIDI channel for each track Set the MIDI channel of each external sequencer track to match the MIDI channel of each TRITON Extreme track Data of the corresponding channel will be recorded on each TRITON Extreme track Make sure that Status is set either to INT or BTH 6 Press the LOCATE key to set the location to 001 01 000 7 Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key to enter recording standby mode Start the external sequencer The TRITON Extreme sequencer will receive the MIDI Start message transmitted by the external sequencer and will automatically begin recor
359. u can use event edit operations to modify data that has been recorded or to insert data The page menu command Get From Track can be used to take musical data from a desired area of a track and use it as the musical data for a pattern Conversely the page menu commands Put to Track and Copy to Track can be used to place or to copy the musical data of a pattern in a track Realtime recording on a MIDI track This is a method of recording in which your playing on the keyboard and your operations of controllers such as the joystick are recorded in realtime This method of recording is normally used one track at a time and is called single track recording As an alternative multitrack recording allows you to simultaneously record multiple channels of data onto multiple tracks This is the method you will use when using the RPPR function and the arpeggiator function to record multiple tracks of musical data at once or when you playback existing sequence data on an external sequencer and record it onto TRITON Extreme s sequencer in realtime These settings are made in Sequencer P0 Play REC Preference page Recording Setup e Overwrite With this method the musical data previously recorded on a track is overwritten by the newly recorded data When you perform overwrite recording on a previously recorded track its musical data will be deleted and replaced by the newly recorded data Normally you will use thi
360. ue you specify will sound the Low multisample velocities at or above this velocity value will sound the High multisample For example if you set Velocity M Sample SW Lo Hi to 100 playing the keyboard softly will sound the Low multisample and playing strongly will sound the High multisample 3 Adjust the Lvl Level for High and Low multisam ples to set their volume balance If you do not wish to use this function set the Veloc ity M Sample SW Lo Hi value to 001 Only the High multisample will sound Rev Reverse check box If this is checked the multisample will be played back ward This can produce interesting results when used on sound effects etc Normally you will not check this When Oscillator Mode Double To use OSC2 set Oscillator Mode to Double in the Pro gram Basic page In the same way as for OSC1 you can set High and Low multisamples for OSC2 The playback pitch can be set independently By using the same multisample with slightly different Tune settings you can detune the oscillators to produce a richer sound WA It will be convenient to use the page menu command Copy Oscillator to make the oscillator settings match each other When Oscillator Mode Drums PROGRAM P 1 Edit Basic OSC Basic Transpose 00 s LVEED Tune 9000 Delay GGGGms Seog Ry Velo pene Zone ller In the Program Basic page set Oscillato
361. uency 37 Frequency 00 Filteri Filter1 Filter1 Filter1 Filter2 Filter2 Filter2 Filter2 Mod Mfo Mod EG Mod Jfo Mod EG J Filter Type Filter A Filter B Selects the type of filter and specify the Frequency cut off frequency and Resonance resonance level e Low Pass Resonance 24 dB oct low pass filter with resonance Make settings for filter A e Low Pass amp High Pass 12 dB oct low pass filter and 12 dB oct high pass filter in series connection Make low pass filter settings in filter A and high pass filter settings in filter B Filter Type Low pass filter This is the most common type of filter which allows the low frequency range to pass and cuts the high frequency range When the overtones of the high range are cut a bright sound will become darker more mellow 24 dB oct and 12 dB oct refer to the steepness of the cut 24 dB oct means that the gain will decrease 24 dB in one octave i e as the frequency doubles A 12 dB oct filter would decrease the gain 12 dB in one octave The 24 dB oct filter produces a steeper cut Low Pass Level 12dB oct 24dB oct Frequency High pass filter This type of filter allows the high frequency range to pass and cuts the low frequency range Use this when you wish to make the sound thinner However if the cutoff fre quency Frequency is raised excessively high the volume will become very low High Pass L
362. uitable for various musical styles 144 GM 152 GM contain nine different preset drum kits that are compatible with the GM2 sound map For details on the factory set drum kits refer to VNL In the Global P5 Drum Kit page you can create your own original drum kit by changing the drum sample assigned to each key of a drum kit and adjusting the pitch and level of each assigned drum sample You can also create original drum kits using sample waveforms that you sam pled on the TRITON Extreme or loaded into sample mem ory RAM in Media mode A drum kit that you edited or created can be written into one of the user drum kit memory areas 000 A B 143 User Drum kits can also be saved to various types of media in Media mode Multisample programs and drum kit programs There are two types of programs those whose oscillator uses a multisample and those whose oscillator uses a drum kit This selection is made by the Program P1 Edit Basic Pro gram Basic page Oscillator Mode setting To use a mul tisample for the program set Oscillator Mode to Single or Double To use a drum kit set Oscillator Mode to Drums About program parameters Just as the character and effect processing of a melodic instrument such as piano organ trumpet or strings is fundamentally different from that of percussion instru ments such as drums or timpani the program parameter structure of a multisample program Oscillator
363. une and global MIDI channel Create user drum kits 144 kits user arpeggio patterns 507 patterns and user scales 16 one octave scales and 1 all note scale Create drum kits using the 1 171 internal drum samples ROM You can also use RAM samples that you created on the TRITON Extreme or loaded from media Rename program and combination categories Set the function of the assignable pedals and assignable switches Transmit data dumps of MIDI exclusive data Media mode Data of each mode can be saved and loaded using CompactFlash or Microdrive media Format the above types of media You can also manage data by copying it etc Korg AKAI AIFF and WAVE format sample data can be loaded Sample data can also be saved in Korg format or exported in AIFF or WAVE formats Songs that you created in Sequencer mode can be saved in SMF format SMF files can be loaded as Sequencer mode songs You can use the Data Filer function to save load MIDI exclusive data Edit Wave files Specify the song order of Wave files and use a CD R RW drive connected to the USB A connector to create an audio CD You can also play back audio CDs Use a computer connected to the USB B connector to manage e g copy or delete data on media inserted in the TRITON Extreme s CF card slot USB storage mode 11 12 About polyphony Tone generators and oscillators Each oscillator in the TRITON Extreme is sounded by one of t
364. use this function to start recording immediately Hold down the ENTER key and press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key The Setup to Record dialog box will open and ask Are you sure Press OK You will auto matically enter Sequencer mode and will be in the record ready state Press the START STOP key to start the sequencer and begin recording Producing songs Sequencer mode TRITON Extreme contains a 16 track MIDI sequencer The sequencer acts as a hub integrating TRITON Extreme s numerous functions amp When you turn off the power the settings made in Sequencer mode and the song data cue list data and any user pattern data that you recorded will not be backed up If you wish to keep this data you must save it on media before turning off the power or per form a MIDI data dump to save the data on an exter nal data filer etc If you wish to save the programs track parameters effects and arpeggiator function settings etc selected for a song as a template song use the page menu command Save Template Song Immediately after the power is turned on TRITON Extreme will not contain any cue list data or song data so if you wish to playback a song on the sequencer you must first load data from media or receive a MIDI data dump from a MIDI filer p 121 PG p 163 176 Features of the sequencer e The sequencer lets you record a maximum of 200 000 events note data etc up to 200 songs and as
365. utton 3 Press the Create button to create an index Immediately after the power is turned on the Index will be indicated as 001 001 This means that there is only one index The range that is highlighted in the keyboard amp Index is the range of the selected index Press the Create button several times Each time you press it an index will be created The keyboard display will indicate the zone and original key location of each index RA The index that is created when you press the Create button will be created according to the P0 Recording Preference page Create Zone Preference settings These settings can also be made in P3 Multisample Prefer ence page Create Zone Preference PG p 116 137 SAMPLING P Recording Create Zone Preference z Position gt Right to Selected Index Zone Range 12 Keys Original Key Position gt Bottom REC Sample Preference Auto Loop On __ Auto 12dB On Metronome Setup BUS Output Select L R Level Memory Status Immediately after the power is turned on Position will be Right to selected index Zone Range will be 12 Keys and Original Key Position will be Bot tom so that indexes will be created as shown below MS gt GGG NewMS aaa index ERM gas es If you set Zone Range to 1 Key an index will be created for each note of the keyboard It is convenient to use 1 Key when you wish to sample numerous takes in su
366. vel that will be in effect when the SW1 key is pressed If Amt is set to 10 pressing the SW1 key will reduce the feed back level to 0 sre P JS CC O1 Using the BPM MIDI Sync function to synchronize the delay time to arpeggiator tempo changes Set BPM to MIDI For L C and R set Delay Base Note and Times as desired For this example set Delay Base Note to and Times to x1 so that the effect will be easily under standable The delay time will repeat at an interval of a 8th note PROGRAM P8 Edit Insert Effect L C R BPM Delay BPM MIDI L Delay Base Note C Delay Base Note R Delay Base Note Feedback C Delay High Damp 8 IFX1 a Time Over gt Level 20 Times x1 Level 26 Times M Level 26 Sre Sw 1 cc s0 Amt 30 Low Damp a Times x1 Input Level Dmod 188 Spread 50 Wet Dry s s Sre off Amt 8 FX 1 2 3 d 5 Rotate the TEMPO knob and the delay time will change When you push the joystick away from yourself and press the SW key the feedback level will rise and the delays will become longer di When you turn on the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF switch the arpeggiator will begin playing Select any desired arpeggio pattern When you rotate the TEMPO knob the delay time will change in syn chronization with the changing tempo of the arpeggio sre JS Y CC A1 amp If you rotate the TEMPO knob to
367. verter After passing through Valve Force the sig nal will be output to AUDIO OUTPUT L MONO R and from the headphone jack PROGRAM P9 Edit Master Effect YALYE E A YALYE FORCE Input Trim 064 Ultra Boost 666 Tube Gain B64 Output Level ory H If you set Placement to Insert User 3 4 BUS Valve Force will be placed after conversion to an analog sig nal by the Indiv Output 3 4 output DAC Digital Ana log Converter Bus 3 4 will be the input to Valve Force and will simultaneously be output from Individ ual 3 4 After passing through Valve Force the signal will be converted back into digital form by the ADC Analog Digital Converter and sent to the insert effects master effects L R Individual 1 2 and 3 4 buses as specified by the Pan CC 8 BUS Select Send1 and Send2 settings PROGRAM P9 Edit Master Effect YALYE aa ALYE FORCE Input Trim 64 Ultra Boost 666 Tube Gain 664 Output Level 127 ALYE FORCE PantCC 3 BUS Sel Sendi Send2 OPV TO taal Geil Wd o In Out amp You can t use Valve Force on the L R output from S P DIF nor when resampling the L R output in the various modes 4 Specify the input output destination for Valve Force If Placement Final Valve Force will be inserted as the final stage of the L R output If Placement Insert Use 3 4 BUS If you want to send the output of oscillator 1 2 to Valv
368. vided samples In Sequencer mode you can play this performance data and adjust the playback tempo without affecting the pitch of the rhythm loop sample You can also exchange the note numbers of the data or modify the timing to freely re create new rhythm loops The TRITON Extreme provides an In Track Sampling function which lets you sample an external audio source while the song plays back and will automati cally create note data to trigger that sample at the appropriate point during the playback of the track When you ve created a song you can resample it to media and turn it into an original audio CD by using Media mode to burn the song to a CD R RW drive connected to the USB A connector 39 40 The structure of Sequencer mode Sequencer mode is structured as follows Songs A song consists of MIDI tracks 1 16 a master track song parameters such as the song name effect arpeggiator and RPPR parameters and 100 user patterns A maximum of 200 such songs can be created on TRITON Extreme MIDI tracks 1 16 and the master track each consist of setup parameters located at the start location and musi cal data within the track Setup parameters MIDI tracks 1 16 Bank Program No PLAY MUTE REC Pan Vol ume Track Play Loop Loop Start Measure Loop End Measure Play Intro Status MIDI Channel Bank Select When Status EX2 Force OSC Mode OSC Select Por tamento Transpose Detune Bend Range Delay Use P
369. vidual banks Drum kits and arpeggio patterns can also be loaded individually or as a group This is a convenient way to rearrange combinations in the order in which you will use them during a live perfor mance amp Be aware that if you change the order of programs the sounds played by combinations may also be affected p 133 As an example here we will explain how a combination saved in bank D can be loaded into E000 Move to the Bank D directory and select the com bination that you want to load PCG file Combina tions Bank D The procedure is as follows 1 Perform steps described above press the PCG file containing the data you want to load it will be highlighted and press the Open button 2 Press Combinations to highlight it and press the Open button 3 Press Bank D to highlight it and press the Open button 4 Press the scroll bar to find the combination you want to load and highlight it in the display Alternatively you could select any file since the desired file can be selected later from the dialog box 12 89 2082 17 46 06 12 69 2602 17 46 06 l Indian Ocean Soft yet smooth 12 69 2002 17 40 00 12 09 2002 17 40 00 Brash Tpts amp Choir P D Stereo Mallets ies ff When you press the keyboard of the TRITON Extreme the selected combination will sound How ever the internal programs will be used as the pro gram of each timbre 2 Press the page me
370. were saved in inter nal memory SNG file Sequencer songs and cue lists KSC file A file which lists the multisamples and samples used Directory A directory containing the multisamples KMP files and samples KSF files that are listed in the KSC file WA When using Save All Save PCG amp SNG and Save PCG to save combinations you should also remember to save the programs used by each timbre and the drum kits used by the programs and user arpeggio patterns at the same time Similarly when saving programs you should also remember to save the drum kits and user arpeggio patterns used by the programs ee If your programs or drum kits use multisamples and samples that were created in on TRITON Extreme we recommend that you use Save All to save the data When you use Save PCG or Save Sampling Data to individually save a program or drum kit or a mul tisample or sample that you created we recommend that you save them under the same filename in the same directory When you use Load PCG to load a PCG file the identically named KSC file will also be loaded so that the correct multisamples samples will correspond automatically Using the TRITON Extreme as a data filer The TRITON Extreme can receive MIDI exclusive data sent by an external device and save this data to media This is referred to as Data Filer functionality Execute the page menu command Save Exclusive
371. when you select a program by category in Program P0 Play Category Category Program Select Program categories can also be used when selecting programs in Combination P0 Play in P1 Edit Program Mixer Category Category Timbre Program Select or in Sequencer PO Play REC Cate gory Category Track Program Select In the case of a combination the category you specify here will be used when you select a combination by category in Combination P0 Play Category Cate gory Combination Select 6 Use To to specify the bank and number of the writ ing destination program combination Use the VALUE controllers or the BANK keys to make your selection 6 To execute the Write operation press the OK button To cancel without executing press the Cancel button When you press the OK button the display will ask Are you sure When you press the OK button once again the data will be written Using the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key to write This method can only be used to re write update the selected program combination number Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key The following Update Program Update Combination dialog box will appear The screen shown is for Program mode Update Program ApG BD Grand Concert Are you sure 2 To write the data press the OK button To cancel without writing press the Cancel button About the Edit Buffer When you select a program or
372. with a character unlike a typical organ Piano LFO settings P5 EdittCommon LFO For each oscillator you can use two LFO Low Frequency Oscillator units LFO1 and LFO2 You are free to select the type of each LFO and set its speed The depth of the LFO1 and LFO2 that you specify here is adjusted by the settings of the P2 Edit Pitch P3 Edit Fil ter and P4 Edit Amp pages PROGRAM P5 Edit OSC1 LFO1 Wavefo rm gt Sine a Frequency 10 Offset 66 w _ Key Syne Fade aa Delay BA Frequency Modulation AMS1 Note Number AMS2 p JS CC 01 Intensity 00 Intensity 33 Frequency MIDI 7Tempo Sync _ MIDI Tempo Sync Base Note gt 2 Times i osti OsC1 Osct2 0SC2 k LFOL LFO2 LFO1 Jl LFO2 OSC1 LFO1 OSC1 LFO2 OSC2 LFO1 OSC2 LFO2 Waveform selects the type of LFO You can choose from a variety of waveforms including standard waveforms such as Triangle Saw Square and Sine as well as Step or Random PG waveforms that produce a sample and hold effect PG p 26 You can create a wide variety of effects by adjusting the Offset Fade and Delay settings and by changing the sign of the Intensity setting in the P2 Edit Pitch P3 Edit Filter and P4 Edit Amp pages Fre quency specifies the speed of the LFO Frequency Modulation AMS can be used to vary the LFO speed This lets you change the LFO speed by operating a controller or
373. with the media 125 126 Restoring the factory settings The preload data stored in the TRITON Extreme can restore all the programs combinations drum kits user arpeggio patterns and global settings to their original fac tory settings The original demo songs can also be re loaded at any time using this same method This is done by re loading the preload data stored within the TRITON Extreme amp Before you load the preload data go to the Global mode P0 Basic Setup System Preference page and uncheck the Memory Protect settings for the data that you want to load If you execute this operation with these settings checked a message of Memory Protected will appear and the data will not be loaded amp Never turn off the power while the data is being loaded amp When you load a PCG file the data in the TRITON Extreme s internal memory will be overwritten by the data of the PCG file programs combinations drum kits user arpeggio patterns global settings If you want to keep the data that is currently in internal memory use Save All or Save PCG to save it before you continue Restoring the factory settings 1 Access the Global mode P0 Basic Setup Basic page Press the GLOBAL key to enter Global mode If the Global PO Basic Setup Basic page is not shown press the EXIT key and then press the Basic tab 2 Press the page menu button and choose Load Pre load Demo D
374. wo Tone Generators Each tone generator is connected to the various PCM memories as shown in the diagram below Tone Generator 1 e ROM Internal PCM ROM 32 Mbytes e RAM User sample memory 16 Mbytes expandable to a maximum of 96 Mbytes Tone Generator 2 e Piano e Newl e New2 e Best e OrchS e OrchB e Vint e Synth Internal PCM ROM 128 Mbytes PCM memory PCM memory Piano Internal PCM ROM 16 Mbytes ROM Internal PCM ROM 32 Mbytes RAM 96 Mbytes User sample memory Expandable to a maximum Total 128 Mbytes Factory settings is 16 Mbytes Tone Generator 2 Tone Generator 1 Maximum 60 oscillators Maximum 60 oscillators B Total maximum 120 oscillators Each tone generator is able to simultaneously sound up to 60 oscillators i e to play the PCM data connected to that tone generator Together the two tone generators are able to sound up to 120 oscillators For example up to 60 oscillators can use the ROM and up to 60 oscillators can use the Piano making a total of 120 oscillators However you can t play 61 or more oscillators from the ROM alone N umber of voices in each mode The maximum number of voices that can be played simul taneously will depend on the oscillator mode of the pro gram e For a Single Drum mode program 1 oscillator 1 voice e For a Double mode program 2 oscillators 1 voice Program mode Single Drums O scillator Mode Normally 60 voice
375. x in the P1 Sample Edit page or the PO Recording Recording page to select the sample p 69 amp If you use Sample Select to select the sample be aware that the index assignment will also change 2 Select the P1 Sample Edit page SAMPLING P1 Sample Edit Edit Range Start GG0G606 Edit Range End 8806666 Sampling START plays edit range irni FT64 RP The waveform data of the currently selected sample will be displayed note Sample waveforms that were recorded with a Sam pling Mode of Stereo will be shown in two lines The upper line is the L channel waveform and the lower line is the R channel waveform 3 Use Edit Range Start and Edit Range End to spec ify the range that you wish to edit The selected range will be highlighted SAMPLING P1 Sample Edit If you wish to hear the sound of the selected range press the SAMPLING START STOP key The selected range will play back at the pitch of the base key the key shown in gray on the keyboard display You can select the base key by holding down the ENTER key and playing a note on keyboard When you play a key to which the sample is assigned the highlighted range of the keyboard displayed in Keyboard amp Index the sample will be played back according to its loop settings ee The procedure for using the ZOOM and Use Zero check boxes is the same as for P2 Loop Edit 4 From the list of page menu select the desired
376. y Sequencer mode will be selected SAMPLING key Sampling mode will be selected S PLAY key Song Play mode will be selected GLO BAL key Global mode will be selected MEDIA key Media mode will be selected 7 COMPARE key Use this key when you wish to compare the sound of the program or combination that you are currently editing with the un edited sound already in memory You can also use this key to make before and after comparisons when recording or editing in Sequencer mode p 14 8 VALUE controllers The following VALUE controllers are used to set the value of the selected parameter p 14 VALUE slider VALUE Use this to modify the value of a parame ter This controller is convenient when you wish to make large changes in the value This slider can also be used as a modula tion source A V keys These are used to increase or decrease the parameter value in steps of one These keys are convenient for mak ing fine parameter adjustments 10 s HOLD ENTER VALUE dial Use this dial to modify the value of the parameter Numeric keys 0 9 EN TER key key 10 s HOLD key Use these keys to numerically input a parameter value Use numeric keys 0 9 the key and the 10 s HOLD key to enter the value and press the ENTER key to confirm it The 10 s HOLD key lets you input a value with a decimal point The key inverts the sign
377. y The settings in each of these modes are made in the simi lar way As an example the following explanation shows how to make settings in Combination mode For a detailed expla nation and example settings PG p 50 93 149 The dual arpeggiator functionality lets you do the follow ing things e Assign an arpeggiator for each timbre Choose from Off arpeggiator A or arpeggiator B t step 6 e Independently specify whether A and B will operate t step e Select an arpeggio pattern and set parameters independently for A and B step e Make Scan Zone page settings so that you can use keyboard range or playing velocity to switch between normal playing and arpeggiated playing or to switch between arpeggiators A and B t step s e Make settings for timbres that will be silent when the arpeggiator is Off and will sound only when the arpeggiator is On t step 0 Arpeggiator on off Each time you press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key the arpeggiator will be switched on or off When on the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key will light The selected arpeggio pattern will begin when you play the keyboard The on off setting is saved when the combination is writ ten into memory amp If Assign is Off or Arpeggiator Run is not checked the arpeggiator will not operate even if this key is on Arpeggiator settings 1 Select Combination P1 Edit Program Mixer page Select programs for the timbres that you wish to use For this
378. y RAM The TRITON Extreme music workstation is a powerful tool for music production or live performance HI Hyper Integrated synthesis system The HI Hyper Integrated synthesis system is a PCM tone generator system with full digital signal processing that guarantees pristine sound and featuring enormous flexi bility in musical expression modulation and effect rout ing The TRITON Extreme contains an analog vacuum tube circuit Valve Force When you use Valve Force the signal is converted into analog form at that point Tone generator section e 160 Mbytes of preset PCM ROM contains 962 multisamples and 1 175 drumsamples e The TRITON Extreme is shipped with 16 Mbytes of RAM you can expand this to a maximum of 96 Mbytes letting you use samples or multisamples you sampled resampled or loaded in Media mode e The sampling frequency is 48 kHz and the maximum polyphony is 60 voices a maximum of 120 voices can be used depending on the PCM sounds you use Filter synthesis section e Either a 24 dB oct Resonant Low Pass or a 12 dB oct Low Pass amp High Pass type filter can be used A wide variety of filter effects can be achieved from active sounds with aggressive resonance to subtle tones using a high pass filter e A broad range of editing parameters gives you precise control over every aspect of the sound Effect section e Five insert effects stereo in stereo out two master effects mono in stereo out
379. y saving it to media or sending it as a MIDI data dump note In addition to these methods data stored on media in the CF card slot can be saved to your computer You can also use Wave files to create an audio CD that can be played in a CD player Writing to internal memory The following types of edited data can be written into the internal memory e Program Programs 000 127 in banks A F H N However bank F is available only if the EXB MOSS option is installed e Combination Combinations 000 127 in banks A E H N e Global settings Global P0 Basic Setup P4 Category Name e User drum kits 000 A B 143 User e User arpeggio patterns U000 A B U506 User e User template songs U00 U15 Song settings such as the song name and tempo track settings p 40 arpeggiator settings and effect set tings can be saved written to internal memory How ever the musical data for song tracks and patterns are not saved to internal memory Furthermore settings that govern how the musical data is played back such as Meter Metronome PLAY MUTE Track Play Loop including Start End measure and RPPR settings will not be saved either Use the Sequencer mode page menu command Save Template Song to write this data PG p 60 amp If multisamples or samples from the RAM bank are used in the Multisample or Drum Kit of a program you should be aware that these multisamples or sam ples cannot be writ
380. y changes from blinking to lit This time is required in order to allocate sufficient space on the media Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to play back the song and adjust the resampling volume while you watch the level meters If the level meter indication is too low use the VALUE controller to raise the level from 12 0 as far as possible without causing the CLIP indicator to appear The output volume will not change at this time but your adjustment will affect the data that will be sampled p 67 fe The power on default setting is 12 0 dB At the 12 0 dB setting CLIP will not appear even if the song is played back at the maximum level When you finish making adjustments press the SAM PLING REC key Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to stop the song playback Then press the LOCATE key Start sampling Press the SAMPLING REC key and then the SAM PLING START STOP key to enter recording standby mode Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to play back the song Sampling will begin at the same time When the song finishes playing back press the SAM PLING START STOP key to stop sampling Use the page menu command Select Directory to verify that the WAVE file was created Select the file and press the SAMPLING START STOP key to listen to the sound that was sampled M4 The pickup level of a WAVE file is specified by the WAVE File Play Level amp PG p 158
381. y sold EXB MOSS is installed the spe cial bank F can be used in Song Play mode as well For details on the bank F parameters refer to the EXB MOSS owner s manual Track 2 Parameter settings Musical data Routing P8 1 Track 3 Parameter settings Musical data Track 4 Parameter settings Musical data Track 5 Parameter settings Musical data Track 6 Parameter settings Musical data Track 7 Parameter settings Musical data Insert Effect Master Effect Track 8 Parameter settings Track 16 Musical data Individual Outputs amp The parameter settings of Song Play mode are not backed up when the power is turned off If you wish to save the program track parameter and effect set tings of the song use the page menu command Save Template Song to save them About Standard MIDI Files SMF Song Play mode will play SMF Format 0 or Format 1 data Only files with an extension of MID are recognized as SME by the TRITON Extreme About MIDI Track status settings in Song Play mode You can select whether the musical data played by a track or the data produced by operating the TRITON Extreme s keyboard and controllers will sound the TRITON Extreme s internal tone generator and or will sound an external tone generator When the Status of a track is set to INT the data played back by that track and the data produced by operating
382. you may have moved here from Sampling mode or Media mode Effects Effects are not applied _ Have you selected effect program 000 Select an effect other than 000 No Effect for IFX1 5 or MFX 1 2 Are the IFX 1 5 Off MEFX1 Off or MEFX2 Off Global PO Basic page settings checked p 89 If you are in Combination Sequencer and Song Play and master effects are not applied when you raise the Send1 or Send2 of the timbre track does Return 1 or Return 2 from the master effect need to be raised p 105 Alternatively has Send 1 or Send 2 for each oscilla tor of the program used by the timbre track been low ered tp 105 M4 The actual send level is determined by multiplying the send setting of each oscillator in the program with the send setting of the timbre track Have you routed the output to an insert effect t p 104 105 MIDI The TRITON Extreme does not respond to incoming MIDI data Are all MIDI cables connected correctly PG p 288 _ Is the MIDI data being received on the channel on which it is being transmitted PG p 289 The TRITO N Extreme does not respond correctly to incoming MIDI data _ Are the Global P1 MIDI settings Enable Program Change Enable Bank Change Enable Control Change and Enable AfterTouch each checked PG p 162 _ If you wish to receive MIDI exclusive message

Korg music workstation/sampler Musical Instrument User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents